Micro Station V8i Everything 3D

MicroStation V8i Everything 3D
Bentley Institute Course Guide
TRN012880-1/0001
Trademarks
AccuDraw, Bentley, the “B” Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation and SmartLine are registered
trademarks; PopSet and Raster Manager are trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a service
mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.
Java and all Java‐based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, Distiller, Exchange, and PostScript are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Windows, Microsoft and Visual Basic are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Other brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Patents
United States Patent Nos. 5,8.15,415 and 5,784,068 and 6,199,125.
Copyrights
©2000‐2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.
MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.
IGDS file formats ©1981‐1988 Intergraph Corporation.
Intergraph Raster File Formats ©1993 Intergraph Corporation.
Portions ©1992 – 1994 Summit Software Company.
Portions ©1992 – 1997 Spotlight Graphics, Inc.
Portions ©1993 – 1995 Criterion Software Ltd. and its licensors.
Portions ©1992 – 1998 Sun MicroSystems, Inc.
Portions ©Unigraphics Solutions, Inc.
Icc ©1991 – 1995 by AT&T, Christopher W. Fraser, and David R. Hanson. All rights
reserved.
Portions ©1997 – 1999 HMR, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions ©1992 – 1997 STEP Tools, Inc.
Sentry Spelling‐Checker Engine ©1993 Wintertree Software Inc.
Unpublished – rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States and other
countries. All rights reserved.
MicroStation V8i Everything 3D ii Feb-09

Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Table of Contents
Course Overview ____________________________________ 1
Course Description ____________________________________ 1
Target Audience_______________________________________ 1
Prerequisites _________________________________________ 1
Course Objectives _____________________________________ 2
Modules Included _____________________________________ 2
Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 3
Questions ________________________________________ 3
Answers__________________________________________ 4
3D View Control ____________________________________ 5
Module Overview _____________________________________ 5
Module Prerequisites __________________________________ 5
Module Objectives_____________________________________ 5
Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 6
Questions ________________________________________ 6
Answers__________________________________________ 6
View Rotation ________________________________________ 6
The Rotate View tool _______________________________ 7
Rotating to a standard view __________________________ 10
Rotating a view using the mouse ______________________ 11
Fitting 3D Views _______________________________________ 13
Clip Volume __________________________________________ 13
Clip Volume Options ________________________________ 16
Clip Volume By Section Plane _________________________ 17
Clip Volumes and View Attributes _____________________ 19
Clip Volume Settings and Display Style__________________ 20
Applying a clip volume ______________________________ 21
Manipulating a clip volume from a second view __________ 28
Saving clip volumes _________________________________ 29
Working with multiple clip volumes ____________________ 31
Using a clip mask___________________________________ 34
Display Styles Dialog ___________________________________ 36
Understanding Display Style dialog tools. _______________ 37
Perspective __________________________________________ 39
Saved Views dialog ____________________________________ 39
Feb-09 iii Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Understanding the Saved Views dialog. _________________40
Module Review _______________________________________44
Questions_________________________________________44
Answers __________________________________________44
AccuDraw in 3D _____________________________________ 47
Module Overview______________________________________47
Module Prerequisites___________________________________47
Module Objectives _____________________________________47
Introductory Knowledge ________________________________48
Questions_________________________________________48
Answers __________________________________________48
The AccuDraw Drawing Plane ____________________________49
3D Element Placement _________________________________49
Using AccuDraw’s rotated drawing plane________________56
Non‐orthogonal rotation_____________________________58
Locating elements relative to others ___________________66
Using Auxiliary Coordinate Tools ______________________71
Auxiliary Coordinates dialog tool features:_______________71
AccuDraw Shortcuts for ACS __________________________72
Define an ACS aligned with a reference file ______________74
ACS interaction with AccuDraw _______________________74
Separate ACS per View ______________________________75
Projecting Points from and ACS to a Plane _______________75
Module Review _______________________________________76
Questions_________________________________________76
Answers __________________________________________77
B‐Spline Curves _____________________________________ 79
Module Overview______________________________________79
Questions_________________________________________80
Answers __________________________________________80
3D Workflows_________________________________________80
Interactive handles to control 3D objects during creation___81
MicroStation V8i Curve Tools ____________________________81
Edit Control Points__________________________________82
Change Curve Order ________________________________82
Change Curve Closure _______________________________82
Edit Weights ______________________________________82
Edit Kinks ________________________________________83
Edit Knots_________________________________________83
Edit Nodes _______________________________________84
Fair Curvature _____________________________________84
Table of Contents iv Feb-09

Deform Curve _____________________________________84
Curve Handlebar ___________________________________85
Split Curve ________________________________________85
Linear Elements _______________________________________86
NURBS in more detail _______________________________86
Degree and Order __________________________________86
Control Points _____________________________________87
Knots ____________________________________________87
Knots and Control Points_____________________________88
Evaluation or Basis Rule _____________________________88
B‐spline curves ____________________________________89
Accuracy _________________________________________90
Curve types _______________________________________90
Place B‐spline Curve tool_____________________________91
Place Composite Curve ______________________________100
Conic and Spiral Curve tools __________________________105
Place Conic________________________________________105
Place Helix tool ____________________________________108
Challenge Exercise _____________________________________111
Marine Design ‐ Hard Chine Hulls ______________________111
Drawing a Catenary _________________________________114
Module Review _______________________________________115
Questions_________________________________________115
Answers __________________________________________116
Basic 3D Solids ______________________________________ 117
Module Overview______________________________________117
Questions_________________________________________118
Answers __________________________________________118
3D Workflows_________________________________________118
Interactive handles to control 3D objects during creation___119
Solids Modeling ____________________________________119
Surface Modeling tasks ______________________________120
Feature Based Solids Modeling tasks ___________________121
3D Primitive Solids _____________________________________122
Slab Solid _________________________________________123
Place Sphere ______________________________________123
Place Cylinder _____________________________________124
Place Cone ________________________________________124
Place Torus _______________________________________125
Place Wedge ______________________________________125
Place Pyramid Solid _________________________________126
Elliptical Cone Solid _________________________________128
Feb-09 v MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Table of Contents
Ellipsoid Solid______________________________________129
Regular Polyhedron _________________________________129
Create Solids Toolbox __________________________________131
Solid By Extrusion __________________________________131
Solid By Revolution _________________________________136
Solid By Thicken Surface _____________________________139
Linear Solid _______________________________________140
Challenge Exercises ____________________________________142
Module Review _______________________________________143
Questions_________________________________________143
Answers __________________________________________143
Advanced Solid Modeling _____________________________ 145

Module Overview______________________________________145
Questions_________________________________________146
Answers __________________________________________146
Working Area _________________________________________146
Solids Modeling Task ___________________________________148
Solid By Extrusion Along ________________________________148
Shell Solid tool _____________________________________158
Solid by Thicken Surface tool _________________________162
Replace Face ______________________________________164
Boolean tools _________________________________________164
Unite Solid tool ____________________________________164
Intersect Solids tool_________________________________167
Subtract Solids tool _________________________________169
Cut Solids by Curves tool_____________________________172
Fillets and Chamfers ________________________________176
Fillet Edges tool ____________________________________176
Chamfer Edges tool _________________________________177
Taper Solid tool ____________________________________183
Edit 3D Primitive tool _______________________________187
Module Review _______________________________________188
Questions_________________________________________188
Answers __________________________________________191
Solid Utilities _______________________________________ 193

Module Overview______________________________________193
Questions_________________________________________194
Answers __________________________________________194
Table of Contents vi Feb-09

Utility Tools __________________________________________195
Align 3D tool ______________________________________195
Change SmartSolid Display tool _______________________206
Extract Face or Edge Geometry tool ____________________208
Compute Intersections tool __________________________211
Convert To Solid ___________________________________211
Module Review _______________________________________213
Questions_________________________________________213
Answers __________________________________________213
Conceptual Modeling ________________________________ 215

Module Overview______________________________________215
Questions_________________________________________216
Answers __________________________________________216
Conceptual Modeling Tools ______________________________217
Draw on Solid _____________________________________217
Modify Solid Entity _________________________________219
Delete Solid Entity __________________________________220
Conceptual Modeling Basics _____________________________220
Drawing lines on a Solid face _________________________220
Projecting lines on a Solid face ________________________222
Create a Conceptual Design _____________________________223
Module Review _______________________________________227
Questions_________________________________________227
Answers __________________________________________227
Solid Modeling Challenge Exercises _____________________ 229
Introduction to Feature Modeling ______________________ 245

Module Overview______________________________________245
Questions_________________________________________246
Answers __________________________________________246
Feature Modeling Task _________________________________247
Feature Modeling versus Solid Modeling ___________________248
Creating Feature‐Based Solids ____________________________248
Seed Files and Feature Modeling ______________________248
Working Area and Feature Modeling ___________________249
Creating Feature‐Based Solids ________________________249
Modifying Feature‐Based Solids __________________________253
Feb-09 vii MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Table of Contents
Modifying features parametrically _____________________253
Modifying one or more blends of a group _______________253
Modifying holes____________________________________256
Modifying the underlying solid ________________________257
Manipulating Features__________________________________259
Modifying and Manipulating Interactively __________________261
The Features Toolbox __________________________________264
Cut Feature tool ___________________________________264
Sweep Edge Feature tool ____________________________266
Boss and Protrusion Feature tools _____________________267
Rib Feature tool____________________________________269
Thin Shell feature __________________________________271
Modeling Methods_____________________________________273
Module Review _______________________________________275
Questions_________________________________________275
Answers __________________________________________275
Advanced Feature Modeling __________________________ 277

Module Overview______________________________________277
Questions_________________________________________278
Answers __________________________________________278
Dimension Driven Design________________________________278
The Purpose of Dimension‐Driven Design _______________279
How does it work?__________________________________279
Glossary of terms __________________________________280
Dimension Driven Design task_________________________281
Geometric constraints_______________________________282
Constraints and Feature Modeling ________________________286
Constrain Feature __________________________________286
The Feature Manager __________________________________291
Working with Feature Manager _______________________291
Viewing a solid at various construction stages ____________292
Controlling the display of features _____________________292
Rearranging feature order ___________________________294
Variable Driven Modeling _______________________________297
Feature modeling examples __________________________300
Profile‐Driven Feature Solids _____________________________300
Creating profile‐driven feature solids ___________________301
Extruded and Revolved features_______________________301
Tube Feature ______________________________________303
Skin Solid Feature __________________________________304
Helix Feature ______________________________________305
Thicken Feature____________________________________306
Table of Contents viii Feb-09

Modifying profile‐driven feature solids _________________307
Modifying Face Features ________________________________314
Taper Face Feature _________________________________314
Extend Face Feature ________________________________315
Spin Face Feature __________________________________317
Remove Face Feature _______________________________319
Replace Surface Feature _____________________________319
Deform Face Key‐in _________________________________321
Module Review _______________________________________325
Questions_________________________________________325
Answers __________________________________________325
Introduction to Surfaces ______________________________ 327

Module Overview______________________________________327
Questions_________________________________________328
Answers __________________________________________328
B‐spline Surfaces ______________________________________329
Module Review _______________________________________334
Questions_________________________________________334
Answers __________________________________________334
Surface Creation ____________________________________ 335

Module Overview______________________________________335
Surface Modeling ______________________________________336
Primitive Surfaces _____________________________________336
Create Free Form Surfaces ______________________________337
Construct Loft Surface __________________________________337
Direction Arrows ___________________________________338
Using Loft Elements_________________________________341
Loft by Section with Guide Wires ______________________342
Loft Surface By Vertices _________________________________345
Swept Surface along Curves______________________________353
Helical Surface ________________________________________355
Loft Rectangle to Circle _________________________________357
Surface by Network of Curves ____________________________360
Construct Surface by Edge Curves _________________________361
Surface by Corner Points ________________________________364
Module Review _______________________________________365
Questions_________________________________________365
Answers __________________________________________366
Feb-09 ix MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Table of Contents
Surface Modification and Blending _____________________ 367

Module Overview______________________________________367
Questions_________________________________________368
Answers __________________________________________368
Modify Surfaces Tools __________________________________369
Trim Surfaces tool __________________________________369
Trim Surfaces by Curves _____________________________371
Untrim Surface tool _________________________________374
Stitch Surfaces _____________________________________376
Offset Surface _____________________________________378
Change Normal Direction ____________________________378
Extend Surface_____________________________________380
Merge Surface to Edge ______________________________382
Fillet Surfaces Tools ____________________________________382
Fillet Surfaces tool __________________________________383
Fillet Surfaces along Curves___________________________386
Blend Surfaces _____________________________________389
Module Review _______________________________________391
Questions_________________________________________391
Answers __________________________________________392
Modify B‐spline Surfaces _____________________________ 393

Module Overview______________________________________393
Questions_________________________________________394
Answers __________________________________________394
Modify B‐Spline Surfaces ________________________________394
Edit Surface Control Points ___________________________395
Change Surface Order _______________________________398
Change Surface Closure______________________________400
Rebuild Surface ____________________________________400
Combine Surfaces __________________________________401
Split Surface_______________________________________401
Surface Handlebar__________________________________404
Twist Surface ______________________________________405
Module Review _______________________________________406
Questions_________________________________________406
Answers __________________________________________406
Surface Utilities _____________________________________ 407

Module Overview______________________________________407
Table of Contents x Feb-09

Questions_________________________________________408
Answers __________________________________________408
Surface Utilities _______________________________________409
Convert To Surface _________________________________409
Extract Points from Surface/Face ______________________411
Extract Iso‐Curves __________________________________413
Planar Slice _______________________________________417
Compute Intersections ______________________________419
Unroll Developable Surface___________________________420
Surface By Image ___________________________________421
Show Surface Curvature _____________________________423
Match Surface Settings ______________________________425
Module Review _______________________________________426
Questions_________________________________________426
Answers __________________________________________426
Meshes ____________________________________________ 427
Module Overview______________________________________427
Mesh Surfaces ________________________________________428
Creating a Mesh _______________________________________429
Mesh from Element_________________________________429
Mesh By Contours __________________________________431
Place Grid Mesh____________________________________432
Developable Mesh by Curves _________________________432
Modify Mesh _________________________________________432
Mesh Booleans ____________________________________432
Combining Feature Models and Meshes ________________435
Other Modify Mesh tools ____________________________436
Mesh Utilities _________________________________________438
Module Review _______________________________________439
Questions_________________________________________439
Answers __________________________________________439
Visualizing a 3D Design _______________________________ 441

Module Overview______________________________________441
Questions_________________________________________442
Answers __________________________________________442
Luxology Technology ___________________________________442
Feb-09 xi MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Table of Contents
Visualization Toolbox ___________________________________442
Materials _________________________________________444
Animation ________________________________________445
Rendering and Lighting _________________________________445
Rendering and lighting settings________________________447
The Render Tool_______________________________________449
Rendering as a design aid ____________________________449
Rendering modes __________________________________449
Antialiased Rendering __________________________________454
View Perspective ______________________________________456
Render Settings _______________________________________458
Stroke Tolerance ___________________________________461
Shadows _________________________________________461
Lights Task ___________________________________________463
Default Lighting ____________________________________463
Light Setups _______________________________________464
Light Manager _____________________________________465
Global Lighting ________________________________________466
Ambient __________________________________________466
Flashbulb _________________________________________467
Solar_____________________________________________467
Source Lighting________________________________________471
Shadow generation from source lighting ________________471
Place Light tool ____________________________________472
Place Light tool settings _____________________________475
_________________________________________________481
Materials ____________________________________________482
Material and Projection Tasks_________________________483
Pattern maps ______________________________________483
Bump maps _______________________________________483
Materials stored in DGN _____________________________484
Material tables ____________________________________484
Material Map sizes locked to aspect of map image ________484
The Apply Material Tool _____________________________484
Multi‐Layered Materials ________________________________489
Projection modes for Pattern/Bump Maps __________________492
Projection modes for materials________________________492
Tools for controlling Material Projections _______________493
The Define Camera Task ________________________________495
Setup Camera _____________________________________496
Define Camera_____________________________________497
Camera action options ______________________________499
Controlled Movement _______________________________501
Saving Rendered Images ________________________________501
Saving a rendered image_____________________________502
Viewing a saved image ______________________________503
Distributed Rendering __________________________________504
Table of Contents xii Feb-09

Simplified setup for Distributed Rendering ______________504
Distributed Rendering Related dialogs __________________505
Module Review _______________________________________505
Questions_________________________________________505
Answers __________________________________________506
Using Dynamic Views ________________________________ 507

Module Overview______________________________________507
Questions_________________________________________508
Answers __________________________________________508
Glossary _____________________________________________509
Dynamic Views Overview________________________________510
Take a picture, it will last longer _______________________511
General workflows _________________________________512
Dynamic View Workflow Task ____________________________513
View Setup________________________________________523
2D or 3D sheets ____________________________________535
Module Review _______________________________________536
Questions_________________________________________536
Answers __________________________________________536
Importing and Exporting Drawings in 3D _________________ 537
Module Overview______________________________________537
Questions_________________________________________538
Answers __________________________________________538
Exporting 3D to 2D_____________________________________538
Conversion options _________________________________538
Exporting Visible Edges ______________________________539
Exporting 2D to 3D_____________________________________543
Export to and from Google Earth__________________________544
What Google Earth is________________________________544
How it works ______________________________________545
Google Earth tools__________________________________546
Defining geographic location _________________________546
Defining a placemark monument ______________________547
Removing placemark monuments _____________________549
Adding Hyperlinks __________________________________549
Exporting files _____________________________________551
Capture Google Earth Image __________________________555
Synchronizing Views ________________________________556
Feb-09 xiii MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Table of Contents
Follow Google Earth View tool ________________________556
Control in Google Earth______________________________556
3D Warehouse_____________________________________557
Working Offline ____________________________________557
Play Camera Animation in Google Earth_________________557
Creating PDF Output with 3D Content _____________________558
Integrating 3D PDF Annotations into PDF documents ______559
Adding links and bookmarks __________________________560
Using JavaScript to control 3D annotations ______________560
Creating a 3D PDF __________________________________560
Module Review _______________________________________566
Questions_________________________________________566
Answers __________________________________________567
Course Summary ____________________________________ 569

Course Summary ______________________________________569
Course Review ________________________________________570
Questions_________________________________________570
Answers __________________________________________571
Table of Contents xiv Feb-09

Course Overview
Course Description
MicroStation V8i is often used to produce 2D drawings. In addition to the
comprehensive array of 2D tools, MicroStation provides a wealth of 3D tools.
This course covers all aspects of 3D design, using the full suite of MicroStation V8i
3D tools along with practical modeling exercises.
Target Audience
This course is recommended for the following audience:
• Designers
• Architects
• Engineers
• 3D Modelers
Prerequisites
The following is a mandatory prerequisite:
• Expert in MicroStation 2D
• Knowledge of AccuDraw
Either one of the following is also helpful:
• Expertise with other advanced modeling software
• Expertise with animation software
Feb-09 1 Course Overview

Course Objectives
Course Objectives
After completing this course, you will be able to:
• Use 3D view controls to see what you need when you need to
• Use 2D tools in 3D models
• Apply AccuDraw in 3D
• Use 3D primitive solids for basic forms and design
• Modify and do basic analysis of solids
• Create and modify B‐spline curves and surfaces
• Create parametric feature models
• Use advanced feature modeling techniques to increase 3D efficiency
• Apply conceptual modeling tools for push/pull modeling
• Use mesh modeling for site design and soil modeling
• Apply drawing composition tools to create 2D production drawings
• Use the rendering and animation tools to make your 3D model photo‐realistic
Modules Included
The following modules are included in this course:
• Course Overview
• 3D View Controls
• AccuDraw in 3D
• B‐Spline Curves
• Basic 3D Solids
• Advanced Solid Modeling
• Solid Utilities
• Conceptual Modeling
• Solid Modeling Challenge
• Introduction to Feature Modeling
• Advanced Feature Modeling
Course Overview 2 Feb-09

Introductory Knowledge
• Introduction to Surfaces
• Surface Creation
• Surface Modification and Blending
• Modify B‐Spline Surfaces
• Meshes
• Visualizing a 3D Design
• Using Dynamic Views
• Importing and Exporting Drawings in 3D
Before you begin this course, let's define what you already know.
Questions
1 Name three AccuDraw shortcuts.
2 Explain the difference between designing an object and capturing the
design intent of an object.
3 True or False: Rendering and animation tools require installation of
additional software.

Answers
1 O, RE, ?
Over thirty shortcuts exist. Use the ? shortcut to see them all.
2 Creating a design results in a collection of graphic geometry. You may not
know how it was designed. Even if you had knowledge of how the
geometry was designed, recreating it could be a tedious process.
Capturing design intent creates a recording of the steps that were taken to
design, as well as the graphic geometry. Repeating the design and making
modifications (iteration) is easy since all the steps involved are recorded.
3 MicroStation includes rendering and animation software.

3D View Control
Module Overview
All the 2D view controls, such as Fit View, Zoom In and Out, Window Area, and
Pan, can be used in 3D. As in 2D, elements to the left, right, above, or below can
be excluded from a view by zooming in or windowing so that the elements are
outside the view's area.
There are also a number of 3D specific viewing tools. 3D views have depth. You
can exclude the display of elements located in front of, or behind, an object by
applying a Clip Volume or Clip Mask.
It is a good idea to practice View Control tools for 5 minutes at the start of every
3D session, before doing any other work.
Module Prerequisites
• Knowledge of MicroStation 2D view controls
Module Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Use 3D view control tools to navigate in 3D space
Feb-09 5 3D View Control

Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
Questions
1 True or False: You can view a 3D design from any direction and even move
inside it.
2 Define a MicroStation model.
3 In 2D models, you work on a design plane. What is the working area in 3D?
Answers
1 True.
2 Each model is an independent graphical space, with its own origin point,
units of measurement and can be 2D or 3D.
3 In 3D models, the 2D design plane becomes a 3D cube, known as the
design cube.
View Rotation
When you work in a 2D model, you can rotate the view. Visually, this is like
rotating the xy‐plane about a perpendicular, or z‐axis. When you are working in a
3D model, you can rotate the view about any axis (the x‐, y‐, or z‐axis). The visual
effect on screen is like rotating the design cube. You can rotate any view to a
standard rotation or to any arbitrary view orientation.
When you dynamically rotate a view, you can use any of the following methods.
Using the mouse
• Shift key + middle mouse button to Rotate about Center
• Pressing the left mouse button completes the rotation
Using a tool
• View Rotation tool
3D View Control 6 Feb-09

View Rotation
• Standard View Rotation
Rotate VIew icon and Standard VIew icons
These tools require a data point to start and a second data point to complete
the rotation
The Rotate View tool
Access to View Rotation is found in the view control toolbox at the top of each
view window. You can also use keyboard mapping, pressing 4 + 6 + 1 to activate
the Rotate View tool, or select Tools > View Control to open a floating toolbox.
Use view rotation to rotate a model to access a face that would otherwise be
behind another. The tool settings have two options that control the method of
rotation.
Cube rotation rotates the view as follows:
• Moving the pointer up or down rotates the view about its x‐axis
• Moving the pointer left or right, when Preserve World Up is:
Enabled: Rotates the view about the model’s z‐axis
Disabled: Rotates the view about its y‐axis

View Rotation
Sphere rotation rotates the view about a center point. A dynamic sphere, and
associated graphics, help you define the rotation. Slide settings let you control the
size and transparency of the sphere as follows:
• Small/Large slide control: Lets you define the size of the sphere graphic in the
view
• Opaque/Clear slide control: Lets you define the transparency of the sphere in
the view
 Exercise: Rotating a view using the Cube option
1 Set the following in the File Open dialog:
User: examples
Project: General
2 Open Basic_Solids.dgn.
3 Open the Booleans model.
4 Select the Rotate View tool from View 1’s view control toolbox, with the
following tool settings (click the Show Extended Settings arrow to view the
settings for Rotation):
Method: Dynamic

View Rotation
Cube rotation
Preserve World Up: Disabled
Crosshairs appear in the center of the view, denoting the center of the
rotation.
5 Enter a data point on the right side of View 1.
The pointer changes shape and the crosshairs become a large dot. There is
a smaller dot at the pointer’s starting position.
6 Move the pointer to rotate the view interactively.
Note that moving the pointer vertically rotates the view about its
horizontal (x) axis. Moving horizontally rotates the view about its vertical
(y) axis.
7 Reset.
This cancels the rotation and returns the view to its original orientation.
8 Select the Rotate View view control with the following tool setting:
Preserve World Up: Enabled
9 Enter a data point on the right side of View 1.
10 Move the pointer to rotate the view interactively.
Note that moving the pointer vertically rotates the view about its
horizontal (x) axis. Moving horizontally rotates the view about the model’s
(z) axis. This has the visual effect of spinning the model about its vertical
(z) axis no matter what the rotation of the view.
11 Enter a data point to complete the rotation.

View Rotation
 Exercise: Rotating a view using the Sphere option
1 Continuing in Basic_Solids.dgn, in the Booleans model, select Rotate View with
the following tool setting:
Sphere rotation
Crosshairs appear at the center of the view and a shaded sphere
surrounds them.
2 Use the Small/Large and Opaque/Clear sliders to adjust the size and
transparency of the sphere as desired.
3 Following the status bar prompt, enter a data point somewhere within the
region of the sphere.
The crosshairs are replaced by a dot, with a smaller dot indicating the start
point of the rotation.
4 Move the pointer to rotate the view about the center of the sphere.
The arrow graphic that appears on the sphere gives you a visual indication
of how you are rotating the view.
Rotating to a standard view
The standard view orientations can be selected from the Rotate View tool’s drop‐
down menu in each view window. You can also use keyboard mapping key‐ins, or
you can open the View Rotation tools as a toolbox. Remember that when you use
key‐ins, or use the view rotation tools from the toolbox, the tool applies to the
active view.

View Rotation
 Exercise: Rotating to standard views using various view control options
1 Continuing in Basic_Solids.dgn, in the Booleans model, open Views 2, 3 and 4
and Fit View in each.
2 Select Window > Tile.
3 Select Rotate View (4 + 6 + 1), with the following tool setting:
Method: Top
4 Following the status bar prompt, enter a data point in View 1.
You can continue to enter data points in other views to change them to a
Top rotation.
5 Click Rotate View to open the drop‐down menu and select Open as
ToolBox.
6 Click the title bar of View 3 to make it the active view.
7 In the View Rotation toolbox, select Right View.
View 3, the active view, is rotated to a Right view.
8 Click in the title bar of View 2 to make it the active view.
9 In the View Rotation toolbox, select Front View.
10 Click the title bar of View 4 to make it the active view.
11 With focus at Home, press 4 + 6 + 5 to rotate View 4 to Isometric.
Rotating a view using the mouse
The mouse wheel or button can be used for several view controls. As in 2D, you
can double click the wheel to Fit View. Single click the wheel for a dynamic view
Pan. Roll the wheel to Zoom In and Out.
You can rotate the view using the mouse and the key‐in ROTATE VIEW DRAG.
 Exercise: Rotate view about center
1 Continuing in Basic_Solids.dgn, in the Booleans model, press the Shift key, press
the middle mouse button and click in View 2.
2 Release the buttons and drag the mouse.
3 Enter a data point to complete rotation, or reset to return to the previous
rotation.
4 Click View Previous to return to the previous rotation.

View Rotation
The crosshairs now are located at the left vertical edge of the geometry.
 Exercise: Rotate about any point
1 Continuing in Basic_Solids.dgn, in the Booleans model, press the Alt key, press
the middle mouse button, and click in View 2.
As you move the pointer to rotate the view, note that rotation now is
around the defined point.
2 Move the pointer over the plus sign at the center of the sphere to relocate
the point about which to rotate.
3 Move the sphere to the lower right and note that you can snap to objects.
4 Enter a data point to complete the move of the rotation sphere.
5 Following the status bar prompt, begin rotation.
7 Return the view to Isometric.
8 Fit View.
9 Select File > Close.

Fitting 3D Views
You can rotate the view using the mouse and the key‐in ROTATE VIEW FROM
CURSOR.
Additional 3D mouse view controls are:
• Shift key +roll is Pan with Zoom
• Ctrl key + middle button click is Rotate about point
• Ctrl key + roll is walk forward/backward
• Alt +roll is Pan left or right
Fitting 3D Views
In both 2D and 3D models, the Fit View tool lets you select whether the fit applies
to elements in the Active file, References, Rasters, or All files associated with the
view.
• When you fit a view in 2D, the area of the view is altered to display all
elements located on the levels currently turned on.
• In 3D models, there are more choices relating to the clipping planes.
• All ‐ Display all displayable elements in the active model file and any
attached references.
• Active ‐ Display all displayable elements in the active model file.
• Reference ‐ Display all displayable elements in attached references, if
any.
• Raster ‐ Display all displayable elements in attached raster references,
if any.
Clip Volume
During a design session, you may want to work on a particular element and rotate
it to view from various angles. When you do this with clipping planes set,

Clip Volume
however, parts may disappear or other elements appear in the display depth.
MicroStation’s Clip Volume tools let you select a discrete volume, within the
design cube, for display.
This tool is helpful when you have elements on the same level and you do not
want to see all of them.
You can use 2D or 3D elements to define the volume. When you use a 2D shape,
the clipping volume is created by sweeping the 2D shape through the
entire model. The sweep direction is perpendicular to the plane of
the 2D element. MicroStation creates a 2D clipping shape using
active attributes.
When a 3D element is used, it defines the entire clip volume.
Before Clip Volume

Clip Volume
After Clip Volume
Operations, such as view rotation, fence processing, hidden line removal, and
rendering, honor the clip volumes. They ignore any elements that are not
displayed within the defined volume for the view.
Clipping elements may consist of any solid, other than spheres or feature solids.
Closed extrusion, cylinders, or closed planar elements (shapes, circles, ellipses,
complex shapes, grouped holes) can be used. If a planar element is chosen, or you
use the clipping elements by points options, the clipping volume is generated by
sweeping the planar element through the entire model. Planar elements may be
selected in any view, because the sweep direction is orthogonal to the plane of
the element. Similarly, clip elements that you define by points may be drawn in
any view. AccuDraw can be used to set the correct orientation of the clip element.
Set Clip Volume options using icons in the tool settings.
• By Element applies a clip volume from an existing element.
• By Section Plane (new for MicroStation V8i)
• By 2 Points lets you apply a clip volume by defining a rectangular clipping
element with 2 data points

Clip Volume
• By Polygon lets you apply a clip volume by interactively defining vertices of a
polygon with data points. The polygon can be closed by entering a data point
at the start point, or by clicking the Close Element button.
• By Element Range applies a clip volume that encloses the range of a selected
element or group of elements. If a selection set is active, the clip element will
enclose the entire group of elements.
• Show/Hide Clip Element toggles the display of a view's clip volume element.
Same function as Display Clip Element.
• Clear Clip Volume removes the current clip volume (but not the element) from
a view.
Clip Volume Extended Options are set at the bottom of the tool settings.
• Apply Clip Volume from Named Fence creates a clip volume from the named
fence, selected from the list, and applies the clip volume to the active view.
• Delete deletes the named fence selected in the named fence list.
• Save creates a named fence from the clip volume in the active view is created.
Clip Volume Options
By Element
Apply Clip By Section Plane

Clip Volume
Apply Clip By 2 Points
Apply Clip Volume By Polygon
Clip Volume By Section Plane
There are two methods for creating a clip volume by section plane.
• Apply Clip By Section Plane located in the Create Clip Volume tool settings.
• Place Fitted Section. A Fitted Section is a section cut throughout the XY, YZ or
XZ plane relative to the Absolute Auxiliary Coordinate System.

Clip Volume
Here is the Top View and Isometric View of the train engine and tanker.
User: Examples
Project: Plant
File: ...\Designs\BSI700‐0100‐RRTrack.dgn
Top View
Isometric View
In this example, a Place Fitted Section is used and an XY plane is created in the
Isometric view. The Clip Element is displayed in both views with editing handles
active.

Clip Volume
Here are the results after moving the Clip Element Handles in the XY direction.
The Top view shows the Clip Element but the Clip Volume is displayed in the view
selected when creating the Clip Volume, which was the Isometric view. Here is the
Clip Volume after Selecting the Show or Hide Clip Element tool.
Clip Volumes and View Attributes
The View Attributes dialog includes Clip Volume Settings. When a view contains a
Clip Volume, the View Attributes dialog will display a Clip Volume collapsible
section. The settings on this section provide various ways to display the Clip
Volumes.
In this view, the Clip Volume Settings of the View Attributes Settings are set to
display the Forward volume of the Clip Element with the From View option
enabled. The Back, Cut and Outside options are disabled.

Clip Volume
Here is the same view with different options selected from the Clip Volume
Settings.
Clip Volume Settings and Display Style
When a Display Style is created or an existing style is modified, enabling the Clip
Volume box in the Display Style window will place the style as an additional

Clip Volume
option in the Clip Volume Settings. Clicking on the magnifying glass will open the
Display Styles dialog.
Applying a clip volume
You can use a clip volume to isolate a part of the model so that you can work on it
without the confusion from the display of other parts of the model.
 Exercise: Applying a clip volume by 2 points.
Project: Plant
2 Open BSI700‐A0101‐PumpHouse.dgn.
3 From the View Control or the Clip Volume toolbox, select Clip Volume with
the following tool settings:
Apply Clip Volume By 2 Points

Clip Volume
Display Clip Element: Enabled
4 In the View Rotation toolbox, select Top View.
5 Enter data points to create a Clip Element.
6 Enter a data point in the View, to accept the clip volume.
7 From the View Control or the Clip Volume toolbox, select Clip Volume and
Show or Hide Clip Element, then select view. The clip element will
disappear.
8 Use Shift + middle mouse button (press in), or select Rotate View to rotate
the View.
Note that only the elements in the clip volume are visible during the
rotation.

Clip Volume
9 In the View Rotation toolbox, select Isometric View.
10 Fit View.
No other elements appear in the view.
11 To remove the Clip Volume select the Clear Clip Volume tool and enter a
data point in the view.
 Exercise: Applying a clip volume by section plane.
Project: Plant
2 Open BSI700‐A0101‐PumpHouse.dgn.
3 From the View Control or the Clip Volume toolbox, select Clip Volume with
Apply Clip Volume By Section Plane

Clip Volume
4 In the View Rotation toolbox, select Top View.
5 Enter 2 data points to create a section through the Pump House.
6 In the View Rotation toolbox, select Isometric View.

Clip Volume
7 Open the View Attributes dialog using the View Control tool or by pressing
Ctrl+B.
Note: Since a clip volume exists in View 2, there is a Clip Volume Settings tab.
8 The forward and back view style of the section plane are displayed on the
Clip Volume Settings tab, and are set to “From View”.
9 Select the “Outside” option for the Back area of the section plane and the
view displays dashed lines to indicate the Back of the section plane is now
hidden.
10 Enable the display of the Cut area. The “From View” will display by
default.

Clip Volume
11 Change the display option of the Forward area of section plane to Outside.
The new display of the clip volume section should look like the following
view.
12 Use the Element Selection tool and select the section clip element.
13 The boundaries of the interactive clip element display.

Clip Volume
14 Move the green handle to re‐position the section plane and move the blue
handle to modify the size of the Forward area of the section plane. Clear
the clip element selection by a data point in the view.
15 Modify the Clip Volume Settings:

Clip Volume
Manipulating a clip volume from a second view
With a clip volume active, you can restrict the display of elements to just those
that you want to see. Once a clip element has been created, you can manipulate it
to change the clip volume and the information being displayed. If you later move,
or modify a clipping element, the clip volume is also moved or modified. If you
delete a clipping element, the view clipping is removed. Clipping elements can be
manipulated or modified with the standard MicroStation tools.
Once a clip volume has been applied to a view, you can switch the clipping on and
off in the View Attributes dialog using the Clip Volume check box. You can toggle
display of the clip element using the Show or Hide Clip Volume Element icon in
the tool settings.
 Exercise: Manipulating a clip volume
1 Continuing in BSI700‐A0101‐PumpHouse.dgn, select Clip Volume.
2 Open Views 1 and 2, set View 1 to Front and set View 2 to Isometric then
Fit View in each window.

Clip Volume
3 From the Clip Volume toolbox, select Place Fitted Section and place a data
point in view 2.
4 Select Move (3 + 2).
5 In View 1, snap to the clip element and move it in the ‐Z direction.
View 2 displays the new Clip Volume. Experiment with the blue handles to
make more changes to the Clip Volume. Here is an example:
Saving clip volumes
You can save clip volumes as named fences for later use. You then can apply them
to any view.
 Exercise: Save the clip volume

Clip Volume
1 Continuing in BSI700‐A0101‐PumpHouse.dgn, make View 2 the active
view.
2 Ensure that the View Attributes > Presentation > Clip Volume
attribute is enabled in all views.
3 Create a 2 point Clip Element in View 1 and apply the Clip
Volume in View 2. The image should be similar to the following.
4 Select Clip Volume and click the Expand arrow at lower right of tool
settings.
5 Click Create Named Fence From Clip Volume.
6 In the Name field, type the name Front Wall and press Enter.

Clip Volume
You now can apply this clip volume to any view.
Working with multiple clip volumes
Each view in a model can have a clip volume assigned to it. These can be identical,
or they can be different.
 Exercise: Create a second clip volume
1 Continuing in BSI700‐A0101‐PumpHouse.dgn, select Clip Volume with the
following tool settings:
Apply Clip Volume By 2 Points
2 In View 1, enter data points to isolate the back wall.
3 Enter a data point in View 3.
4 Fit View 3.

Clip Volume
Views 2 and 3 now have different clip volumes applied to them.
5 Save the clip volume as a named fence named Back Wall.
 Exercise: Apply saved clip volume to a view
view.
2 Select Clip Volume and select the named fence Front Wall in the tool
settings.
3 Click Apply Clip Volume By Named Fence.

Clip Volume
The view updates to display only the pump house front wall.
4 Select the named fence Back Wall in the tool settings.
5 Click Apply Clip Volume By Named Fence.
The view updates to display only the back wall.
Saving clip volumes in this manner lets you quickly set up views to work on
specific parts of a design. Once a clip volume is defined for a view, it remains with
that view until you clear it. Tools such as the Fit View tool will not change the
extents of a clip volume.
 Exercise: Clear a clip volume
1 Continuing in BSI700‐A0101‐PumpHouse.dgn, click Clear Clip Volume in
the tool settings.
3 Fit View 2.

Clip Volume
The entire model is displayed again.
Using a clip mask
A clip mask has the opposite effect to that of the clip volume. A clip volume
defines what to display, but a clip mask defines what not to display. Procedures
for creating and using clip masks are identical to those for clip volumes. You can
apply clip masks to views that have had a clip volume applied.
Similarly, you may want to work on part of a model, while hiding another part of
it.
If the elements all are on the same level, you can use the Clip Mask tool to mask
the elements that are not required.

Clip Volume
 Exercise: Apply and clear a clip mask
view.
2 Select Clip Mask from the view control toolbox.
The tool settings are identical to the Clip Volume tool. The named fences
you created previously can be used with clip masks too.
3 Select the named fence Back Wall in the tool settings.
4 Click Apply Clip Mask By Named Fence.
The view updates and the back of the pump house is masked from the
view. Fitting and rotating the view will not cause it to reappear.
Clearing a clip mask is the same as a clip volume.
5 Click Clear Clip Mask in the tool settings.

Display Styles Dialog
The Display Styles Dialog is for modifying and creating custom display styles.
You can access the Display Styles Dialog from the following locations:
• Settings > Display Styles... or Tools > View > View Control
• Select from the View Toolbox the Open Display Style Dialog icon.
Note: Display styles are typically saved as shared resources in DGN libraries.
Standard display styles are provided with MicroStation V8i, and cannot
be deleted.

Understanding Display Style dialog tools.
1 Wireframe ‐ Tool settings:
No settings
2 Hidden Line ‐ Tool settings:
Display: Hidden Line
3 Filled Hidden Line ‐ Tool settings:
Display: Filled Hidden Line
4 Smooth ‐ Tool settings:
Display: Shaded

5 Illustration ‐ Tool settings:
Display: Shaded
Display Visible Edges: Enabled (Black)
Background Color: Enabled (White)
Note: The Display Styles Dialog setting “Usages” when enabled, determines if the
display mode is created in view window or Clip Volume or both.
 Exercise: Create a custom display style
1 Open BSI700‐S0501‐UnloadingPlatform.dgn, make View 2 the active view.
2 Select Settings > Display Styles...
3 Select New and type over Untitled with the name “Custom Display”.
4 Set the Display Styles settings as follows:
Display: Shaded
Enable No Material: Select the Material option
Select magnifying glass: Select Platform Frame material option
Enable Background color: Select Gray #48option
Enable Usages: View
5 In View 2, select the View Display Mode tool drop down arrow and select
Custom Display.

Perspective
Perspective
Every time you turn on perspective in a view, you turn on the Camera (View
Attributes > Camera). You can turn perspective on specifically using the View
Perspective tool.
A single data point in the view center starts the 3 point perspective, and
movement away from the center changes the amount of perspective. Selecting
the View Perspective tool and double clicking in the center of the view sets the
view to parallel projection, or turn off the Camera in View Attributes.
Additional options are available if you click and hold the View Perspective tool or
open it as a toolbox.
• View Perspective interactively set perspective in a view
• Wide Angle sets perspective in a view to match an extra wide angle camera
lens
• Normal sets perspective in a view to match a normal camera lens
• Telephoto sets perspective in a view to match a telephoto camera lens
• Two Point Projection sets perspective in a view to 2 point projection. Hidden
by default
• Camera Off turns off a view camera and return to parallel projection
Saved Views dialog
Used to name, save, delete, import, apply and recall saved views. Saving a 3D view
allows you to quickly recall a view with specific attributes. It is important to create
and use Saved Views in 3D, since you will want to return to a known position
many times. They are helpful for design, navigation, rendering and animation.
Camera and Clip Volume settings are available for saving or recall.

Saved Views dialog
Open the dialog by selecting Utilities > Saved Views, selecting View Save/Recall
from a view window control menu, or pressing F6.
Understanding the Saved Views dialog.
The Saved Views dialog contains controls that are used to apply a saved view to a
view in the design file. The list box shows the name, description and model of
each view saved. To apply a saved view, use the following options:
Apply to Selected Views. Select this tool and click in a selected view window or
select the view number.
Apply to open views. All opened views will display the Saved View.
Double click the entry in the Saved View dialog list. The selected view number will
display the Saved View.
Active File ‐ This icon displays optional settings by clicking on the drop‐down list
box.

Saved Views dialog
Note: A link is a pointer to project data and a link set is created when you use
Project Explorer (File > Project Explorer).
Create Saved View ‐ Opens the Create Saved View dialog where you name and
describe the view you are saving. The view can be a saved, section, elevation,
detail or plan view. A Clip Volume can also be added to a Saved View Option.
 Exercise: Create a Saved View
1 Open BSI700‐S0501‐UnloadingPlatform.dgn, open Views 1 through 4,
select to Window > Tile, and then Fit View for each view.
2 Set Display Mode to Wireframe for each view.
3 Window in on the top of the Unloading Platform in View 4.
4 Set Display Mode to Smooth with Shadows and apply the View
Perspective Extra Wide Angle.
5 Press F6 to open the Saved View dialog, click Create Saved View, and save
the new view in View 4:

Saved Views dialog
Name: Top Platform
Description: Top platform with wide angle view
6 Click in View 4 to select the source view.
7 In the Saved Views dialog, set the View number to View 3 and double click
the Top Platform saved view in the saved view list box.
8 In the Saved View dialog list box, click on the area below the header “Clip
Volume” and select the clip volume named StairSide.
View 3 displays a clip volume in the saved view.

Saved Views dialog
9 In the View Attributes dialog, display the Outside portion of the clip
volume and set the option to Outside to display dashed lines representing
the outside of the clip volume.

Module Review
Module Review
Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.
Questions
1 When rotating a view using cube rotation, what does the Preserve World
Up option do?
2 True or False: When you use key‐ins, or use the view rotation tools from
the toolbox, the tool applies to the active view.
3 What is the Active Depth?
4 What is the difference between using a 2D as opposed to a 3D element to
define a clip volume?
5 How do you modify a clip volume?
6 How do you save a clip volume?
7 What is the difference between a clip mask and a clip volume?
8 Where do you modify the display of the Front and Back portion of a Clip
Volume?
Answers
1 When you are moving the pointer left or right, if Preserve World Up is
enabled it rotates the view about the model’s z‐axis. If it is disabled it
rotates the view about its y‐axis.
2 True.
3 The Active Depth is a plane, parallel to the view or screen, which is always
located within the Display Depth of a view. The Active Depth of a view
determines where data points fall by default. If you enter a data point in a
3D view, without snapping to an existing element, it falls on the Active
Depth plane.
4 When you use a 2D shape, the clipping volume is created by sweeping the
2D shape through the entire model. When a 3D element is used, it defines
the entire clip volume.
5 Clipping elements can be manipulated or modified with the standard
MicroStation tools.

Module Review
6 You can save clip volumes as named fences. To do so, click Create Named
Fence From Clip Volume in the Clip Volume tool settings.
7 A clip mask has the opposite effect to that of the clip volume. A clip
volume defines what to display, but a clip mask defines what not to
display. Procedures for creating and using clip masks are identical to those
for clip volumes.
8 The Front, Back, Cut and Outside area of a Clip Volume is modified in the
View Attributes dialog.

AccuDraw in 3D
Module Overview
AccuDraw is an intelligent drawing aid that interprets the position of the pointer
relative to previous data points, view orientation, and coordinate system. Using
AccuDraw, you can quickly enter additional data points that build on those
entered previously.
• Knowledge of AccuDraw in 2D
• Knowledge of basic 3D view controls and 3D planes
Module Objectives
• Design with AccuDraw in a 3D environment
• Use Auxiliary Coordinate Systems to control drafting planes
• Use AccuDraw 3D shortcuts
Feb-09 47 AccuDraw in 3D

Questions
1 Name the two basic AccuDraw interface components.
2 What must have the focus for AccuDraw shortcuts to work?
3 What are the operational steps when using AccuDraw?
4 How do you place the AccuDraw compass at a snap point?
Answers
1 AccuDraw compass and AccuDraw window.
2 The AccuDraw window.
3 1. Enter a data point using either precision input, or a data point, to fix the
location of the compass.
2. Move the pointer in the direction in which you wish to draw.
3. Without using the pointer to put focus into the AccuDraw window’s key‐
in fields, enter the desired distance value.
4 Use AccuSnap, or issue a manual tentative snap, and use the AccuDraw
shortcut <O>.
AccuDraw in 3D 48 Feb-09
The AccuDraw Drawing Plane
The AccuDraw Drawing Plane
AccuDraw was designed to work with the 3D drawing environment. You can work
in a view other than one of the orthogonal views (Top, Front, and Right), but still
draw in the orthogonal planes.
Rotated views such as Isometric or Right Isometric display a design more clearly.
When working in these views, if you want to draw an object on the Top or Front
plane, you can simply rotate the AccuDraw compass to that plane using an
AccuDraw shortcut. You do this by rotating AccuDraw’s compass to an orthogonal
plane with one of the shortcuts V (view), T (top), F (front), or S (side).
Working in the Isometric view, you can use AccuDraw shortcuts to rotate its compass to the Top (T), Front (F), Side (S) or View (V)
orientation
Note: Remember that the focus must be in the AccuDraw window for its shortcuts to
work. Press F11, or press Esc and then the space bar to move focus to it.
It is recommended that you work in the Isometric view with the Top, Front and
Right views open, placed behind the Isometric view.
3D Element Placement
Placing elements in a 2D file is like drawing on a sheet of paper. All elements are
on 1 plane, the x,y plane. When you place the same elements in a 3D file, by
default they are placed in the AccuDraw drawing plane. The AccuDraw drawing
plane can be rotated to match the view being used, or defined to be a particular
rotation.
In the following exercises, you will draw an open rectangular box using 2D blocks.
 Exercise: Open the model and draw the base surface
User: untitled
Project: Everything3D
2 Open AccuDraw_3D.dgn from the class data set.
The instructor will provide the location of the data set.
This model displays the ACS triad, which indicates the directions of the 3
axes, in each view. You can toggle the display of the ACS triad in the View
Attributes dialog.
3 Select Workspace > Preferences, and then the Task Navigation category
and set Presentation to Dialog.
4 In the Task dialog, click the Basic 3D task.
First, using the Top view, you will draw the base of the box. You will use
AccuDraw to input precise dimensions. Effectively, this part of the exercise
will be no different from working in 2D.
5 Select Place Block (Q + 2 +1).
6 Enter a data point in the lower left corner of the Top view.
7 Move the pointer to the right and, with it indexed to AccuDraw’s x‐axis,
type 1.5.
Do NOT enter a data point.
8 Move the pointer upward and type 1.25.
9 Enter a data point to complete the block.
10 Fit each view.
The block appears as a line in both the Front and Right views, where it is edge on
to the views, like looking at a sheet of paper edge on.
Next, you will use the Isometric view to draw the corresponding front and right
faces of the box. You may remember that each view has an active depth, where
data points fall by default if you do not snap to an element. Here, you will snap to
the existing block that you just drew and use AccuDraw to keep the pointer at that
depth in the view.
 Exercise: Use Isometric views to draw corresponding faces for the box
1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, select Place Block (Q + 2 +1).
2 In the Isometric view, snap to the left end of the existing block and accept
with a data point.
3 Press <F> for the AccuDraw shortcut for Front rotation.
4 Move the pointer to the right, snap to the endpoint and, with it indexed to
AccuDraw’s x‐axis, then press <X>, to lock to the x.
5 Move the pointer upward, type 0.5, and enter a data point to complete
the block.
6 Fit each view.
For the right face, you can snap to existing elements to place the points.
8 Press <S> for Side rotation.
Note: Press F11 to put focus in the AccuDraw window.
9 In the Isometric view, snap to the bottom left end of the base and accept
with a data point.
10 Continuing in the Isometric view, snap to the top of the front surface and
accept with a data point.
As you do this, check in the Front and Right views to ensure that you are
snapping to the correct points and that the block is being placed correctly.
11 Fit each view.
To complete the box, you can use the Copy tool to copy the existing faces creating
the opposite sides. When you copy an element in 3D, it retains its current
orientation. That means that a vertical face remains vertical, a horizontal face
remains horizontal, and so on.
 Exercise: Copy the existing faces to complete the box
1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, select Copy Element (3 + 1), with the
following tool setting:
Copies: 1
2 In the Isometric view, identify the block representing the back face at its
lower right vertex.
The face is attached to the pointer. As you move the pointer in the other
views, the front face element retains its current orientation.
3 Snap to the front right vertex of the base block.
4 Enter a data point to complete the copy and reset.
5 In the Isometric view, identify the block representing the right face at its
lower right vertex.
6 In the Isometric view, snap to the back right vertex of the base block and
accept to complete the copy.
7 Reset.
8 Click the View Display Mode view control and change the Isometric view’s
display to Hidden Line.
9 Use the Rotate View tool to rotate the Isometric view and verify that you
have correctly drawn all the surfaces for the open top box.
As you can see, placing elements in 3D is no more difficult than in 2D. In the
exercise, you used MicroStation’s views to correctly orient the elements. Of the 4
views, the Isometric view best displays the model. You can see the 3 faces quite
clearly.
Using AccuDraw’s rotated drawing plane
You can place elements in the Top, Front and Side alignments using AccuDraw’s
<T>, <F> and <S> shortcuts.
AccuDraw’s drawing plane lets you work in any view, while still maintaining the
correct plane for the elements being drawn. You can still snap to elements that
are not on the current drawing plane and AccuDraw responds accordingly.
As you draw in 3D, you may observe the drawing plane axes change as you enter
data points. The alignment of the drawing plane depends on the tool being used
and the location of the previous data points. For 3D models, the 3 previous data
points are considered, as this is the minimum requirement to describe a planar
surface. Where less than 3 data points have been entered, the view orientation is
also considered.
Additional shortcuts
• <B> Base Rotation: Rotates the drawing plane to align with the active ACS or
the rotation of the view.
• <E> Cycle Rotation: Rotates between 3 main planes; top, front, and side.
Pressing E rotates the drawing plane first 90° about its x‐axis, then 90° about
its y‐axis, and then back to its original rotation.
In the following exercises, you will work in the Isometric view and let AccuDraw
correctly align the elements. As you work through the exercise, use the other
open views to check the orientation of the element being drawn, by maximizing
and shrinking the Isometric view.
 Exercise: Automatic drawing plane rotation in AccuDraw
1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, Pan to an open area of the model.
3 In the Isometric view, place 2 orthogonal blocks as shown.
4 Continuing with Place Block, snap to the vertical face upper right corner.
5 Press <T> to rotate AccuDraw’s drawing plane to Top.
6 Snap to the lower right vertex of the base.
AccuDraw uses the 2 data points plus the view to set the drawing plane
orientation. This results in a drawing plane that is not always in alignment
with any of the standard Top, Front or Side drawing planes.
7 Snap to the lower left edge of the base and accept with a data point.
AccuDraw’s drawing plane now aligns itself with the plane of the 2 non‐
planar data points.
8 Reset to complete.
Non‐orthogonal rotation
Quite often, you will need to rotate the AccuDraw compass to a non‐orthogonal
plane; one that is not the Top, Front or Side. Besides the standard non‐planar data
points and view rotation, or non‐planar snapping, several other methods are
available. The most common is to use an AccuDraw shortcut.
• RQ ‐ Rotate Quick provides quick, non‐persistent rotation
• RA ‐ Rotate ACS allows you to persistently rotate x and y plane about an origin
point. You can clear it by using a standard rotation like T,F, S, V
• WA ‐ Save an ACS rotation
• GA ‐ Recall an ACS rotation
• E ‐ Cycle Rotation
Important when using another ACS since T, F or S will break you out of existing
ACS
• RX ‐ Rotate about x‐axis
• RY ‐ Rotate about y‐axis
• RZ ‐ Rotate about z‐axis
• RE ‐ Rotate AccuDraw compass to match orientation of an element
• RV ‐ Rotate Active View to orientation of AccuDraw compass
 Exercise: AccuDraw and Quick Rotation
1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, select Edit > Undo to undo the
placement of the last inclined plane.
2 Select Place Block (Q + 2 + 1).
3 Press F11 and then press <T> for top rotation.
4 Following the status bar prompt, snap to the upper left vertex of the
vertical face and accept with a data point.
5 Press <RQ> and, following the status bar prompt, snap to the lower left
vertex of the base, then accept the new rotation with a data point.
6 Snap to the right lower vertex of the base and accept the new block with a
data point.
Note: An alternate method is to use Place Block with the Method set to Rotated.
To keep a persistent rotation, you can use the AccuDraw shortcut <RA>.
 Exercise: Using RA to keep a rotation
1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, select Place Circle (Q + 3 + 1) with the
following tool setting:
Method: Center
2 Snap to the upper left vertex of the vertical face, press F11, and then press
<O> to set the AccuDraw origin, but do not enter a data point.
3 Press <RA>, keeping the snap point the same, and enter a data point to
accept the origin.
4 Snap to, and accept, the upper right vertex of the vertical face to show the
x‐axis direction.
5 Snap to, and accept, the lower left of the base to set the y‐axis direction.
6 Press the space bar to change to the rectangular coordinate system.
7 Snap to, but do not accept, the left midpoint of the inclined plane and lock
the y‐axis by pressing <Y>.
8 Press <K> to open Keypoint Divisor dialog and set the divisor to 3.
9 Snap to left third of the long edge of the base to set the x‐axis distance,
and enter a data point to accept the center point of the circle.
10 Type a distance of 0.2 for the radius and accept with a data point.
Save the rotated ACS with AccuDraw shortcut <WA> and recall it with <GA>.
A quick rotation method is to rotate to an elements plane.
 Exercise: Quick Rotation to an element
1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, with focus on AccuDraw, press <T> to set
Top rotation.
2 Select Place Circle (Q + 3 + 1), with the following tool settings:
Method: Center
3 Press F11 to put focus in the AccuDraw window.
4 Snap to, but do not accept, the midpoint of right edge of the inclined
plane and press <O> to set the AccuDraw origin at the midpoint.
5 Press <RE> to Rotate to Element.
6 Align the compass to the right inclined edge.
7 Enter a data point to accept the rotation.
8 Index to the left and press Enter.
9 Snap to a point one‐third of the way along the bottom edge and enter a
data point to place the center of circle.
10 Index to any axis and type a radius of 0.2.
Other tools that rely on the plane orientation also can be used with AccuDraw. For
example, the Mirror, Rotate Element, and Array tools all use the plane orientation
to define the direction of the mirror, or the axis of rotation.
Locating elements relative to others
There will be occasions when you will locate elements relative to others already
present in the model.
In the following exercise, you will place a SmartLine to represent a center line for
a pipe.
 Exercise: Draw the center line
1 Continue in AccuDraw_3D.dgn.
2 Open the 01_AccuDraw Exercise model.
3 Set the View Display Mode to Smooth with the following tool settings:
Display Edges: Enabled
Display Hidden Edges: Enabled
4 Make the Drawing tasks the active tasks in the Task Navigation dialog.
5 Select Place SmartLine (Q + 1) with following settings:
Segment Type: Lines
Vertex Type: Rounded
Rounding Radius: 1.5
Join Elements: Enabled
6 In the rotated view, snap to the vertex at the point labeled Start here and
7 Press <T> to switch to the Top plane.
8 Move the pointer down to the left and, with it indexed to the y‐axis, press
<Enter> to constrain the point to this axis. (Do not enter a data point.)
9 Type a distance of 35 for Y, and accept with a data point.
10 Staying in the Top plane, index to negative Y and press Enter.
11 Snap to the center of lower, open cylinder face and accept with a data
point.
As you snap to the vertex, AccuDraw displays a dashed line, which is
perpendicular to the x‐axis, back to the point being placed. This lets you
locate the y distance using a 3D snap.
12 Press <F> for Front rotation.
13 Index to the negative y‐axis and press <Enter> to constrain the next point
to the y‐axis.
14 With the pointer still snapped to the lower center open cylinder face,
15 Press <T> for Top rotation.
16 Index to the negative y‐axis and lock by pressing <Y>.
17 Type 30 and accept with a data point.
19 Rotate to see the other side.
20 Repeat for the other 2 directions.
Using Auxiliary Coordinate Tools
MicroStation provides specific tools for creating, modifying, importing and
selecting Auxiliary Coordinate Systems. You can find the tools by selecting Utilities
> Auxiliary Coordinates or right click and turn on the tool in the Primary Tools
toolbox.
An auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) is a coordinate system with an orientation,
and/or an origin, different from those of the DGN file coordinates (the Global
Origin). Although not exclusively a 3D concept, an ACS is most useful in 3D
modeling as a drawing aid.
Tools from left to right are Create a new ACS, Copy ACS, Delete ACS, Import ACS, Define ACS (Aligned with Element), Define ACS (By
Points), Define ACS (Aligned with View), Define ACS (Aligned with Reference), Rotate Active ACS, Move ACS, and Select ACS
Active Depth is no longer used, because the location of unsnapped points is
controlled by the ACS for a view. Instead of Depth Lock, you now can enable ACS
Plane Snap to force unsnapped points to fall on the plane of the ACS.
Auxiliary Coordinates dialog tool features:
• A new ACS can be created using the Create a new ACS tool in the dialog.
• A list box now displays the active ACS on the top line and all ACS’s in the active
model.
• All ACS tools are available within the dialog.
• Ability to create, copy, delete or import an ACS.
• Make an ACS active by double clicking on ACS name in list or right‐click on ACS
name and select Set Active from options list.
• Other options include ability to match the coordinate system of selected ACS
to the active ACS or global coordinates for the model, and deleting or
renaming an ACS.
• It is possible to lock the Grid Plane to the active ACS <LP> or F8 function key.
This means that the AccuDraw drawing plane shortcuts for Top, Front and Side
are relative to the active ACS rather than the Default coordinate system.
• Left click on the Type and change it to None, Rectangular, Spherical, or
Cylindrical.
AccuDraw Shortcuts for ACS
• LP ‐ Lock ACS Grid Plane ‐ Toggles ACS Grid Plane lock, which toggles the ACS
Plane and ACS Plane Snap locks, and the Grid view attribute for all views.
• LA ‐ Toggles ACS Plane lock.
• LS ‐ Toggles ACS Plane snap lock.
• LZ ‐ Toggles Sticky Z Lock, which is used in conjunction with ACS Plane Snap
Lock to force a series of snap points to lie on the active ACS' XY plane (Z=0).
 Exercise: Creating and drawing on a new ACS.
1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, open the model 02_ACS_by_points.
2 Select the ACS By Points tool from the Auxiliary Coordinates dialog with
Type: Rectangular
Other Settings: Disabled
3 Enter the new ACS origin at point 1
4 Define the x‐axis by placing a data point on point 2
5 Enter a data point on point 3 to identify the y‐axis direction, and the new
ACS will display.
6 To create a new ACS, click the Create a new ACS tool in the dialog and type
a name for the new ACS.
7 Double click the new named ACS.
It will become the Active ACS and will display on the first line or Active ACS
line of the dialog.
8 Select Place Block with the following settings:
Method: Rotated
Area: Solid
Fill Type: None
Note: When drawing on a rotated ACS use the AccuDraw shortcut <LA> to lock
the ACS Plane.
9 Enter the base point of the block at the midpoint of the edge between
points 1 and 3.
10 Enter the second base point of the block at the midpoint of the edge
between points 1 and 2.
AccuDraw will automatically rotate orthogonal to ACS2.
11 Move the pointer along the green y‐axis for a distance of 1.
12 Render using the Smooth or Hidden Line View Display Mode.
Define an ACS aligned with a reference file
The following image shows a simple reference attached to the model.
To set the ACS so that it is aligned with the ACS of the Reference, use the Define
ACS (Aligned with Reference) tool. Select the Reference and the Reference ACS
becomes the active ACS.
ACS interaction with AccuDraw
Use the AccuDraw shortcut <LA> to lock the active ACS plane. This will let you use
the <T>, <F> and <S> shortcuts relative to the active ACS.
Use the AccuDraw shortcut <LP> or default function key <F8> to turn on the ACS
Plane, ACS Plane Snap and grid for all views. The following image shows the
results of using the <LP> or <F8> shortcut.
Separate ACS per View
A new tool in the ACS toolbox lets you assign Auxiliary Coordinate Systems to each
view. You can create an ACS for a view with the Define ACS by View tool. You can
make the ACS view‐independent by turning on a check box. When a view‐
independent ACS is active, and the ACS triad setting is enabled for the view, the X,
Y arrows are displayed as dashed in the view.
To retain the per‐view ACS setting for the next session, you must select File > Save
Settings.
When a model created in an earlier version is opened and the ACS Plane lock is
not enabled, a view‐independent ACS with an origin of the view center at active
depth is created. This lets you start working with the geometry created in the
same place as it would have been in the earlier version (at the Active Depth).
You may also right‐click on an ACS in the ACS dialog and select Set Active View.
Projecting Points from and ACS to a Plane
You can use a combination of an ACS and AccuDraw to project points, in the ACS
z‐direction, from the ACS plane to the AccuDraw drawing plane. This technique
lets you, for example, trace the boundary of a house on to a sloping roofline, as
explained in the following workflow.
Module Review
 How to Project Points onto a Rotated Plane:
1 Set up an ACS such that the Z direction is the desired projection.
2 Press F8 to lock AccuDraw to the ACS.
3 Select the element placement tool, such as Place SmartLine.
4 Press F11, to set focus to AccuDraw.
5 Key‐in the AccuDraw shortcut RE.
6 In the tool settings, set:
Update Current ACS: Off
Move Origin: On
7 Select the element to which you want AccuDraw aligned and accept with a
data point.
8 To commence drawing the element, snap to an element in the ACS plane
and accept with a data point.
The point is projected onto the AccuDraw drawing plane.
9 Add more points by snapping to elements in the ACS plane to project the
points to the AccuDraw drawing plane.
Module Review
Questions
1 When you place elements in a 3D file, on what plane are they placed by
default?
2 How can you move focus to the AccuDraw window?
3 Which view rotation best displays a model?
4 True or False: When you copy an element in 3D, it retains its current
orientation.
5 What is the minimum requirement to describe a planar surface?
6 What does the AccuDraw shortcut <RA> do?
7 What is an important thing to remember when using the <O> shortcut to
set the AccuDraw origin?
Module Review
Answers
1 When you place elements in a 3D file, by default, they are placed in the
AccuDraw drawing plane.
2 Press F11, or press Esc and then the space bar.
3 Isometric (or Right Iso).
4 True.
5 For 3D models, the 3 previous data points are considered, as this is the
minimum requirement to describe a planar surface.
6 Use it to keep a persistent rotation.
7 Snap to the desired location, but do not accept.
B‐Spline Curves
Module Overview
In this module, you will examine the Curves creation and modification tools.
• Knowledge of 3D tools in MicroStation
• Knowledge of 2D Drawing tools in MicroStation
Module Objectives
• Use new 3D modification and creation workflows
• Apply new 3D Curve features
• Apply new features of existing tools
Feb-09 79 B-Spline Curves

Questions
1 Name the AccuDraw shortcut used to cycle through rotations.
2 MicroStation creates what type of curves?
3 True or False: Curves can be non‐planar.
Answers
1 E.
This shortcut will cycle through all orthogonal rotations.
2 NURBS or B‐splines.
3 True. You can draw 2D or 3D curves.
3D Workflows
All 3D modeling tools now have a unified workflow that covers that way that you
select items for creation and modification, and how you can modify them
interactively.
For example, you can now select edges and faces of solids and surfaces for
modification with Element Selection. Typically, selecting edges, faces, or vertices,
for solids and surfaces is as follows:
• Generally — select single items with a data point, and use Ctrl + data button
for additional items.
• Faces — select the solid/surface first, and then dynamics let you select face(s).
• Back Faces — snap to an edge or vertex of a back face.
• Edges/Vertices — direct selection, or through dynamic selection.
B-Spline Curves 80 Feb-09

MicroStation V8i Curve Tools
Interactive handles to control 3D objects during creation
Interactive handles let you control aspects of 3D objects during creation. For
example, you can reverse the direction of surface normals interactively, during
construction of fillets, by clicking the direction handles.
Hint: Press F4 to see the current tasks at the pointer.
Alternate Display options exist for the Task Navigation dialog. Right click on the
name of a task in the dialog itself or select an icon from the icons displayed aside
of the Task name.
List option is useful when learning a new task and Panel option exposes all tools.
Several new tools have been added to the Modify B‐spline Curves toolbox for
modifying and manipulating B‐spline curves. Some older commands have been
split into separate tools.

Edit Control Points
This tool is used to show or hide the control points for a B‐spline curve, or to
change the number of control points for the curve.
Change Curve Order
Used to change the order of a B‐spline curve, without adding or removing control
points. If Preserve Curve Shape is enabled, there is no perceptible change to curve
shape but there is an increase in the number of poles on the curve.
Change Curve Closure
Changes open or closed state of a curve.
Edit Weights
The Edit Weights tool lets you select a B‐spline curve, then a control point, to
modify its weight using the text field input or the slider. The weight of a B‐spline
curve is used to position the curve relative to its control point. By increasing the

weight, you bring the curve closer to the control point. By lowering the weight,
you move the curve farther from the control point.
Edit Kinks
The Edit Kinks tool lets you insert or remove kink points. A kink point is a point on
the curve where, potentially, curves can have a cusp or sharp point.
In this figure one of the curves has a kink created but needs to be removed to attain a smooth surface
The image on left shows surface with a kink, middle image shows surfaced zoomed in and on right after kink is removed.
Edit Knots
The Edit Knots tool lets you insert or remove knots. A knot is a point on the
control polygon of a B‐spline curve. The knot vector collects the different knots

(parameter values) that join the curve. If knots are not evenly spaced then you
have non‐uniform curves.
Edit Nodes
The Edit Nodes tool lets you insert node points into a curve, or move them by
dragging. Nodes are points on B‐spline curves that can be moved to change the
shape of the curve. This tool allows you to have more control of a curve without
increasing the order of the curve and increasing computation time.
The image on the far right shows that one node has been added to B‐spline curve.
Fair Curvature
Fair Curvature is used to minimize the curvature variation of (smooth) a B‐spline
curve
Deform Curve
Deform Curve is used to deform a curve with degrees of freedom to be added to
the region being deformed. The more you add, the more freedom (movement in

x, y and z and rotation in x, y and z) you have to deform the curve. You can also
define the percentage of the total curve that is affected by the deformation.
After you have deformed a curve at a localized area you then can use Element Selection tool to move handles and create surface as
in right image.
Curve Handlebar
The Curve Handlebar tool lets you identify a B‐spline curve and then define a
point on it where the tool displays three handles. The side handles let you deform
a curves tangent direction at the defined point. The middle handle lets you drag
the point to change the shape of the.
In these images you can see how you can directly modify the local handlebars of a B‐spline curve.
Split Curve
The Split Curve tool lets you split a B‐spline curve by one of the following
methods:
• By Numbers splits the curve into equal arc lengths.
• At Kink Points splits the curve at all sharp or cusp points.

Linear Elements
• Into Bézier splits the curve into its Bézier segment curves.
Linear Elements
SmartLines and B‐spline curves are constrained to being planar in 2D. In 3D design
files, these elements no longer have this constraint. There are also many other
types of 3D curves available.
NURBS in more detail
NURBS curves and surfaces behave in similar ways and share terminology. A
NURBS curve is defined by four things: degree, control points, knots, and an
evaluation or basis rule.
Degree and Order
The degree is a positive whole number.
This number is usually 1, 2, 3 or 5, but can be any positive whole number. NURBS
lines and polylines are usually degree 1, NURBS circles are degree 2, and most
free‐form curves are degree 3 or 5. Sometimes the terms linear, quadratic, cubic,
and quintic are used. Linear means degree 1, quadratic means degree 2, cubic
means degree 3, and quintic means degree 5.
You may see references to the order of a NURBS curve. The order of a NURBS
curve is positive whole number equal to (degree+1). Consequently, the degree is
equal to (order‐1).
It is possible to increase the degree of a NURBS curve and not change its shape.
Generally, it is not possible to reduce a NURBS curve’s degree without changing its
shape.

Linear Elements
The range of degrees in MicroStation V8i is 1 to 14. Therefore, the range of order
is 2 to 15.
Control Points
The control points are a list of at least the number of the order. Therefore, a
fourth order curve needs at least four control points to be defined.
One of easiest ways to change the shape of a NURBS curve is to move its control
points.
The control points have an associated number called a weight. With a few
exceptions, weights are positive numbers. When a curve’s control points all have
the same weight (usually 1), the curve is called non‐rational, otherwise the curve
is called rational. The R in NURBS stands for rational and indicates that a NURBS
curve has the possibility of being rational. In practice, most NURBS curves are
non‐rational. A few NURBS curves, circles and ellipses being notable examples, are
always rational.
Knots
The knots are a list of degree+N‐1 numbers, where N is the number of control
points. Sometimes this list of numbers is called the knot vector. In this term, the
word vector does not mean 3‐D direction.
This list of knot numbers must satisfy several technical conditions. The standard
way to ensure that the technical conditions are satisfied is to require the numbers
to stay the same or get larger as you go down the list and to limit the number of
duplicate values to no more than the degree. For example, for a degree 3 NURBS
curve with 11 control points, the list of numbers 0,0,0,1,2,2,2,3,7,7,9,9,9 is a
satisfactory list of knots. The list 0,0,0,1,2,2,2,2,7,7,9,9,9 is unacceptable because
there are four 2s and four is larger than the degree.
The number of times a knot value is duplicated is called the knot’s multiplicity. In
the preceding example of a satisfactory list of knots, the knot value 0 has
multiplicity three, the knot value 1 has multiplicity one, the knot value 2 has
multiplicity three, the knot value 3 has multiplicity one, the knot value 7 has
multiplicity two, and the knot value 9 has multiplicity three. A knot value is said to
be a full‐multiplicity knot if it is duplicated degree many times. In the example,
the knot values 0, 2, and 9 have full multiplicity. A knot value that appears only

Linear Elements
once is called a simple knot. In the example, the knot values 1 and 3 are simple
knots.
If a list of knots starts with a full multiplicity knot, is followed by simple knots,
terminates with a full multiplicity knot, and the values are equally spaced, then
the knots are called uniform. For example, if a degree 3 NURBS curve with 7
control points has knots 0,0,0,1,2,3,4,4,4, then the curve has uniform knots. The
knots 0,0,0,1,2,5,6,6,6 are not uniform. Knots that are not uniform are called non‐
uniform. The N and U in NURBS stand for non‐uniform and indicate that the knots
in a NURBS curve are permitted to be non‐uniform.
Duplicate knot values in the middle of the knot list make a NURBS curve less
smooth. At the extreme, a full multiplicity knot in the middle of the knot list
means there is a place on the NURBS curve that can be bent into a sharp kink. For
this reason, some designers like to add and remove knots and then adjust control
points to make curves have smoother or kinkier shapes. Since the number of
knots is equal to (N+degree‐1), where N is the number of control points, adding
knots also adds control points and removing knots removes control points. Knots
can be added without changing the shape of a NURBS curve. In general, removing
knots will change the shape of a curve.
Knots and Control Points
A common misconception is that each knot is paired with a control point. This is
true only for degree 1 NURBS (lines). For higher degree NURBS, there are groups
of 2 x degree knots that correspond to groups of degree+1 control points. For
example, suppose you have a degree 3 NURBS with 7 control points and knots
0,0,0,1,2,5,8,8,8. The first four control points are grouped with the first six knots.
The second through fifth control points are grouped with the knots 0,0,1,2,5,8.
The third through sixth control points are grouped with the knots 0,1,2,5,8,8. The
last four control points are grouped with the last six knots.
Evaluation or Basis Rule
A curve evaluation or basis rule is a mathematical formula that takes a number
and assigns a point.
The NURBS evaluation rule is a formula that involves the degree, control points,
and knots. In the formula there are some things called B‐spline basis functions.
The B and S in NURBS stand for basis spline. The number the evaluation rule starts
with is called a parameter. You can think of the evaluation rule as a black box that

Linear Elements
eats a parameter and produces a point location. The degree, knots, and control
points determine how the black box works.
For more detail, please refer to:
http://web.cs.wpi.edu/~matt/courses/cs563/talks/nurbs.html
http://devworld.apple.com/dev/techsupport/develop/issue25/schneider.html
B‐spline curves
B‐spline curves represent industry standard NURBS curves. NURBS stands for
Non‐Uniform Rational Basis Spline. The B‐spline is defined by placing control
points, or poles, with a minimum of 3 poles required.
The number of control points/poles must be greater than or equal to the Order of
the equation. The Order of an equation is equal to the degree of an equation plus
1. The degree refers to the highest exponential term in the equation. Therefore,
by using an order of 4 you are asking the software to use cubic equations to
define your curvature.
The benefits of NURBS are many fold.
• NURBS do not have resolution. No matter how close to the surface or curve
you are the surface or curve appears smooth, not faceted.
• NURBS allow for local controllability. Editing can be constrained to a point, or
to a group of points on the surface of curve.
• There are several industry standard ways to exchange NURBS geometry. This
means that customers can and should expect to be able to move their
valuable geometric models between various modeling, rendering, animation,
and engineering analysis programs. They can store geometric information in a
way that will be usable 20 years from now.
• NURBS have a precise and well‐known definition. The mathematics and
computer science of NURBS geometry is taught in most major universities.
This means that specialty software vendors, engineering teams, industrial
design firms, and animation houses that need to create custom software
applications, can find trained programmers who are able to work with NURBS
geometry.
• NURBS are computationally efficient. The amount of information storage
required for a NURBS representation of a piece of geometry is much smaller

Linear Elements
than the amount of information storage required by common faceted
approximations.
Accuracy
Because of the limitation of current computer technology, you expect calculations
to be accurate to 15 digits of precision in a range from ±1020 to ±10‐20. This
limitation is found in all modern CAD products.
Most CAD products do not even have tools to match curvature, let alone do it
accurately enough for a discriminating designer. If your application requires
smooth free‐form surfaces such as airfoils, hydrofoils, lenses, or reflective
surfaces, complex roof structures you need these tools found in MicroStation V8i.
Curve types
The Create Curves tools can be found in any drawing task, so it is available in all
3D tasks. MicroStation can produce a large number of different curve types.
Several tools are available to help you with standard curves such as spirals and
helices. In addition, there are more advanced tools to generate a curve according
to an equation using the Curve Calculator tool. The curves tools can be accessed
from the Basic 3D task by selecting Q + 1 + 5.Tools from left to right are B‐spline by
Points, B‐spline by Tangents, Composite Curve, Interpolation by Arcs, Conic Curve,
Spiral Curve, and Helix
Curve.

Linear Elements
Place B‐spline Curve tool
2D B‐spline curves, both open and closed, can be used as profiles to create
complex 3D surfaces and solids. They can also be used as paths for the advanced
extrusion tools that let you extrude a profile along a defined path. In this role,
they may be either 2D (planar) or 3D.
B‐spline Surfaces generated from open and closed B‐spline curves
Appearance of a curve is controlled by the Order setting. The higher the order of
an equation, the smoother the resulting curve. The Order is defined in the tool
settings for some types of B‐splines. The minimum order possible is 2 and the
maximum order allowed is 15.
You can also choose between Open and Closed B‐splines. When a B‐spline is
closed, with the first point and the last point being the same, the enclosed area is
a surface.
There are 5 methods used for creating B‐spline curves in MicroStation:
• Define Control Points
• Through Points
• L‐Square By Tol
• L‐Square By Num
• Catmull‐Rom
You can define a B‐spline curve by placing points or by applying the curve to an
existing element in the design file. This is determined by the Input By setting,
which lets you choose between the following.
• Enter Data Points, where you place each control point or pole.
• Pick Line String, which uses the vertices of a previously created construction
element to define the poles. Line strings or complex chains produce open B‐
splines. Shapes and complex shapes produce closed B‐splines.

Linear Elements
 Exercise: Draw a 3D B‐spline curve
User: untitled
2 Open B‐spline_curves.dgn from the class data set.
3 Open the model 01_curves.
You will use arcs to draw a 3D B‐spline curve.
4 Open the B‐spline and 3D dialog by selecting Element > 3D and B‐spline
and set the following:
Curve Polygon: Invisible
Curve Display: Visible
This dialog displays the default settings for B‐spline curves, Surfaces and
Solids.
5 Close the 3D and B‐splines dialog.
6 Make the Surface Modeling tasks active in the Task Navigation dialog.
7 Select the Place B‐spline Curve tool (W + 1 + 1), with the following tool
settings:
Method: Control Points
Input By: Points (AccuDraw)
Closure: Closed
Order: 4

Linear Elements
8 Following the status bar prompt, in the Isometric view, snap to the
endpoint of the arc and accept with a data point.
9 Snap to the endpoint of the next arc and accept with a data point.
10 Snap to the midpoint of the second arc and accept with a data point.
After 3 points, the proposed curve displays as you move the pointer. You
are drawing a fourth order curve, so a minimum of 4 points is required to

Linear Elements
define the curve. The control polygon, which appears as a dashed line, is
also shown.
11 Snap to the end of the second arc, accept with a data point, snap to the
end of the first arc, and then accept with a data point.

Linear Elements
12 Snap to, and accept, the midpoint of the first arc.
14 Fit each view.
Once a B‐spline curve has been placed, you can adjust various settings. For
example, if you have drawn a fourth order B‐spline you can change the order of
the curve. When you do this, it cannot be changed to an order that is higher than
the number of points used to place the curve. You can check for point information
using the Element Information tool, or enable polygon display, to show where the
points are located.

Linear Elements
 Exercise: Displaying the polygon and other curve information
1 Continuing in B‐spline_curves.dgn, in the model 01_curves, make the
Surface Modeling tasks active in the Task Navigation dialog.
2 Select the Edit Control Points Settings tool (W + 3 + 1)
Select, Control Points On, in Tool Settings.
3 Identify the B‐spline curve and accept with a data point.
B‐spline control points display
This shows you where the control points, or poles, are located. You can
also change the number of poles using this tool.
4 Select Change No. of Control Points in Tool Settings and change to 12
points.

Linear Elements
As the order of the B‐spline curve increases, more points are considered
for calculating each part of the curve. This results in a smoother curve.
With the smoothing, there is more variation between the polygon and the
curve.
6 Change Number of control points back to six points.
7 Select, Control Points Off, in Tool Settings.
A second Order B‐spline curve (a line) fits the shape of the polygon exactly, while
higher order curves vary from the polygon. You can use the Change Curve Order
tool to change the order of the curve and see this for yourself.
 Exercise: Change the order of the curve
1 Continuing in B‐spline_curves.dgn, in the model 01_curves, select Change
Curve Order Settings tool (W+3+2) in Surface Modeling Tasks.
Order: Type in 2
Preserve shape: Disabled

Linear Elements
B‐spline with curve order set to 2
The following is the B‐spline created with the Preserve Curve Shape
enabled.
The curve has an order of 2, but it would have retained its original shape.
3 Experiment further by changing the order of the curve between 2 and 6.
For this curve, which was constructed with 6 control points, sixth order is
the highest allowed.
What you have drawn is a closed B‐spline curve, which creates a surface. Another
option is to construct an open B‐spline curve.
 Exercise: Creating a open B‐spline curve
1 Continuing in B‐spline_curves.dgn, open the model 02_curves.
2 Select Element > B‐spline and 3D to open the B‐spline and 3D dialog.
Curve Polygon display is set to Visible. This was set in the previous exercise
when you enabled Polygon Display. This persists in the DGN, for the
current session. Selecting File > Save Settings saves these settings for
future design sessions.
3 Set the following:
Curve Polygon: Invisible
Curve Display: Visible
4 Close the dialog.
5 Select the Place B‐spline Curve tool (D + 1 + 1) with the following tool
settings:
Method: Define Control Points
Input By: Pick Line String
Closure: Open
Order: 3

Linear Elements
6 In the Top view, select the line string and accept with a data point.
You can preview the curve before accepting it with another data point. Do
not accept the curve yet.
7 Change the Order to 4, press Tab, and drag the pointer into the view to see
the new curve.
8 Experiment with Order values between 2 and 15.

Linear Elements
9 Change the Method to Through Points and drag the pointer into a view to
see this curve.
10 Experiment with the Methods Least Squares by Tolerance, Least Squares
by Number and Catmull‐Rom.
Through Points is helpful when you want to send the curve through a series of
points, for example to draw the edge of a road.
Catmull‐Rom adds additional poles on the curve to allow it to more closely
represent the control polygon (the line string). This is helpful when you want to
edit individual poles.
If you have an existing element in the design file, you can convert that to a B‐
spline curve.
Place Composite Curve
Like the B‐Spline Curve tool, Place Composite Curve is another tool that creates
complex chains and shapes.
Tool settings options for this tool let you select the type of curve and specify the
curve radius and angle parameters for each segment during construction. The
Mode tool setting option lets you select any of 4 element segment types.
• Arc by Edge: Transitions from a line segment into a tangent arc.

Linear Elements
• Arc by Center: Same transition as arc by edge, this mode identifies the center
of the new tangent arc.
• Bezier Curve: Mathematically generated, free‐form curve used in design
situations where the position of every point which forms the absolute curve
line is critical (an airfoil).
• Line Segment: Constructs line strings generated by continuous data points.
There are other tool settings available.
• Smooth Corners: When enabled,permits smooth vs. sharp pointed corners
when constructing arcs and Bezier curves.
• Planar: When enabled,the active design file is now 3D and the composite
curve is forced to lie upon 1 of the planes.
• Arc Radius and Arc Angle: When enabled, permits value entries for pre‐setting
the arc radius and sweep angle. These options only apply when using the arc
by edge or arc by center curve segment mode.
In the following exercise, you will construct a composite curve shape representing
the topographic contour line.
 Exercise: Placing a contour line
1 Continuing in B‐spline_curves.dgn, open the model 03_Composite.
2 Make the Solids Modeling Tasks the active tasks in the Task Navigation
dialog.
3 Select Place Composite Curve (Q + 3 + 3) with the following tool settings:
Method: Arcs by Edge
Smooth Corners: Enabled
All other options: Disabled
The status bar prompts you to enter the first vertex.

Linear Elements
4 Enter a data point at any magenta point.
5 Snap to, and enter a data point on, an adjacent point (clockwise or
counter‐clockwise).
6 Select a third point, adjacent to the last point.
The arc is now visible and its end moves dynamically with the pointer.
7 Enter the end points for the next 8 arc segments by entering data points at
the remaining points.
8 Change the following tool settings:
Method: Bezier Curves
9 Enter the last point and modify the tangency by moving the dynamic
tangency handle.
The complex chain of elements automatically became a complex shape.
 Optional Exercise: Change the tool settings

Linear Elements
1 Try the previous exercise again, except disable Smooth Corners in the
Place Composite Curve tool settings.
Note the difference in the dynamic movement.
2 Experiment with the other composite curve modes by themselves, and in
combination with each other.
The Place Composite Curve tool lets you place line segments and then transform
them into a curve. With the Smooth Corners option selected, the curve is placed
tangent to the line segment or place reversed tangent curves.
In the following exercise, you will create the line by connecting the straight line
segments with reversed curves.
 Exercise: Adding a road centerline
1 Continuing in B‐spline_curves.dgn, open the model 04_Composite.
2 Set the active attributes as follows:
Level: Center Line
Color: 0
Style: 4
Weight: 1
3 Select Place Composite Curve (Q + 3 + 3) with the following tool settings:
Method curve: Line Segments
Smooth Corners: Enabled
Planar: Disabled
4 Following the status bar prompt, working from left to right, enter the first
vertex of the composite curve with a data point.

Linear Elements
5 Snap to the point to the right and enter a data point.
The curve (as a line segment) is now visible and the end moves
dynamically with the pointer.
6 In the tool settings, change the Mode to Arc by Edge.
7 Snap to the point to the right and enter a data point.
The curve section begins tangent to the line segment.
8 Continue placing points, by snapping and accepting, points to the right.
The position of some locations forces a segment curve to form with an
opposite sweep to the first. This is a reversed tangent curves. A reverse, or

Linear Elements
ogee, curve is created from two consecutive tangent arcs curve in
opposite directions.
Place Composite Curve’s tangent curve feature can save time, especially in
construction geometry applications.
Conic and Spiral Curve tools
There are several other curve tools available in MicroStation, 2 helpful ones are
Conic sections or Spirals.
Place Conic
A planar section of a cone produce several types of curves; circle, ellipse,
parabola, or hyperbola. When a plane intersects a cone on any angle from the

Linear Elements
base, the section is an ellipse. If sectional plane is parallel to base then a circle, if
parallel to sides of cone then a parabola and if the section is orthogonal to base
then a hyperbola is created.
Rho is used to determine the shape of Ellipses, Hyperbolas and Parabolas
Place Spiral
Three types of basic spirals are Clothoid, Archimedes, and Logarithmic.

Linear Elements
Clothoid Spiral
The clothoid, or double, spiral is a curve whose curvature grows with the distance
from the origin. The radius of curvature is opposite proportional to its arc,
measured from the origin.
Clothoid Spiral with: Initial Degree: ‐1000, Final Degree: 1000, Length: 50
Archimedes Spiral
The Archimedes Spiral has constant pitch or distance between turns (1 turn is 1
convolution of the spiral).
Archimedes Spiral with: Initial Radius: 1, Final Radius: 16.1, Angle: 1800

Linear Elements
Logarithmic Spiral
The Logarithmic spiral has variable pitch convolutions. The distance between each
turn of the spiral increases at a logarithmic rate, for example, 1, 10, 100, 1000,
etc.
Logarithmic spiral with: Initial Radius: 1, Final Radius: 16.1, Angle: 1800
Place Helix tool
You can think of a helix as a spring. It is a 3D spiral that can be used for creating
the basic shape of a screw, a spiral staircase, or coiled piping. Using the Place Helix
tool is simple, and subtle variations let you create a wide variety of helices. The
Place Helix tool is located in the Create Curves task. Tool settings are as follows.
• Thread: Specifies if the helix spirals to the right or left
• Axis: Determines the axis of the helix (you can define the axis interactively, or
you can set it to either a design file axis or a view axis)
• Orthogonal: If on sets the axis of the helix perpendicular to the base and top
• Top Radius: Defines the radius at top of helix
• Bottom Radius: Defines the radius at bottom of helix
• Height: Defines the total height of helix
• Pitch: Defines the height of 1 revolution of the helix
• Tolerance: Sets the tolerance
 Exercise: Creating a Helix

Linear Elements
1 Continuing in B‐spline_curves.dgn, open the model Helix.
2 Select Place Helix (S + 1 + 7) with the following tool settings:
Thread: Right
Axis: Points
Orthogonal: Enabled
3 Following the status bar prompt, snap to the bottom of the centerline and
accept with a data point. You are prompted to define the radius.
4 Press <F> to rotate to the Front plane.
5 Move in the positive x‐ direction and, with the pointer indexed to the x‐
axis, type 2 and accept with a data point.
You have defined the center point and Base Radius of the helix, and are
now prompted to define the pitch height and axis.

Linear Elements
6 Move in the positive y‐ direction and with the pointer indexed to the y‐
axis, type 3 and accept with a data point.
You now have defined the pitch of the helix and are prompted to define
the height.
7 Snap to the top of the centerline and enter a data point to accept.
This sets the height of the helix, and you are now prompted to define the
radius.
8 Move in the positive x‐ direction, type 2 and accept with a data point.

Challenge Exercise
Using the Place Helix tool is simple when you use AccuDraw. As with other tools,
following the status bar prompts is the best way to proceed.
Challenge Exercise
Marine Design ‐ Hard Chine Hulls
The Planing Hull (hard chine) is a hull of any size, with either a single chine or an
inner and outer chine. Inputs include values such as overall length and beam, as
well as shape parameters.

Challenge Exercise
A is a S‐bottom hull, B is a Hard Chine hull. The term hard chine indicates an angle
with little rounding.
A complete list of inputs could include:
• Bow ‐ Front of the boat
• Length Overall ‐ Overall Length of boat
• Beam Overall ‐ Width of boat
• Deck Height Forward ‐ Height from bottom to top at the front of the boat
• Deck Height Aft ‐ Height from bottom to top at the back of the boat
• Chine Height Forward. ‐ Height of the chine from bottom to the chine at the
front.
• Chine Width (0=single chine, >0 gives inner and outer chine) ‐ Maximum chine
width.
• Transom ‐ A surface that forms the flat stern on a hull. Dinghies tend to have
almost vertical transoms, whereas yachts' transoms may be raked forward or
aft.
• Deadrise angle ‐This is the angle from horizontal from which the hull rises up,
measured at the transom, in deep or modified deep V hull forms or the
measurement of the angle between the bottom of a boat and its widest beam.

Challenge Exercise
A vessel with a 0º deadrise has a flat bottom, high numbers indicate deep V
shaped hulls. Shown below in red.
• Stem rake angle ‐ Forward pointing angle of the stern hull or transom.
There is no right answer in the following exercise. It lets you explore acceptable
parameters of ship design. The model given shows graphically what the basic
values are and some sample curves.
Some basic rules:
• Ratio of Length to Beam: 3 ‐ 3.5
• Ratio of Forward Deck Height to Length: 1 to 7
• Deadrise Angle ‐ Below 17 degrees is considered flat bottom or ski boat, 17‐21
degrees is modified deep V, and above 21 degrees is a deep V hull design.
 Exercise: Explore ship design
1 Open the model Challenge_01.
2 A pre‐drawn sketch using B‐SPline by Points and Catmull‐Rom curves is
started, using the following values for:
Length Overall: 7.16m
Deck Height Forward: 1.3m
Deck Height Aft: 1m
Maximum Beam: 2.2m.

Challenge Exercise
Aft Beam: 2m
3 Draw your own, by drawing the lines representing:
Length Overall ‐ 10m
Deck Height Fore ‐ 1.45m
Deck Height Aft ‐ 1.25m
Maximum Beam ‐ 3.3m
Aft Beam ‐ 3m
4 Then draw the curves using B‐Spline by Points, Method: Catmull‐Rom.
Reference Information:
• http://www.carlsondesign.com/hulls.zip
• FreeShip Design Software ‐ Can be imported into MicroStation
• http://groups.yahoo.com/group/bolger/
• http://www.wally.com
• http://www.pershing‐yacht.com
• http://www.tedbrewer.com/yachtdesign.html
• http://www.worldwideflood.com/ark/terms/ship_terms.htm
Drawing a Catenary
The catenary is the shape of a hanging flexible chain or cable when supported at
its ends and acted upon by a uniform gravitational force (its own weight) and in
equilibrium. The curve has a U shape that is a hyperbolic cosine curve. Catenaries
are used to design Overhead Power Lines. Minimum ground clearance for roads is
16ft or 4.9m. Maximum sag of the cable is found from the span between poles, as
a ratio.
 Exercise: Draw catenaries
1 Open model Challenge_02.
2 From the Surface Task choose Curves > Curve Utilties > Curve by Formula
(W+4+4).
3 From the File menu of the Curve by Formula dialog select Open File and
select curve.rsc.
4 Select the Caternary Curve.

Module Review
5 In the dialog change the span (x1) to 50.
6 The Catenary is place from a Top view perspective, so switch to the Top
view.
7 In the Curve by Formula dialog select Place.
8 Move the Caternary into place.
Reference Information:
• http://www.iaei.org/subscriber/magazine/othercode_Series/
july_august1998.pdf
• http://www.energex.com.au/upload/technical_documents/
20070130_151356_3750727.pdf
Module Review
Questions
1 How do you place a B‐spline curve using Through Points option?
2 True or False: By increasing nodes on a B‐spline curve you also increas the
time to compute the results.
3 What tool would you use to modify a curve such that you create a sharp
turn in the curve shape?
4 How do you select the back face on a 3D model?

Answers
1 A B‐spline is defined by placing control points, or poles, with a minimum of
3 poles required.
2 False. Increasing curve nodes using the Edit Nodes tool allows you to have
more control over the curve shape. Another methos is the increase the
order of the curve but this method requires more computation time.
3 The Edit Kink tool. This tool allows a very localized modification of a curve
so that the handelbars of the kink can be modified to create sharp
direction change in the curve.
4 When selecting a face within a tool sequence select a visible face then
move the cursor to a common edge and select this edge using a tentative
snap which will select the coincident face.

Basic 3D Solids
Module Overview
This module presents tools for Curves, Solids and Surfaces. When working with
Solids it helps to think like a sculptor who starts out with a mass and cuts away
what is not needed. Of course, in digital 3D you can add just as easily.
• Knowledge of 3D tools in MicroStation
• Knowledge of 2D Drawing tools in MicroStation
Module Objectives
• Use new 3D modification and creation workflows
• Use existing and new 3D Primitives
• Apply new features of existing tools
Feb-09 117 Basic 3D Solids

Questions
1 Name the AccuDraw shortcut used to cycle through rotations.
2 What 3D primitive lets you create a box‐shaped object?
3 What is Feature Modeling?
Answers
1 E.
This shortcut will cycle through all orthogonal rotations.
2 Place Slab.
3 Feature Modeling tools let you create parametric feature‐based solids.
That is, a parametric solid that is created from one or more features. Each
part of a solids model created with these tools is a feature. Parameters
used to create the features are stored in the design and may be edited.
3D Workflows
All 3D modeling tools now have a unified workflow that covers that way that you
select items for creation and modification, and how you can modify them
interactively.
For example, you can now select edges and faces of solids and surfaces for
modification with Element Selection. Typically, selecting edges, faces, or vertices,
for solids and surfaces is as follows:
• Generally — select single items with a data point, and use Ctrl + data button
for additional items.
• Faces — select the solid/surface first, and then dynamics let you select face(s).
• Back Faces — snap to an edge or vertex of a back face.
• Edges/Vertices — direct selection, or through dynamic selection.
Basic 3D Solids 118 Feb-09

3D Workflows
Interactive handles to control 3D objects during creation
Interactive handles let you control aspects of 3D objects during creation. For
example, you can reverse the direction of surface normals interactively, during
construction of fillets, by clicking the direction handles.
Solids Modeling
Contains basic Drawing tools plus 3D‐specific tools for creating primitive solids,
extrusions, revolutions, converting solids to surfaces and vice versa, and the Draw
on Solid and Modify Solid Entity tools.
The first tool in the Solids Modeling task, Place SmartLine initially, is also a
member of the Drawing task. When you press the left mouse button over the
tool, you see a drop‐down menu from which a tool in the Drawing task can be
selected. The Drawing task can be opened as a floating toolbox by selecting Open
As ToolBox from the drop‐down menu.
When a tool is selected in the Drawing task, the tool automatically becomes the
top icon of the child task in the Solids Modeling task.
Hint: Press F4 to see the current tasks at the pointer.

3D Workflows
Surface Modeling tasks
These tasks contain the Drawing toolbox, plus tasks for construction, and
modification of surfaces and mesh elements.

3D Workflows
Feature Based Solids Modeling tasks
MicroStation has advanced solids modeling construction and modification tools
for parametric modeling using Feature trees. These are contained in the Feature
Based Solids Modeling task.

3D Primitive Solids
Alternate Display options exist for the Task Navigation dialog. Right click on the
name of a task in the dialog itself or select an icon from the icons displayed aside
of the Task name.
List option is useful when learning a new task and Panel option exposes all tools.
3D Primitive Solids
Many 3D solids can be created from 1 or more of the Primitive Solids models
located in the Solids Modeling Task. The primitive models available include the
Slab, Pyramid, Sphere, Cylinder, Cone, Elliptical Cone, Ellipsoid, Torus, Wedge,
and Polyhedron.
3D Surface Primitives have been moved to the Surface Task.
Each tool setting has the Method, Axis and required parameters to create the
specific Primitive Solids:
• Method: Creation by Vertex, Edge, Face, Inscribe, Circumscribed, Center,
Edge, or Diameter.
• Axis: Lets you choose how the axis for the element is defined. You can select
from Points (AccuDraw), Screen X, Y, or Z, or Drawing X, Y, or Z. Screen is
direction of the height is set to the screen's X, Y, or Z axis. Drawing is direction
of the height is set to the drawing's, or model's, X, Y, or Z axis

3D Primitive Solids
Other settings are specific for each tool.
Hint: Although the primitives’ dimensions can be specified in the tool settings, for
placing a single primitive it is generally quicker to type these distances into the
AccuDraw window.
Slab Solid
Probably the most useful of all primitives, the Place Slab tool can be used to draw
any cubic object. Using this tool, you can construct a box shaped solid or surface.
Element specific tool settings are as follows.
• Axis: Points (AccuDraw), Screen X, Y, Z, Drawing X, Y, Z
• Orthogonal: When enabled, the sides are perpendicular to the base.
• Length: If on, specifies the length.
• Width: If on, specifies the width.
• Height: If on, specifies the height.
Slabs placed as Solid (left) and Surface (right)
Place Sphere
With this tool, you can construct a sphere with 2 data points. Element specific
tool settings are as follows.
• Method: Center, Edge, Diameter

3D Primitive Solids
• Radius: When on, specifies the Radius.
Place Cylinder
A cylinder is defined by 3 data points, the center of its radius, then the radius, and
finally the height. Element specific tool settings are as follows.
• Orthogonal: If on, the centerline of the cylinder is perpendicular to the base.
• Radius: If on, specifies the radius.
Hint: You can use the Modify Element tool to reposition the base or top of cylinders.
Place Cone
Similar to the Place Cylinder tool, the Place Cone tool requires a fourth data point
to define the Top radius of the cone. A cone with its apex cut off by a plane
parallel to its base is called a truncated cone or frustum.
• Orthogonal: If on, the centerline of the cone is perpendicular to the base.
• Top Radius: If on, specifies the top radius.
• Base Radius: If on, specifies the base radius.

3D Primitive Solids
Place Torus
A torus is a round doughnut‐shaped object that is defined by 4 data points; the
start point, the center point, the sweep angle, and the secondary radius. The
primary radius is the one the torus is swept around and is the distance between
the start point and the center point. The secondary radius defines the inner
radius, or the radius of the torus’ circular section.
• Primary Radius: If on, specifies the primary radius.
• Secondary Radius: If on, specifies the secondary radius.
• Angle: If on, specifies the sweep angle.
Place Wedge
A wedge is constructed by revolving a rectangular section about an axis. It is
defined by 4 data points. The first data point defines a corner of the wedge, the
second data point defines the center point of the wedge and the point to rotate
about, the third data point defines the sweep angle and the fourth data point
defines the height of the wedge.

3D Primitive Solids
• Triangular: Determines the shape of the wedge. If on, the outer face is flat (a
chord of the swept surface). If off, the outer face is rounded.
• Radius: If on, specifies the radius.
• Angle: If on, specifies the angle.
Place Pyramid Solid
A multi‐sided pyramid with equal sides or a rectangular pyramid can be created
with this new primitive solid.
• Method: Inscribed, Circumscribes, By Edge, and Rectangle
• Orthogonal: When enabled, the sides are perpendicular to the base.
• Edges: You can create from 3 to 63 edges.
The image on left shows Inscribed, Circumscribed, By Edge method and image on right shows Rectangle method
A multi‐sided pyramid with equal sides or a rectangular pyramid can be created
with this new primitive solid.
• Method: Inscribed, Circumscribes, By Edge, and Rectangle
• Axis: Points (AccuDraw), Screen X, Y, Z, Drawing X, Y, Z.
• Orthogonal: When enabled, makes the height perpendicular to the base.
 Exercise: Draw a Pyramid Solid

3D Primitive Solids
1 Open Basic_Solids.dgn and open the model named 01_3D Primitives.
2 Make the Solids Modeling task active in the Task Navigation dialog.
3 Select Pyramid Solid (E+2) with the following tool settings:
Method: Inscribed
Axis: Points (AccuDraw)
Edges: 5
Orthogonal: Enabled
4 Enter Center Point: Click anywhere in view and set AccuDraw rotation to
(T).
Define base radius: Move cursor 40 units in positive X direction.
Define height: Move cursor 80 units in positive Z direction.
Define top radius: Move cursor 20 units in positive X direction.
When Orthogonal is disabled, you can create skewed Pyramid Solids, where the
sides and height are not restricted to being perpendicular to base radius.
When all settings are enabled, you merely define the direction of each
dimension. This is useful when you want to place a number of Pyramid Solids with
the same dimension values. If they are all identical, the Copy tool can be used
after placing the first slab.

3D Primitive Solids
Elliptical Cone Solid
This tool is used to place an elliptical cone solid, which is a transition solid
between two ellipses. The resulting solid is a SmartSolid. Tool settings are:
• Orthogonal: If on, the element is a right elliptical cone.
• Base Primary Radius: If on, sets the primary axis radius for the base.
• Base Secondary Radius: If on, sets the secondary axis radius for the base.
• Height: If on, sets the height of the elliptical cone.
• Top Primary Radius: If on, sets the primary axis radius for the top.
• Top Secondary Radius: If on, sets the secondary axis radius for the top.
 Exercise: Draw a Elliptical Cone Solid using AccuDraw
1 Continuing in Basic_Solids.dgn, in the 01_3D Primitives model, with the
Solids Modeling task active in the Task Navigation dialog, select Elliptical
Cone Solid (E+6) with the following tool setting:
Orthogonal: Enabled
2 Enter a data point anywhere in view and set AccuDraw rotation to (T).
Enter the base ellipse center point.
3 Enter a primary radius (x‐axis = 20) and a secondary radius (y‐axis = 40) to
create the elliptical base.
4 Enter (z‐axis = 80) to define the height of the Elliptical Cone Solid.
AccuDraw automatically switches to the correct AccuDraw Plane rotation
in order to enter the height.
5 Enter the primary radius (x‐axis = 40), secondary radius (y‐axis = 20) and
final data point to complete the solid primitive.

3D Primitive Solids
Ellipsoid Solid
This tool is used to place an ellipsoid, a solid defined by three radii. An ellipsoid is
a type of quadric surface that is a higher dimensional analogue of an ellipse.
 Exercise: Draw an Ellipsoid Primitive Solid using AccuDraw
Solids Modeling task active in the Task Navigation dialog, select Ellipsoid
Primitive Solid (E+7) with the following tool setting:
Orthogonal: Enabled
2 Enter a data point anywhere in the view and set AccuDraw rotation to (T).
Enter the base ellipse primary radius (x‐axis = 40).
3 Enter a secondary radius (y‐axis = 20) to create the elliptical base.
4 Enter a tertiary radius (z‐axis = 20).to complete the Ellipsoid primitive
solid.
AccuDraw automatically switches to the correct AccuDraw Plane rotation
in order to enter the tertiary radius.
5 Enter the primary radius (x‐axis = 40), secondary radius (y‐axis = 20) and
final data point to complete the solid primitive.
Regular Polyhedron
A polyhedron (plural polyhedra or polyhedrons) is often defined as a geometric
object with flat faces and straight edges of equal length.
Method:
• Vertex — Radius is measured from the center of the polyhedron to
each vertex.

3D Primitive Solids
• Edge — Radius is measured from the center of the polyhedron to the
midpoint of each edge.
• Face — Radius is measured from the center of the polyhedron to the
center of each face.
Radius: If on, defines the Radius used to construct the polyhedron.
Face Number: Option menu that lets you select the number of faces for the
polyhedron — 4, 6, 8, 12, or 20.
 Exercise: Draw an Polyhedron Primitive Solid using AccuDraw
Solids Modeling task active in the Task Navigation dialog, select
Polyhedron (E+10) Primitive Solid with the following tool setting:
Method: Vertex
Face Number: 20
2 Enter a data point anywhere in view, set the AccuDraw rotation to (T), and
then define the radius and axis for the Polyhedron primitive.

Create Solids Toolbox
The Create Solids Tools include Solid by Extrusion, Solid by Revolution, Solid by
Extrusion Along, Solid by Thicken Surface and Linear Solid.
If you need to create complex or curved solids, you can often create them from a
profile element. You can extrude a profile in a straight line, along a specific 3D
path with profile rotation control.
Solid By Extrusion
This tool is used to construct 3D solids or surfaces from 2D profiles. It lets you
extrude, or project, a planar 2D element along an axis to create a 3D object. Thus,
lines become planes, circles become cylinders and blocks become slabs. When
complex shapes or SmartLines are used as the profiles, quite complex solids or
surfaces are possible. Available element types for extrusion are:
• Line
• Line string
• Arc
• Ellipse
• Shape
• Text
• Multi‐line
• Complex chain

• Complex shape
• B‐spline curve
Surfaces formed between the original profile element and its extrusion are
indicated by straight lines connecting the keypoints.
Tool settings are as follows.
• Type: Solid or Surface.
• Orthogonal: When on, the sides are perpendicular to the plane of the profile
element.
• Distance: When on, defines the distance of the projected extrusion.
• Spin Angle: When on, defines the angle through which the 2D element rotates
(counter‐clockwise) about the axis of projection (maximum 360°). To correctly
specify the rotation, you must select the shape at the point about which the
rotation is to occur.
Hint: When using Spin Angle it is best to select the center of the profile as the
pivot point.
• X Scale and Y Scale: When on, specifies the scaling factor for the shape as it is
being projected. Scaling is uniform about the point at which the shape is
identified.
• Both Directions: When on, the extrusion is constructed in both directions
from the profile.
• Use Active Attributes: When on, the surface or solid of revolution is created
with the element using the active attributes. When off, the surface or solid of
revolution is created with the element taking the attributes of the profile
element.
• Keep Profile: When on, the original profile element is kept. When off, the
profile is deleted.
 Exercise: Extruding a profile
1 Open Basic_Solids.dgn.
2 Open the model 02_Extrude 1.
The model is part of an observation platform. Profiles for the support
columns are ready to be extruded.
3 Select Solid by Extrusion (R+1), with the following tool settings:
Orthogonal: Enabled

Distance: Enabled and set to 3.0
4 Following the status bar prompt, in the Isometric view, identify profile
number 1.
5 Move the pointer above the profile so the extrusion is upward, and accept
with a data point.
You can extrude multiple profiles, in a single operation, by first selecting
the profiles with the Element Selection tool.
 Exercise: Extruding multiple profiles
1 Continuing Basic_solids.dgn, in the model Extrude 1, select Element
Selection (1) from the Main toolbox with mode set to Block and method
set to Add.
2 In the Isometric view, draw a block around the remaining 3 column
profiles.
3 Select Solid by Extrusion (R+1) with the following tool settings:
Orthogonal: Enabled
Distance: 3.00
4 All other settings: Disabled
5 Enter a data point to accept the selection set.

6 Move the pointer above the profiles so that the extrusion is upwards,
snap to accept this direction.
Extrusions may have a scale applied to them, or a spin angle, or both.
 Exercise: Extruding with Spin Angle and Scaling
1 Continuing in Basic_Solids.dgn, open the model 03_Extrude 2.
2 Select Solid by Extrusion (R+1), with the following tool settings:
Orthogonal: Enabled
Distance: Enabled and set to 8
Spin Angle: Enabled and set to 45
All other settings: Disabled
3 In the Isometric view, snap to the center of the left profile.

4 Move the pointer upward and accept with a data point.
Spin Angle: Disabled
X Scale: Enabled and set to 0.75
Y Scale: Enabled and set to 0.75
6 Identify the center of the center profile.

7 Move the pointer upward to extrude in that direction and accept with a
data point.
8 Enable Spin Angle and set it to 45.
9 Identify the center of the right profile and extrude it upward.
With Orthogonal enabled, all extrusions are perpendicular to the plane of the
element being extruded. The position of the pointer merely defines whether the
projection is up or down from the profile. If you disabled Orthogonal, you can
define the extrusion to be in any direction.
Solid By Revolution
When you require a curved circular extrusion, you can use the Construct
Revolution tool. As with the Extrude tool, this tool also is used to construct 3D
solids or surfaces from 2D profiles. In effect, a profile is revolved about an axis to
create a solid or surface. Available element types for curved circular extrusion
are:
• Line

• Line string
• Arc
• Ellipse
• Shape
• Complex chain
• Complex shape
Tool settings for this tool are as follows.
• Type: Solid or Surface.
• Axis: Defines the direction of the axis about which the revolution is
performed. Options are: Points (AccuDraw); Screen X, Y, or Z; Drawing X, Y, or
Z.
• Angle: Defines the sweep angle of the revolution (about the axis).
• Use Active Attributes: When on, the surface or solid of revolution is created
with the element using the active attributes. When off, the surface or solid of
revolution is created with the element taking the attributes of the profile
element.
• Keep Profile: When on, the original profile element is kept. When off, the
profile is deleted.
In the next exercise, you will rotate a profile of a rocket nozzle 360 degrees
around an axis to create a solid.
 Exercise: Create a solid by revolving a profile
1 Continuing in Basic_Solids.dgn, open the model 04_Revolution 1.
2 Select Solid by Revolution (R+2) with the following tool settings:
Angle: 360
Other settings: Disabled
3 In the Isometric view, identify the profile.

4 Snap to the top of the dash‐dot line at and accept with a data point.
The proposed solid is displayed. Note that the pointer now controls the
axis of the revolution. As you move it the radius changes and the solid
changes in size. You can change the axis plane using AccuDraw shortcuts.
The pointer controls the location of the axis.

5 Snap to the bottom of the dash‐dot line at and accept with a data point.
The solid is completed.
6 In View 4, click the View Display Mode view control and change the
display mode to Smooth.
You can turn off the level Default to remove the centerline.
Using the Construct Revolution tool, you can create complex curved 3D solids
from a 2D shape or complex shape. Equally, you can revolve an open element,
such as a line string or an arc to create a curved surface.
Solid By Thicken Surface
This tool is used to add thickness to an existing surface to create a solid. Upon
identifying the surface, an arrow displays showing the distance and direction of
the thickening that will be added. If Add To Both Sides is on, arrows display in
both directions. If Thickness is not turned on, then thickening is added
graphically, with the amount of thickening defined by the screen pointer. Tool
settings are:
• Add To Both Sides: If on, the thickness value is added to both sides of the
surface.
• Thickness: If on, sets the thickness value that is added to the surface.
• Face Only: If on, lets you select an individual face of a solid or surface.

• Full Dynamics: If on, displays a preview. On large surfaces, the display may
take a long time. Turning the toggle off will reduce the generation time.
• Keep Original: If on, the original profile element is retained.
 How to use Solid By Thicken Surface:
1. Select the Solid by Thicken Surface tool.
2. Turn on Thickness.
3. In the Thickness field, enter the value for the thickening.
4. If necessary, turn on Add To Both Sides.
5. Identify the surface.
6. The surface highlights. An arrow(s) displays, showing the distance and to
which side(s) the thickness will be added.
7. If Add To Both Sides is off, move the pointer, using the arrows as a guide, to
select the side for thickening.
8. Accept.
Linear Solid
This tool is used to create a wall like solid (with rectangular section) by defining its
alignment direction.
 Exercise: Linear Solid
1 Continuing in Basic_Solids.dgn, open the model 05_Linear Solid.
3 Select Linear Solid (R + 5) with the following tool settings:
Place by: Center
Width: .5

Height: 3
4 Enter a data point in any view and draw the floor plan as dimensioned in
the following image.

Challenge Exercises
 Exercise: Draw a door and hardware
1 Create a new model in AccuDraw_3D.dgn. Set working units set to “m”
(MU) and “cm” (SU) and work only in the Isometric view.
2 Use the Place Slab tool to create the solid door, 2.5m tall, 5cm thick and
75cm wide (Front orientation).
3 Place 2.5cm diameter cylinders for the hinges (7.5cm long starting 15cm
from the top and bottom) with the center of the hinge on the edge of the
door.
4 Use the Place Sphere and Place Cylinder tools to create the doorknob
(5cm diameter spheres on both sides with a 2.5cm diameter cylinder,
15cm long, connecting them). Place the doorknob assembly 5cm from the
edge of the midpoint of the door.
 Exercise: Draw a floor lamp
The lip around the shade is a torus with a primary radius
of 30cm and secondary radius of 2.5cm. It is placed from
an edge of the shade.
The Shade is a surface Cone with a Base radius of 5cm, height of 22.5cm
and Top radius of 30cm.
The Pole is a Cylinder that is 195cm high and 5cm in diameter.
The Base is Cylinder with a radius of 22.5cm and height of 5cm.

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 How do you place a B‐spline curve using Through Points option?
2 True or False: By increasing nodes on a B‐spline curve you also increase the
time to compute the results.
3 What tool would you use to modify a curve such that you create a sharp
turn in the curve shape?
4 How do you select the back face on a 3D model?
5 True or False. The new Polyhedron Primitive solid has an unlimited
number of faces option.
Answers
1 A B‐spline is defined by placing control points, or poles, with a minimum
of 3 poles required.
2 False. Increasing curve nodes using the Edit Nodes tool allows you to have
more control over the curve shape. Another method is to increase the
order of the curve, but this method requires more computation time.
3 The Edit Kink tool. This tool allows a very localized modification of a curve
so that the handelbars of the kink can be modified to create sharp
direction change in the curve.
4 When selecting a face within a tool sequence select a visible face then
move the cursor to a common edge and select this edge using a tentative
snap, which will select the coincident face.
5 The Polyhedron Primitive Solid is limited to 4, 6, 8, 12, and 20 faces.

Module Review

Advanced Solid Modeling
Module Overview
Complex solids can be created by using additional tools for solid creation and
modification.
Starting with basic solids or surfaces, you can add finishing touches such as fillets
and chamfers. You can use a planar closed shape or open element as a profile to
create a cut out in either a surface or a solid. Use the Shell Solid tool to create a
hollow solid with defined wall thickness. You can also execute Boolean operation
on Solids.
• Knowledge of Solid Primitives
Module Objectives
• Use and apply the Solid Construction tools
• Use and apply the Solid Modification tools
• Modify a face, edge, or vertex, of a solid
• Remove one or more faces from a solid
• Taper the face of a solid
• Construct a solid from the union, intersection or difference of 2 or more solids
• Place a cut in a solid
Feb-09 145 Advanced Solid Modeling

• Fillet or chamfer the edge(s) of a solid
• Edit 3D primitives
Questions
1 How do you place a B‐spline?
2 True or False: When you change the order of a curve it can be changed to
an order that is higher than the number of points used to place the curve.
Answers
3 poles required.
2 False. It cannot be changed to an order that is higher than the number of
points used to place the curve.
Working Area
Solids modeling requires greater accuracy than that required for surface
modeling. The Solids setting in the Working Areas section of the DGN File Settings
dialog’s Advanced Unit Settings dialog (Settings > Design File, Working Units
category) lets you set a working area that determines the degree of accuracy for
solids calculations.
The Parasolid solid modeling kernels used by MicroStation require coordinate
data at a fixed precision. In order to guarantee enough precision is available,
MicroStation defines the solids working area.
Advanced Solid Modeling 146 Feb-09

Working Area
The size of the solids modeling area can be increased, but doing so will reduce the
available precision. It defines an upper bound that limits the extents of any single
solid so that it can be modeled to a fixed precision. This precision value is
displayed in the Advanced Unit Settings dialog as Solids Accuracy.
The settings that you use depend on whether you require compatibility with V7
projects or not. For best results, in the Resolution section, set storage unit to
Meter. In the Working Areas (each axis) Solids section, for V8 projects Input 1
(Kilometer) and for V7 projects Input 0.
For V8 projects, this will set the Solids Accuracy to 1E‐008, which also is the
Parasolids default. If you then make any changes to the Resolution setting,
changing the Solids value back to 1 Kilometer will restore the Solids Accuracy to
1E‐008.

Solids Modeling Task
Solids Modeling Task
The Solids Modeling task contains the tools for construction and modification.
Panel view of the Solids Modeling task
Create Solids, Modify Solids, and Solid Utility tools
Solid By Extrusion Along
The Solid By Extrusion Along tool is used to construct 3D solids from 2D profiles
extruded along a curve called a path. It replaces the Extrude Along Path tool.
You can create solids by extruding profiles along a path element that the profile
element is to follow as it is extruded. When using a profile, you can specify that
the extrusion is attached to the path element, or that it uses the path element to
define the direction of the extrusion from the current location of the profile.
This tool can be used to create items such as roofs, pipe work, ductwork, or
handrails. You can create the extrusion with a profile or by specifying the outside
and the inside radii, where a circular solid or a hollow pipe is being constructed.

When Circular is selected for extrusions, the ends are capped.
The profile rotation can be determined by the curve geometry or the profile may
be locked in a specific direction. This tool also permits self intersecting geometry,
but when this condition exists, time for creation is slower.
For those that have used prior versions you will notice the absence of the Path to
Profile and Profile to Path Attachment options which are no longer available in
the MicroStation V8i version. After selecting a profile, you have a small ball that is
the Change Start Point. This point can be dragged to modify the start of the path,
giving you the same functionality as previous versions for Path to Profile or Profile
to Path.
Available element types for extrusion are:
• Ellipse
• Shape
• Text
• Multi‐line
• Complex chain
• Complex shape
Open elements are not valid, as they would produce a Surface. If you need an
open element, use the Surface by Extrusion Along command, from the Surface
task.
Tool settings are as follows:
Alignment: Determines the orientation of the profile element as it is
extruded.

• Normal — As the profile is extruded, it maintains a fixed relationship
with the normal plane of the path.
• Parallel — As the profile element is extruded, it remains aligned
parallel to its original position.
Scale: When enabled, and value is entered you are prompted to enter the
scale point, the point that the result is scaled about.
Spin: When on, defines the angle through which the 2D element rotates
(counter‐clockwise) about the axis of projection (maximum 360°).
Hint: When using Spin Angle it is best to select the center of the profile as the
pivot point.
Lock Profile Rotation: When you need to keep the end profile in the same
position as the start profile enable the Lock Profile Rotation option. Here

you select the path, profile or face, and then you must select the start of
the lock direction and the end point of the locked direction.
Profile on left created with Lock Profile Rotation disabled and on right with Lock Profile Rotation enabled
This direction is an up vector indicating the position in a Cartesian
coordinate system.
The up vector, which determines the rotation direction start and end point for a Locked Profile Rotation
Circular: When this option is enabled a profile is not necessary to
complete construction. You must also enter an inside and outside radius to
complete construction.
Solid By Extrusion Along with Circular option.
On Left path and on right results with inside and outside diameters.

Allow Self‐Intersection: If the curvature of the path is too small for the
profile to be swept through the path due to a self intersection of the
profile then you can Enable Allow Self‐Intersection.
Keep Path: When on, the original path element is kept. When off, the path
is deleted.
Keep Profile: When on, the original profile element is kept. When off, the
profile is deleted.
 Exercise: Solid By Extrusion Along with Lock Profile Rotation
1 Open Advanced_Solids.dgn, in the 01_Extrusion model, with the Solids
Modeling task active in the Task Navigation dialog,
2 Select Solid By Extrusion Along (R + 3) with the following tool settings:
Alignment: Normal
Enable: Lock Profile Rotation
All others default.
3 Select the helical path at the start point and then snap to the middle
bottom of the profile where it intersects the helical path, then accept the
profile.

4 Place the start point of the lock direction at the bottom of the path and
the end point of the locked direction (up vector) in the direction of the axis
of the path.
5 Accept with a data point.
 Exercise: Solid By Extrusion Along with Spin Angle
1 Continue in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 02_Extrusion.
2 Make the Solids Modeling task active in the Task Navigation dialog. You
will create one of the cutting blades pictured in the image below.
3 Select Solid By Extrusion Along (R + 3) with the following tool settings:
Alignment: Normal
Enable Spin: Set angle to 60 degrees.
4 Select the straight line for the path and the closed shape for the profile
5 Select path and profile.

You will now use this tool to create a pipe.
 Exercise: Extrude pipe
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 03_Extrude Pipe.
3 Select Solid by Extrusion Along (R + 3) with the following tool settings:
Circular: Enabled
Inside Radius: Enabled and set to 140
Outside Radius: Enabled and set to 143
4 In the Isometric view, identify the dashed path element with a data point
anywhere along its length.
5 Accept with a data point to view the construction.
Depending on system specifications, this may take a few seconds.
The proposed pipe is calculated and displayed.
6 Accept the construction with a second data point.
The circular pipe extruded along the path element.
When using a profile as the template for the extrusion, you can create the
extrusion directly from the position of the profile element, offset from the path
element, or create the extrusion by attaching the profile to the path element.
 Exercise: Create an extrusion offset from the path element
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 04_Extrude Duct.
2 Select Solid by Extrusion Along (R + 3), with the following tool settings:

Alignment: Normal
All others: Disabled
3 Identify the lower dashed path element with a data point, anywhere along
its length.
4 Identify the square green profile and accept with a data point to see the
construction.
5 Accept with a data point, to view the extrusion.
The proposed extrusion is calculated and displayed.
6 Identify the upper dashed path element with a data point, anywhere along
its length.
7 Identify the arc green profile at one of its end points and accept with a
data point to see the construction.

8 Accept the construction with a data point.
9 Fit View to see the offset extrusion in each view.
Remember, where required, you can specify that the extrusion is attached to the
path element. You do this by moving the, at the point on it that you want attached
to the path element.
 Exercise: Create an extrusion attached to the path element
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 05_Extrude
Handrails.
2 Select Solid by Extrusion Along (R + 3) with the following tool setting:
Alignment: Normal
3 Identify the green path element with a data point, anywhere along its
length.
4 In View 2, select the left red profile element.
6 Enter a data point to view the proposed extrusion.
8 Repeat this procedure to construct a handrail along the yellow path, using
View 3 to snap to the right red profile.

9 Use the view controls tools, such as Rotate and Zoom In/Out, to inspect
the construction.
After extruding the handrails
Observing the other views, you can verify that the extrusion follows the
alignment of the path element exactly.
 Extra Exercise: Extruding a road cross section
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model EXTRA_Extrude
Bridge.
2 Use the Bridge Cross section and center, cyan, path element to create the
bridge.
3 Use the 3 Guard Rail cross sections and the cyan path elements to create
the guard rails.

Shell Solid tool
You can use the Shell Solid tool to hollow out a solid, leaving it with walls of a
defined thickness. Where necessary, you can specify that 1 or more faces are
removed to create an opening. Tool settings for this tool are as follows.
• Shell Thickness: Sets the wall thickness for the remaining faces of the shelled
solid.
• Shell Outward: If on, material is added to the outside of the existing solid. The
existing solid defines the inside of the walls of the shelled solid.
Selecting/deselecting faces for removal
After selecting the solid for shelling, as you move the pointer over it, the face
nearest the pointer highlights. Entering a data point selects the dashed
highlighted face, which then remains highlighted. To select additional faces, hold
down the Ctrl key and move the pointer over the solid to highlight the face. You
then can use Ctrl data points to select additional faces for removal.
To select a face that is behind another face in the view, enter a data point, or Ctrl
data point, on the face, which will highlight the nearest face. Then reset until the
required face highlights.
Resetting also can be used to deselect the last face selected. Subsequent resets
deselect faces in the reverse order. The last face selected is the first face
deselected.
In the following exercises, you will create shelled solids both with and without
openings.
 Exercise: Create a shelled solid with no openings
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 06_Shell 1.
2 Select Shell Solid (T + 5) with the following tool settings:
Shell Thickness: 15
Shell Outward: Disabled
3 In any view, identify the green solid.
The solid highlights. As you move the pointer over the solid, the various
faces highlight in a heavier weight dashed line.
4 Move the pointer away from the solid, so that no faces are highlighted,
and enter a data point.

5 Click on View Display Mode and select:
Mode: Hidden Line
The solid is hollowed out. As there are no openings, rendering the view
would display only the outside surface.
6 Select Edit > Undo.
 Exercise: Create a shelled solid with the top and front face removed
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, in the model 06_Shell 1, select Shell
Solid (T + 5) with the following tool settings:
Shell Thickness: 15
2 In the Isometric view, identify the green solid with a data point.
3 Move the pointer over the solid until the top face highlights, and then
enter a data point.
The top face now is highlighted as a heavier weight solid line.
4 Press Ctrl and select the front face.

The solid is shelled and the top face removed.
6 Set View 4’s View Display Mode to Smooth and use the view controls
tools, such as Rotate and Zoom In/Out, to inspect the construction.
You can use any view to highlight the faces. For example, if you move the pointer
into the Top view, the top face is nearest the pointer and is selected immediately.
Generally, a rotated view, such as the Isometric, is easier to use because you can
see exactly which surface is highlighted. Additional surfaces can be added by using
the Ctrl key and accepting with a data point.
If a solid has rounding and/or one or more holes through it, the Shell Solid tool
recognizes these and shells around them accordingly.
Warning: If the rounding radius is smaller than the offset radius, it cannot be offset and will
not shell.
 Exercise: Shell a solid containing rounding and holes
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 07_Shell 2.
2 Select Shell Solid (T + 5) with the following tool settings:
Shell Thickness: 5
3 Identify the green solid with a data point.

4 Move the pointer over the solid until the top surface highlights, and then
enter a data point.
The top surface of the solid highlighted.
5 Accept with a data point to complete the shelling.
The solid after shelling and removing the top surface
6 Set View 4’s View Display Mode to Smooth and use the view controls
tools, such as Rotate and Zoom In/Out, to inspect the construction.
Using the Shell Solid tool can save you considerable modeling time,
particularly when the design has uniform thickness walls, as in the
previous example.
Working in the opposite direction, you can create solids from surface elements.
Earlier, you used the Extrude tool to create a solid from a planar surface. If the
existing surface is not planar, however, the extrude tool will not work. In these
cases, you can use Solid by Thicken Surface.

Solid by Thicken Surface tool
You can use the Solid by Thicken Surface tool to add thickness to an existing
planar or non‐planar surface, thus creating a solid. Upon identifying the surface,
an arrow displays showing the distance and direction of the thickening to be
added. If Add To Both Sides is on, arrows display in both directions.
If Thickness is not turned on, then thickening is added graphically, with the
amount of thickening defined by the cursor. If Add To Both Sides is off in these
cases then the screen pointer also defines the direction of the thickening. Tool
settings are as follows.
• Add To Both Sides: If on, the thickness value is added to both sides of the
surface.
• Thickness: If on, the value in the field determines the amount of thickening
added.
• Face Only: If on, lets you select an individual face of a solid or surface.
• Full Dynamics: If on, displays a preview. On large surfaces, display may take a
long time. Turning the toggle off will reduce the generation time.
• Keep Original: If on, the original surface is retained.
In the following exercise, you will extrude a line string and then thicken it to
create a section of office partitioning.
Warning: Thickness may be too large to permit the solid surface to be offset, since the solid
would overlap itself. This tool does not allow for self‐intersection.
 Exercise: Draw a shape and add thickness
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 08_Office.
This model has 2 office cubicles, with a line string showing the centerline
for the proposed partitioning.
2 Select Surface by Extrusion (Surface Task, T+ 1), with the following tool
settings:
Orthogonal: Enabled
3 In any view, select the red line string and accept with a data point.
4 Move the pointer upward to direct the extrusion upward, and accept with
a data point.
5 Select Thicken to Solid (Solids Task, R + 4) with the following tool settings:

Add To Both Sides: Enabled
Thickness: Enabled and set to 25
6 Select the extruded line and accept with a data point.
The shape highlights and arrows appear, showing the direction and size of
the thickening. Because you are adding thickness to both sides of the
surface, you don’t have to worry about the direction of the thickening.
7 Select a Face and Ctrl+Data to select the other faces, accept again, to
complete the thickening.
Hidden Line view of model after thickening the extrusion

Boolean tools
Replace Face
The Replace Face tool lets you replace a face of a solid with a selected surface.
The result is a solid that has the selected surface as one of its faces.
 How to use Replace Face:
Select the Replace Face tool. Identify the solid. Select the face to be replaced.
Identify the surface and the face of the surface to be used as a replacement
face, if necessary, and accept.
Boolean tools
Three tools in the 3D Modify toolbox let you unite, intersect, or subtract solids.
They let you create a complex solid from two or more existing solids.
Unite Solid tool
With the Unite Solids tool, you can unite, into a single solid, two or more
overlapping solids or solids that have coincident faces. This is very useful for
grouping several separate solids into a solid, from which the finished model can
be produced.

Boolean tools
In the tool settings, Keep Originals lets you choose to retain in the model the First,
Last, All, or None.
• All: All of the original solids are retained.
• First: The first solid identified is retained.
• Last: The last solid identified is retained.
• None: None of the original solids are retained.
When constructing a union of solids, you can use the Element Selection tool to
select the solids first, or select the tool first, then the solids.
When you use the first method, the color of the resulting solid is that of the
(selected) solid that was placed in the file first. When you use the second method,
the color of the resulting solid is that of the first solid selected.
As with the other exercises, you will work in the Isometric view which displays
two copies of a simple window frame, each created from eight slabs.
 Exercise: Construct the union of solids using Element Selection
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 09_Unite Solid.
You will consolidate these individual solids into a single entity. First, you
will select the solids using Element Selection.
3 Select the Element Selection tool (1) with the following tool settings:
Method: Block
Mode: New
4 In the Isometric, Top, or Front view, place the block around all elements
that make up the window on the left.

Boolean tools
The selected solids highlight.
5 Select Unite Solid (T + 7) with Keep Originals set to None.
6 Enter a data point to accept the union.
The separate solids are united into a single solid. The resulting solid (left) is
red because one of the red slabs was placed in the model before the other
slabs.
When you select the solids individually, the color of the first solid selected is the
color that is used for the combined solid.
 Exercise: Construct the union of solids, selecting each solid separately
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, in the model 09_Unite Solid, with the
Unite Solid tool still active, identify one of the green frame members in
the window on the right with a data point.
The slab highlights.
2 Identify the remaining slabs that make up the window with data points so
that all are highlighted.
3 Enter a data point to accept the construction.
The solids are united into a single green solid.
If you happen to miss one or more of the solids, you can repeat the process,
adding the solids that were left out, remembering that the first solid chosen
defines the color of the united solid.

Boolean tools
Intersect Solids tool
Using the Intersect Solids tool, you can create a solid of a common volume of two
or more overlapping solids.
In the tool settings, the Keep Originals setting lets you choose to retain in the
model the First, Last, All, or None of the original solids.
When constructing an intersection of solids, you can select the solids first,
followed by the tool, or you can select the tool first, then the solids.
When you use the first method, the color of the resulting solid is that of the
(selected) solid that was placed in the model first. When you use the second
method, the color of the resulting solid is that of the first solid selected.
Where you have 2D elevations of a design, often you will be able to use them to
create extrusions of each elevation. From there you can use the Intersect Solids
tool to create the finished solid.
In the following exercise, you will construct a 3D chair from the intersection of
extrusions created from its front and side views.
 Exercise: Create a solid from the intersection of 2 existing solids

Boolean tools
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 10_Intersection.
You see 2 sectional views of the chair. First, you will extrude these
sections.
2 Select Solid by Extrusion (R + 1) with the following tool settings:
Orthogonal: Enabled
3 In the Top view, identify the green shape and extrude it to the right.
4 Repeat the previous step for the violet shape, extruding it upward.
5 Select Intersect Solids (T + 8) with Keep Originals set to None.
6 Identify the green and violet solids with data points, in any view.

Boolean tools
7 Enter a data point to complete the construction.
The resulting solid is green because the green solid was the first chosen.
Smooth shaded view of the completed chair.
Subtract Solids tool
With the Subtract Solids tool, you can subtract from a solid the volume of one or
more overlapping solids. Additionally, you can subtract a part of a solid back to an
intersecting surface.
As with the other boolean tools, the tool setting Keep Originals lets you choose to
retain in the model the First, Last, All, or None of the original solids.
 Exercise: Construct the difference between solids
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 11_Difference 1.
A green cone with a blue cylinder overlapping it is displayed.
2 Select Subtract Solids (T + 9) with Keep Originals set to None.
3 With a data point, identify the green solid.
4 With a data point, identify the blue cylinder.
The blue cylinder highlights.

Boolean tools
5 Enter a data point to complete the construction.
Before (left) and after (right) subtracting the blue cylinder from the green solid.
If you want to subtract several solids, you can select them all prior to
accepting.
6 Turn on the level Tap Cutouts in the Isometric view.
Additional red cylinders now display.
7 Select Subtract Solids (T + 9) with Keep Originals set to None.
9 Identify each of the red cylinders in turn, so that they are all highlighted.
10 Enter a data point to complete the subtraction.

Boolean tools
If multiple solids are to be subtracted, it is often quicker to use the Element
Selection tool to select them all prior to selecting the Subtract Solids tool.
You can use the same tool to subtract part of a solid back to where a surface
intersects it. This can be useful for creating solid ground surfaces.
In the following exercise, you will subtract part of a slab back to a B‐spline surface
representing the existing ground for a construction project. For this kind of
construction, the part of the solid that is retained is defined by the surface
normals of the surface element.
You can check the direction of the surface normals and, if necessary, reverse them
with the Change Normal Direction tool.
 Exercise: Subtract a solid back to a surface
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 12_Difference 2.
The model contains a slab and a B‐spline surface.
2 Select Change Normal Direction (Surface Task, S + 6).
3 Identify the orange B‐spline surface. Enter a data point to change the
normal direction.
Surface Normals pointing down

Boolean tools
4 In the Solids Task, select Subtract Solid (T + 9), with Keep Originals set to
None.
5 Identify the green slab.
6 Identify the orange B‐spline surface.
7 Accept to complete the operation.
The part of the solid that is retained is below the surface, in the direction
that the surface normals were pointing.
Using the 3D primitive solids, extrusions and the three boolean tools, you can
create the basics for quite complex models. Other tools in the 3D Modify task let
you add cuts, fillets and chamfers.
Cut Solids by Curves tool
With the Cut Solid tool, you can place a cut in a solid using a template or cutting
profile. Cutting profiles may be open or closed elements, but open elements must
extend to the edge of the solid. When you use an open element as a cutting
profile, the identification point for the solid determines the portion of the solid
that is retained. If Split Solid is enabled, however, no material is removed. In these
cases, the solid is merely split at the cutting profile. Tool settings are as follows.
• Cut Direction sets the direction of the cut, relative to the cutting profile’s
Surface Normal.
Both: Cuts both directions from the profile’s plane

Boolean tools
Forward: Cuts forward from the profile’s plane (in the direction of the Surface
Normals).
Back: Cuts back from the profile’s plane (in the reverse direction of the
Surface Normals
• Cut Mode sets the limits of the cut.
Through: Cuts through all faces of the solid.
Define Depth: Cuts into the solid a defined distance.
• Cut Depth(Cut Mode set to Define Depth only) Sets the depth of the cut.
Split Solid: If on, no material is removed from the solid; it is split into 2 or
more segments.
Keep Profile: If enabled, the original cutting profile remains in the model
In the following exercise, you will use a template of the earthworks cross‐section
to place a cut in the existing ground section that you created previously. You will
see that you can change the settings for the cut prior to accepting.
 Exercise: Place a cut using a cross‐section template
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 13_Cut Solid 1.
2 Select Cut Solid by Curves (T + Q), with the following tool settings:
Cut Direction: Forward
Cut Mode: Through
Split Solid and Keep Profile: Disabled
3 In any view, identify the green solid.
4 Identify the red cutting profile.
The direction arrow for the cut is pointing away from the solid. This is
clearly visible in the Top, Front, and Isometric views.
5 Change the following tool setting:

Boolean tools
Cut Direction: Back
Note that the direction arrow now points toward the solid.
6 Accept to make the cut.
If you had enabled Split Solid, then the cut would have split the solid, but not
removed the cut section. You could use this procedure when you want to measure
the volume of the material being removed, using the Measure Volume tool. The
cut volumes could be stored on a separate level for future checking.
When you have multiple cuts to apply to a solid, you can perform the operation in
1 step by selecting all the cut profiles prior to selecting the tool. For example, you
could create a shell of a building and then draw blocks for the windows and
doorways. These could be cut in a single operation. The direction of the cut is
controlled by the surface normal of the cutting profile and the Cut Direction
setting of the Cut Solid tool. In the following example, the cutting profiles all have
their surface normals pointing away from the center of the building.
 Exercise: Place multiple cuts in a solid
2 Select Element Selection (1) and use it to select all of the red cutting
profiles.
Hint: Use element attributes and Element Selection to select more quickly.

Boolean tools
Cut Direction: Forward
Cut Mode: Through
Split Solid and Keep Profile: Disabled
4 Identify the green building shell with a data point.
5 Accept with a data point to complete the cuts.
6 The openings for the doorways and windows are cut through the solid.
Before (left) and after (right) cutting the window and doorway openings.
If you want to place cuts only part way through a solid, you can set Cut Mode to
Define Depth and specify the Cut Depth. In the following exercise, for example,
you will cut slots into a timber stairway stringer to accommodate the steps. The
profiles for the steps have been located on the face of the stringer.
 Exercise: Place a partial cut in a solid
2 Select Element Selection (1) and select all the red rectangular profile
elements.
All the cutting profiles are highlighted.
Cut Direction: Back
Cut Mode: Define Depth
Cut Depth: 25
Split Solid: and Keep Profile: Disabled

Boolean tools
While you only require the cut to be in 1 direction, you can use Both in this
situation because the profiles are on the surface of the solid. This saves
you time checking the direction of the profiles’ surface normals in order to
select the correct cut direction.
4 Identify the green solid.
5 Accept to complete the construction.
Hidden line view of the completed stringer
Fillets and Chamfers
You can use the Fillet Edges and Chamfer Edges tools to apply rounding or
chamfers to 1 or more edges of a solid, extruded surface, or surface of revolution.
From a basic solid, you can add fillets and/or chamfers to produce the finished
design.
Fillet Edges tool
Tool settings for this tool let you define the radius of the fillet and whether to
select tangential edges.
• Radius defines the radius of the fillet.

Boolean tools
• Select Tangent Edges: If on, edges that are tangentially continuous are
selected and filleted in 1 operation.
Chamfer Edges tool
Tool settings for this tool let you define the trim distances for the chamfer,
whether to select tangential edges, and the option to reverse the trim distances
for the chamfer where they differ.
• Distance 1 and Distance 2: Sets the distances to trim back the faces.
• Lock Control: If enabled Distance 1 and Distance 2 are constrained to the same
value. If disabled Distance 1 and Distance 2 may be different values
• Select Tangent Edges: If on, edges that are tangentially continuous are
selected and chamfered in 1 operation.
• Flip Direction: When Distance 1 and Distance 2 are different, reverses the
direction of the chamfer and the values that the faces are trimmed.
Selecting edges for filleting or chamfering
After identifying the solid, as you move the screen pointer over it, the edge
nearest the pointer highlights. Entering a data point selects the highlighted edge,
which then remains highlighted. To select additional edges, simply hold down the
Ctrl key and move the pointer over the solid. You then can use Ctrl data points to
select any additional edges for chamfering or filleting.
Deselecting edges for filleting/chamfering
Where you select an incorrect edge, a Reset deselects the edge. If you have
selected a number of edges, consecutive resets will deselect the edges in the
reverse order. The last edge selected is the first edge deselected.
 How to fillet/chamfer 1 or more edges of a solid, extruded surface, or
surface of revolution:
Select the Fillet Edges or Chamfer Edges tool.
Identify an edge to fillet/chamfer with a data point. The solid highlights with
the selected edge highlighted in a heavier weight line.
Enter a data point away from any of the edges to accept the construction.
— or —
Using Ctrl data points, identify additional edges to be filleted/chamfered.

Boolean tools
Enter a data point away from any of the edges to accept the construction of
fillets/chamfers at all the selected edges.
Correcting an incorrectly constructed chamfer
When you construct a chamfer with different values for Distance 1 and Distance 2,
it may be in the wrong direction. Distance 1 and Distance 2 are applied to the
wrong faces.
 How to correct a chamfer that is constructed in the wrong direction:
1 Undo the chamfer(s).
2 Enable Flip Direction.
3 Reconstruct the chamfer(s).
Let’s see how the fillet and chamfer tools work. In the next exercise, you will finish
a glass topped table, adding rounding and chamfers to its basic form.
 Exercise: Fillet an edge of a solid
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 16_Fillet.
2 Select Fillet Edges (T + W) with the following tool settings:
Radius: 20
Select Tangent Edges: Disabled
3 Identify the inside edge of the table’s frame at location 1 with a data point.
The solid highlights with the selected edge additionally highlighted.
4 Move the pointer away from any edges and accept with a data point.
The fillet is constructed for the selected edge.
Left: the selected edge highlighted. Right: the completed fillet.
Multiple edges can be filleted (with the same radius) in the 1 operation.

Boolean tools
 Exercise: Fillet the remaining edges of the frame
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, in the model 16_Fillet, with Fillet
Edges still active, identify the inside edge of the frame at location 2.
The edge highlights.
2 While holding the Ctrl key, move the pointer over the solid and note that
the edges highlight as the pointer passes over them.
3 Enter a Ctrl data point at locations 3, and 4.
These edges now highlight along with the first edge selected.
4 Releasing the Ctrl key, move the pointer away from any edges and enter a
data point to complete the construction.
All 3 edges are filleted.
Radius: 45
6 Use Ctrl data points to select the outer edges of the frame near locations 1
through 4.
7 Move the pointer away from any edges and enter a data point to complete
the construction.
When applying fillets to a solid, you should consider the order in which the fillets
are applied. Because you filleted the corners of the table frame first, you will now
be able to fillet the edges of the frame in 1 step, using the Select Tangent Edges
setting.
 Exercise: Fillet the vertical edges of the table frame

Boolean tools
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, in the model 16_Fillet, select Fillet
Edges (T + W) with the following tool settings:
Radius: 7.5
Select Tangent Edges: Disabled
2 Identify the vertical edge of the table frame at location 5.
Note that only the straight section of the edge highlights.
3 Reset.
Select Tangent Edges: Enabled
5 Identify the edge at location 5.
Note that the entire edge highlights this time.
6 Accept, away from the solid, to complete the construction.

Boolean tools
7 Complete the table frame by filleting the remaining 7 vertical edges, along
with their tangent edges.
When you select an edge for a fillet or chamfer and the wrong edge highlights,
you can reset until the correct edge highlights. If you are selecting multiple edges
using Ctrl data points, you can still reset, without the Ctrl key, to highlight the
correct edge before proceeding. You may need to make use of this method during
rounding of the corners of the table top.
 Exercise: Round the corners of the table top
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, in the model 16_Fillet, select Fillet
Edges (T + W) with the following tool setting:
Radius: 40
2 Enter a data point on the lower left vertical edge of the blue table top. If
the incorrect edge highlights, enter resets until the short vertical edge is
highlighted.
3 Use a Ctrl data point to select another of the vertical edges of the table
top.
If the incorrect edge highlights, release the Ctrl key and reset until the
correct edge highlights.

Boolean tools
4 Repeat the previous step to select the remaining corners of the table.
5 When all 4 corners are selected, accept with a data point entered away
from the solid.
Chamfers are applied the same way as fillets. In this exercise, you will add
chamfers to the upper and lower edges of the glass table top.
 Exercise: Chamfer the upper and lower edges of the table top
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, in the model 16_Fillet, select Chamfer
Edges (T + E) with the following tool settings:
Distance 1 and Distance 2: locked and set to 5
Select Tangent Edges: Enabled
2 Identify the top edge of the blue table top.
The entire edge highlights.
3 Use a Ctrl data point to identify the lower edge of the blue table top.
Both edges now are highlighted.

Boolean tools
4 Move the pointer away from the highlighted edges and accept with a data
point.
Detail showing corner of table top before (left) and after (right) chamfering the edges.
Taper Solid tool
The Taper Solid tool is used to narrow or widen one or more faces on a solid. The
amount of taper applied is controlled by the Draft Angle setting.
• Draft Angle: Sets the angle to be applied to the taper. The draft plane is
parallel to the face that is to be tapered.
• Add Smooth Faces: If on, any tangentially continuous faces are included with
the selected face. If off, only the selected portion of the tangentially
continuous face is tapered.
Selecting the face(s) to taper
After identifying the solid, as you move the screen pointer over it, the face
nearest the pointer highlights. Entering a data point selects the highlighted face,
which then remains highlighted. To select additional faces, simply hold down the
Ctrl key and move the pointer over the solid. You then can use Ctrl data points to
select any additional faces for removal.
To select a face that is behind another face in the view, enter a data point, or Ctrl
data point, on the face, which will highlight the nearest face. Then reset until the
required face highlights.

Boolean tools
Deselecting faces to taper
If you select an incorrect face, a reset deselects the face. If you have selected a
number of faces, consecutive resets will deselect the faces in the reverse order.
The last face selected is the first face deselected.
Defining the taper origin
After selecting the face(s) to be tapered, the next data point defines the start
point for the taper. This can be a point above or below the selected face.
 Exercise: Taper a single face
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 17_Taper 1.
2 Select Taper Solid (T + 4), with the following tool settings:
Draft Angle: 5
Add Smooth Faces: Disabled
3 Identify the solid so that it highlights.
4 Move the pointer to location 1 and enter a data point to highlight the face.
Only the selected face highlights in a different color.
5 Snap to the vertex at location 2, and enter a data point to set the starting
point of the taper. Choose Front, <F> or Side, <S> rotation.

Boolean tools
6 Snap to the vertex at location 3 to define the draft plane normal vector for
the taper.
7 Accept to taper the selected face.
After tapering the face.
In the previous exercise, you tapered just the selected section of a face that is
tangentially continuous around 3 sides of the solid. If required, you can taper all
sections of such a face in 1 step.
 Exercise: Taper multiple (tangentially continuous) faces
1 Continuing in Advanced_Solids.dgn, open the model 18_Taper 2.
2 Select Taper Solid (T + 4), with the following tool settings:
Draft Angle: 5

Boolean tools
Add Smooth Faces: Enabled
3 Identify the solid so that it is highlighted.
4 Move the pointer to location 1 and enter a data point to further highlight
the face.
5 The selected face highlights, along with all tangentially continuous faces.
6 Snap to the vertex at location 2, and enter a data point to set the starting
point of the taper.
7 Snap to the vertex at location 3, to define the draft plane normal vector
for the taper.

Boolean tools
8 Accept to taper the selected faces.
Edit 3D Primitive tool
At times, you may place a number of 3D primitives, extrusions or revolutions as a
starting point in creating a more complex solid. After you have placed any of these
elements in a model, you can use the Edit 3D Primitive tool to modify them by
editing their parameters. Dimensions available for editing depend on the 3D
primitive element selected.
3D Primitive Editable parameters
Slab Length, Width, and Height
Sphere Radius
Cylinder/Cone Top Radius, Base Radius, and Height
Torus Primary Radius, Secondary Radius, and Angle
Wedge Radius, Angle, and Height
Extrusion Distance
Revolution Angle of revolution
Note: If you require greater flexibility with parametric editing of solids, you should
work with feature solids.

Module Review
 How to edit a 3D primitive:
1 Select the Edit 3D Primitive tool (T + R).
2 Identify the primitive.
3 Accept to open the Edit dialog.
4 Make changes to the parameters in the dialog as required.
5 Click OK to make changes.
You can see how this tool works for yourself. A number of example solids are
present in model EXTRA_Edit Primitives, in Advanced_Solids.dgn.
Module Review
Questions
1 What does the Solids setting in the Working Areas section of the DGN File
Settings dialog’s Advanced Unit Settings dialog do?
2 What happens if you increase the size of the solids modeling area?
3 When using Extrude Along Path, how can you specify that the extrusion is
attached to the path element?
4 What do the Boolean tools do?

Module Review
 Challenge Exercise: Draw a solid
1 Draw the following solid (all dimensions are shown in mm).
Start with a 40 x 40 x 10 slab.
Draw a block and create the 12 x 6 (through) cutout at the rear of the
object.
Draw 2 19 x 18 blocks and create the 6 deep cutouts in the top face.
Add the 6 x 6 chamfer and the 6 radius fillet.

Module Review
 Challenge Exercise: Draw an Impeller
1 Draw the following solid (all dimensions are shown in mm).
There are many approaches to creating a 3D solid model. The following
are suggested techniques for creating the impeller:
• Solid by Extrusion or cylinder solid
• Solid by Extrusion Along
• Copy by Polar Array
• Modify Solid Entity

Module Review
Answers
1 It lets you set a working area that determines the degree of accuracy for
2 It will reduce the available precision.
3 By snapping to the profile, at the point on it that you want attached to the
path element.
4 The let you unite, intersect, or subtract solids. They let you create a
complex solid from 2 or more existing solids.

Solid Utilities
Module Overview
The Solids Utility toolbox contains tools that help with extracting parts of a solid
and changing the properties of a solid among other useful tools.
• Knowledge of Basic and Advanced Solids Modeling
Module Objectives
• Relocate elements so that their faces are aligned
• Change the display of SmartSolids
• Extract a face, edge or untrimmed surface from a solid
• Intersect a solid or surface with a linear element
• Convert to SmartSolid/Surface
Feb-09 193 Solid Utilities

Questions
2 If you select an incorrect element, how do you deselect it?
Answers
2 A reset deselects. If you have selected a number of faces, consecutive
resets will deselect the faces in the reverse order.
Solid Utilities 194 Feb-09

Utility Tools
Utility Tools
These tools are used with existing solids in the model.
Solid Utilities opened as a toolbox
• Align Faces: Move an element and align a selected face of it to the selected
face of a second element.
• Change SmartSolid Display: Change the display of SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces.
• Extract Face or Edges: Extract a face, or edge, from a solid or surface.
• Intersect Solid/Surface with Curve: Find the intersection point between a
solid/surface and a linear element.
Align 3D tool
If a 3D model consists of several individual components, it is often convenient to
create each component separately and then assemble them later. If the assembly
requires manipulating elements so that various faces align with each other, use
the Align 3D tool.
This tool is used to align the selected face of the first element to the selected face
of a second element. It is very useful for aligning various parts of a model, where

Utility Tools
1 or more of the faces do not coincide with the model coordinate system. In
aligning the faces, various tool settings let you choose how the alignment is
performed. Tool settings are as follows.
• Method: Sets the way that the planes of the faces are selected.
• Face to Face — Aligns the face of one solid or surface with the face of a
second solid or surface with two arrows. The blue arrow is used for
position and the red arrow is used for rotation. The ball portion of both
arrows can be moved to a new location by dragging with the Data
button pressed.
• Plane to Plane — Aligns one element to a second element by
describing a plane with an origin and x, y‐axis on each element. The
direction of the Z axis is controlled by an arrow.
• Plane to Curve — Aligns a planar element or an element that contains
a plane normal to a linear element or curve element. The location and
rotation of the planar element can be adjusted along the linear or
curve element by dragging or changing the direction of the arrows.
• Keep Original: If on, a copy of the first element is used and the original
element is not manipulated.
Selecting faces
After you have identified the solid, moving the pointer over it highlights the face
nearest the pointer. When the required face highlights, enter a data point to
select it. To select a face that is behind another, simply enter a data point on it,
which will highlight the nearest face, and then reset until the required face is
highlighted.
The ball and arrows
The arrows on the element that is being moved can be adjusted by using the
following:
Blue Arrow ‐ Click and drag on blue arrow to change direction.
Black Ball ‐ Click and drag to move the black ball portion of the arrow to a new
location.
Red Arrow ‐ The rotation can be changed by selecting the edit handle at the end
of the red arrow. When this is selected, an edit circle along the axis of the blue
arrow will allow rotation.

Utility Tools
The arrows on both elements can be changed to the desired rotation of the
element during the preview state.
The blue arrow at the new location by default will line up with the blue arrow of
the element to be moved.
Changing the direction of this arrow does not change the location of anything. It
should not be changed from the default direction.
General procedures to align in 3D
 How to align in 3D using Face to Face:
1. Select the Align 3D tool with Method set to Face to Face.
2. Identify the element to align.
3. Move the pointer over the element to highlight (with yellow dashed lines)
the required face and enter a data point to accept.
4. Identify the second element or Ctrl+Data to select more elements to align.
5. Move the pointer over the element to highlight the required face and enter
a data point to accept.
6. Use Black ball on source face to align by snapping to edges or vertices.
Adjust under desired result is achieved.
 How to align in 3D by Plane to Plane:
1. Select the Align 3D tool with Method set to Plane to Plane.
2. Identify the element to align.
3. Snap to the desired origin point and enter a data point to accept the
element. This will define the ‘from’ coordinate origin.
5. Define the ‘from’ coordinate first axis point. A red arrow displays, showing
the direction of the first (x) axis.

Utility Tools
6. Define the ‘from’ coordinate second axis point. Green and blue arrows
display, showing the direction of the second (y) and the third (z) axis’
directions, respectively.
7. Define the ‘to’ coordinate origin. This defines the origin point for the
relocation. The first element’s origin point will be located at this point.
8. Define the ‘to’ coordinate first axis point. A red arrow displays, showing the
direction of the first (x) axis.
9. Define the ‘to’ coordinate second axis point. Green and blue arrows appear,
showing the direction of the second (y) and the third (z) axis’ directions,
respectively. At the same time, the first element is relocated with its defined
axes aligning with the defined axes of the second element.
10. Accept the relocation with a data point. Alternatively, click the and drag
the blue arrow on source to reverse the direction of the re‐located element.
This action completes the command.
 How to align in 3D by Plane to Curve:
1. Select the Align 3D tool with Method set to Plane to Curve.
2. Select the element to be moved.
This can be any element that will describe a plane. The simplest is a line string
with two segments. A curve is also valid as long as a plane can be derived.
3. Select the element to move to.
This can be any element that contains a line or a curve. It can be a B‐spline
curve, the edge of a surface or solid that can be used for a sweep curve, and
so on. In the preview there will be a direction arrow and a rotation ball on
both elements. The direction of the arrow can be changed as needed. The
location of the arrow can be changed by dragging with the Data button
pressed. The rotation arrow can be used to change the rotation of the profile.


Utility Tools
4. Press the Data button to accept or Reset to reject.
In the next exercise, you will align a face of the red slab (marker 1) with the
sloping face of the green solid (marker 2), using the Face to Face method to
orientate the slab.
 Exercise: Align 3D with two 2 solids using Face to Face
User: untitled
2 Open Solids_Utilities.dgn.
3 Open the model 01_Align 1.

Utility Tools
4 With the Solids Modeling task active in the Task Navigation dialog, click
Align 3D and select Open as ToolBox.
5 Select Align 3D (A+2), with the following tool settings:
Method: Face to Face
Keep Original: Disabled
6 Identify the red slab with a data point.
The slab highlights.
7 Move the pointer over the solid to highlight the left face, identified by
location marker 1.
8 When the face highlights, accept with a data point.
The face remains highlighted and has the ball and arrow on it.
9 Move the ball and red arrow, then click n the blue arrow to reverse
direction as shown below.

Utility Tools
The solid highlights.
11 Move the pointer over the solid to highlight the sloping face, identified by
location marker 2.
12 When the face highlights, accept with a data point.
The dynamic copy of the red slab re‐locates with its identified face
abutting that of the green solid.
13 Select the red arrow handle and snap to the mid‐point of the lower edge
of the sloping face.

Utility Tools
14 Select the black ball and snap to the mid‐point of the upper edge of the
sloping face.
15 On the source solid (location 1) move the black ball to the mid‐point of the
lower edge and watch the result on the re‐located solid.

Utility Tools
16 Returning to the re‐located solid, you can now move the lack ball down to
the mid‐point of the face using AccuDraw.
The slab is located on the sloping face of the green solid.
18 Check the other views, particularly the right view, to verify that the red
slab is correctly aligned with the face of the green solid.
After aligning the red slab
The previous exercise can be shortened with better use of AccuDraw and
snapping.
Try the Plane to Curve option with the line behind the green solid.

Utility Tools
Next, you will align the barrel tile to the roof, by placing 1 on each roof. As an
extra exercise, you can also place the skylight on the roof.
The following method is Plane to Plane. Here you will define the origin and two
points to create a source plane, and then another origin and two point to define
the destination plane.
 Exercise: Align skylights to roof with Plane to Plane
1 Continuing in Solids_Utilities.dgn open the model 02_Align 2.
2 Select Align 3D (A+2), with the following tool settings:
Method: Plane to Plane
Keep Original: Enabled
3 In View 3, following the status bar prompt, snap to the base of the barrel
tile (the lowest point of the rectangle) and accept with a data point.
4 Snap to the right end point of the base to set the x‐axis direction of the
plane.

Utility Tools
5 Snap to the left end of the base and accept with a data point.
6 In View 2, snap to the lower left point on the top face of the roof solid and
accept the origin of the destination plane.
7 Snap to the right of top edge as shown and accept for x‐axis direction and
accept.
8 Snap to the left of top edge as shown and accept for y‐axis direction and
accept.

Utility Tools
9 Press the data button to accept the alignment.
 Optional Exercise: Using ACS
1 Repeat the previous exercise, using ACS planes for the roof planes.
Change SmartSolid Display tool
By default, when you place SmartSolids in a model, they display in Wireframe
display mode. Their display is controlled by the Display Mode setting in the B‐
spline and 3D dialog.
When you need to change the value for an existing element, however, you can use
the Change SmartSolid Display tool.
Surface/Solid Iso Lines are used to represent curved surfaces and curved faces on
solids. The Surface/Solid Iso Lines setting applies to curved surfaces and lets you
define the number of rule lines for curvature.
Another option is to set the Display mode for SmartSolids to be either Wireframe
(the default) or Surfaces. Surfaces mode should be used only when the design is
to be rendered in previous versions of MicroStation. Finally, you can choose to
suppress the display of B‐spline Faces and/or Complex Blending Faces.
Tool settings are as follows.
• Surface/Solid Iso Lines: Sets the number of iso lines that represent a full 360°
of curvature of curved surfaces for SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces.
U Rules — Sets the number of lines in the U direction (Rows).
V Rules — Sets the number of lines in the V direction (Columns).
• SmartSurface/Solid: Lets you set the display mode for SmartSolids and
SmartSurfaces:

Utility Tools
• Surfaces — required only if the design is to be rendered with a
previous version of MicroStation.
• Wireframe — the default display mode, which should be used unless
the design is to be rendered with a previous version of MicroStation.
• Suppress Rule Lines: Lets you suppress, or turn off, the display of rule lines for
particular faces on SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces.
• B‐spline Faces — If on, display of rule lines on B‐spline faces can be
suppressed.
• Complex Blending Faces — If on, display of complex blending faces can
be suppressed.
When working in wireframe screen display mode, curved surfaces sometimes are
not clearly displayed in 1 or more views. You can remedy this by changing the
number of surface rule lines that define these curved surfaces.
 Exercise: Change the number of surface rule lines used to display a curved
solid
1 Continuing in Solids_Utilities.dgn, open the model 03_Display.
This model contains a solid that was created by adding thickening to a B‐
spline surface. While each view displays the solid, it is not clear just where
the surfaces are located. Currently, the number of U and V Rules are set to
2. Increasing this number will help you visualize the surface.
2 From the Solids Modeling task, select Change SmartSolid Display (A+3)
with the following tool settings:
U Rules: 4
V Rules: 4
Display Mode: Wireframe
3 Identify the green solid in any view.
The solid highlights.

Utility Tools
The display of the green solid updates with extra rule lines displaying the
shape of the solid’s surfaces.
Solid with U and V Rules set to 2 (left) and to 4 (right)
Extract Face or Edge Geometry tool
You can use this tool to extract a face or an edge from a solid. Many solids are
created by adding cuts, fillets and chamfers to an underlying primitive solid, such
as a slab. Using the Extract Face or Edge Geometry tool, you can create a separate
element that matches a face or an edge of the solid. This may be used to create a
template or profile, which you can use to create a further solid.
Selecting faces/edges for extraction
After identifying the solid, as you move the screen pointer over the solid, the face
or edge nearest the pointer highlights. Entering a data point selects the
highlighted face or edge, which then remains highlighted.
You can use data points to select multiple edges. To do this, after selecting the
first edge, you move the pointer to highlight the next edge and then enter a data
point to select it.
For faces, you can use Ctrl data points to select multiple faces. To do this, after
selecting the first face, you hold down the Ctrl key and move the pointer to
highlight the next face and then enter a data point to select it.
Where you want to select a face that is located behind another face in the view,
select the face that is in front and then press Resets until the required face
highlights.
Deselecting faces/edges for extraction
If you select an incorrect face or edge, reset to deselect it. Where you have
selected a number of faces or edges, consecutive Resets deselect them in the
reverse order. That is, the last face or edge selected is the first deselected

Utility Tools
Tool settings for this tool let you define the symbology (level, color, weight and
style) of the extracted face or edge.
• Extract: Sets the type of element to be extracted
Faces — extracts selected faces from solid.
Edges — extracts selected edges from solid.
Untrimmed Surfaces — extracts an untrimmed surface from solid. That is, a
simple surface, less any cuts, chamfers, fillets.
• Level, Color, Weight and Style: Define these attributes for the extracted
element.
 Exercise: Create a spacer by extracting a face of a flange
1 Continuing in Solids_Utilities.dgn, open the model 04_Extract.
This is a model of a short length of pipe with a flange. You will create a
spacer for the pipe flange. You will use the extracted face from the flange
as the template to extrude the spacer.
2 Select Extract Face or Edges (A+4) with the following tool settings:
Extract: Faces
Level: Enabled and set to Default
Color: Enabled and set to red (color 3)
Weight and Style: Disabled
3 Identify the pipe and flange.
The solid highlights. As you move the pointer over it, the face nearest the
pointer highlights.
4 In View 3, move the pointer to highlight the bottom face of the flange and
enter a data point.

Utility Tools
5 Move the pointer away from any faces and enter a data point to complete
the extraction of the face.
6 Make Default the active level.
7 In the Isometric view, turn off the level Geometry.
To complete the spacer, you can extrude this extracted element.
8 Select Solid by Extrusion (R + 1) with the following tool settings:
Orthogonal: Enabled
Distance: Enabled and set it to 15
9 In the Isometric view, identify the red spacer element you just extracted.
10 Move the pointer downward to define the direction of the extrusion and
enter a data point to complete.
Pipe, flange and extruded spacer in Smooth display style

Utility Tools
Compute Intersections tool
With this tool, you can find the intersection point between a solid or a surface and
a linear element (curve). Optionally, you can have points, normals, or both points
and normals placed at the intersection points.
 Exercise: Intersect a solid with a linear element
1 Continuing in Solids_Utilities.dgn, open the model 05_Intersect.
2 Select Compute Intersections (S+5) with the following tool settings:
Normals at Intersections: Enabled
3 Identify the green surface with a data point.
The surface highlights.
4 Identify the white dashed line.
The line highlights.
6 Points and normals appear at each intersection point of the line with the
solid.
View showing the points and surface normals at the intersection points
Convert To Solid
This tool can be handy when you have created a slab or extruded a complex shape
as a surface, and you want them to be solids. Use the tool to convert the surface
elements to solids. If the surface model is a primitive shape such as a slab,

Utility Tools
cylinder, torus, etc., use the Primitive Solid option and for all other surface models
use the SmartSolids option.
 Exercise: Converting a surface to a solid
1 Continuing in Solids_Utilities.dgn, open the model 06_Convert.
2 Click the View Display Mode tool and change the display mode to Smooth.
As you can see, the geometry has no front or back surface.
3 Select Convert To Solid (A + 1) with the following tool setting:
Convert To: Solid
4 Identify the extruded surface.
The surface highlights.
Looking at the rendered view, you can see that it now has at least a front
face. If you check the element with the Element Information tool, you will
find that it is a solid.

Note that the front and back faces have added to create a Smart Solid
6 Check with Element Information.
Module Review
Questions
1 True or False: The Solids Utility tools are used to place solids in a model.
2 When using the Align Faces tool, which method lets you control the
location and orientation of the relocated element?
3 By default, when you place SmartSolids in a model, they display in what
display mode?
4 Where can you change the SmartSolid display mode?
5 What does the U direction represent?
6 What does the V direction represent?
Answers
1 These tools are used to work with existing solids in the model.
2 The By 3 Points method.
3 By default, when you place SmartSolids in a model, they display in
Wireframe display mode.
4 The Display Mode setting in the B‐spline and 3D dialog.
5 Rows.
6 Columns.

Module Review

Conceptual Modeling
Module Overview
Push‐Pull Modeling or Conceptual Modeling technology lets you quickly create
and modify solids interactively, by adding or removing faces and vertices and
pushing and pulling faces and vertices.
• Knowledge of Basic Solid Modeling
Module Objectives
• Use the Draw on Solid tool
• Use the Modify Solid Entity tool
• Use the Delete Solid Entity tool
Feb-09 215 Conceptual Modeling

Questions
1 How can you to move focus to the AccuDraw window?
Answers
Conceptual Modeling 216 Feb-09

Conceptual Modeling Tools
Draw on Solid
The Draw on Solid tool is in the 3D Modify toolbox. It lets you draw lines, shapes,
and circles, directly onto the face of an existing solid, or you can imprint a curve
onto the face. These additions become faces that can be modified with the
Modify Solid Entity tool, which lets you push and pull on faces and vertices.
The tool recognizes the nearest face under the pointer and matches the AccuDraw
drawing plane to the selected face.
Note: If a drawn line does not intersect with an existing edge, it is extended or
trimmed back to the edge.
Draw on Solid is used to create an edge on a solid by drawing the following onto
the face of a solid:
• Line
• Line string
• Block
• Circle
• Shape

• or imprinting a Curve
Using Draw on Solid on a face of a slab
The solid, including the newly created edges, vertices and faces can be modified
with the Modify Solid Entity tool, or deleted with the Delete Entity tool.
Modifying the newly created edge
For the Imprint Curves option, you can select a face located behind another by
entering 1 or more resets, or using a different view.
Imprinting a curve onto a face of a solid.
The Offset option lets you draw lines offset from edges of the face of a solid.
These edges can include edges previously drawn on the face of the solid.
• Loop — Selects all edges surrounding the identification point on the
face of the solid.
• Edges — Lets you select one or more edges on a face of a solid. Use
<Ctrl> + Data points to select additional edges.
 Exercise: Quick Test of Draw On and Modify Solid

1 In a new file, try re‐creating the above solids.
2 Use Place Slab, then Draw On Solid.
3 Then use Modify Solid to adjust the solid.
Modify Solid Entity
The Modify Solid Entity tool is in the Solids Modeling task. It is used to manipulate
a face, edge, or a vertex, of a solid by pushing or pulling it interactively.
Icons in the tool settings let you select All, a Face, an Edge, or a Vertex when you
are selecting the item to modify. These options determine what you modify, and
how the entity is selected.
Tool Settings are as follows.
• All: Lets you select a visible face, or any edge or vertex on a solid in the view.
• Face: Lets you select a face on any identified solid in the view. By default the
nearest face is selected, with resets letting you select hidden faces on the
same solid.
• Edge: Lets you select any edge on any solid in the view.
• Vertex: Lets you select any vertex on any solid in the view.
• Distance: If on, sets the distance that the face, edge, or vertex, is to be
modified.
• Extrude Faces: If on, the selected face is extruded. If off, the selected face is
moved and adjusted along with the adjacent sides.

Conceptual Modeling Basics
• Full Dynamics: If on, dynamic display shows the modified element as you
move the pointer. If off, an arrow graphic indicates the direction and extent of
the modification.
Delete Solid Entity
This tool is in the 3D Modify toolbox. It is used to delete a solid entity from a solid
other than a feature solid.
When selecting faces, the nearest face always is selected. You can rotate the view,
or use another one, to select a hidden face. If need to delete multiple faces, you
can select the additional faces with a Ctrl data point.
Conceptual modeling tools let you interactively push‐pull solids to modify their
faces, edges, or vertices. This lets you quickly create and modify solids
interactively.
Drawing lines on a Solid face
Figure 1. line drawn on face
In Figure 1, a line was drawn from the midpoint of the left edge of the Solid, to the
midpoint of the right edge, using the Draw on Solid tool with the Draw Line option
enabled.

In Figure 2. the line, which is now an edge, has been pulled in the Z axis using the
Modify Solid Entity tool.
Figure 2. Edge pulled in Z axis.
The following images show the process of creating the final design concept using
the previous tools.
Figure 3. Draw on Solid Figure 4. Modify Entity Extrude Face
Figure 5. Draw on Solid Figure 6. Modify Entity other side

Projecting lines on a Solid face
Basic MicroStation elements such as lines, shapes and B‐spline curves can be
projected on to Solid faces. These elements become edges after projection. These
edges can be modified by extruding a face and moving an edge or vertex.
Figures 7‐9. Curves projected onto Sold face then modified into conceptual design

Create a Conceptual Design
 Exercise: Create the design shown in the image
1 Open the model Design Concept in Conceptual Modeling.dgn.
2 Turn on the Level designconcept_steps.
3 Select the Solids Modeling task.
4 Select Draw on Solid (T+1), read the prompt, and in the tool settings
select:
Imprint Curves: Enabled
5 Imprint both the Octagonal shapes onto the base solid.
Remember to select the Solid face onto which the curves are to be
imprinted.
6 Using Modify Solid Entity (T+2), read the prompt and select the face of
outer imprinted shape and extrude that face 0.25 meters.
This will create the second step in the design.

7 Using Modify Solid Entity (T+2), read the prompt and select the inner
shape and extrude up by 0.5 meters.
This will create the third step of the base.
Front view of base
8 Turn on the Level designconcept_columns.
Column curves display.
9 Select Draw on Solid (T+1) and the the Imprint Curves tool setting and
imprint each of the columns onto the face of the base solid model.

10 Select Modify Solid Entity (T+2), enable the Select Face option, and
extrude face of each imprinted column a distance of 10 meters.
Hint: To save time, turn on the Level designconcept_roof to display the a
second completed model of the roof for this design.

This model used Draw Line on Solid and the Modify Solid Entity Vertex
option to create the roof shape.
11 Use the Construct Union Tool to unite both models into one Solid model.
 Optional Exercise: Create the roof model
1 Create the octagonal shape.
2 Extrude the shape .5 meter.
3 Draw lines on the solid.
4 Use Move Vertex.

Module Review
Questions
1 What is Push‐pull modeling technology?
2 What do you use the Draw on Solid tool for?
3 What do you use the Modify Solid Entity tool for?
4 What methods can you use to select faces that are hidden?
Answers
1 Push‐pull modeling technology lets you quickly create and modify solids
interactively, by adding or removing faces and vertices and pushing and
pulling faces and vertices.
2 To draw lines, shapes, and circles, directly onto the face of an existing
solid, or to imprint a curve onto the face.
3 To manipulate a face, edge, or a vertex, of a solid by pushing or pulling it
interactively.
4 Highlight the nearest face and the reset until you select hidden face.
Rotate the view or use another view.

Module Review

Solid Modeling Challenge
Exercises
The following is a challenging exercise series, using a variety of tools and heavy
emphasis on using AccuDraw in 3D.
When selecting faces, the nearest face always is selected. You can rotate or use
another view to select a hidden face, or right click to get the back face. Where you
require multiple faces to be deleted, you can select the additional faces by
pressing the Ctrl key and then entering a data point.
You will draw a bridge pylon. The completed pylon is on the level Completed for
reference.
 Exercise: Getting started
1 Create a new 3D file using the seed file 3dmetricgeneral.dgn in
…\Projects\Examples\General\Seed\.
2 Choose the Solids Modeling task.
3 Arrange the views as desired.
4 From the Solids Modeling task, select Place Slab (E+1).
5 With focus on AccuDraw (Esc + space bar) use the shortcut <P> to open
the absolute point placement window.
6 Enter 0,0,0 and press Enter.
7 Pan so that this first point in the lower center of your view.
8 Use the shortcut <T> to rotate to the Top plane.
Feb-09 229 Solid Modeling Challenge Exercises

9 Following the status bar prompt, enter a length of 3000, width of 3000,
and a height of 10000 to place the Slab.
Using AccuDraw, you could place the block in the right place the first time, but
you will use a slightly longer method to hone 3D AccuDraw skills.
 Exercise: Using Draw on Solid
1 Select the Draw on Solid tool (T+1), and in the tool settings select Draw
Block.
2 Select the solid and draw a block on any vertical face of the solid.
Solid Modeling Challenge Exercises 230 Feb-09

3 Select Modify Solid Entity (T+2) with the All icon depressed in the tool
settings to edit the edges just created.
4 Select the mid‐point of the edge to modify and snap to the mid‐point of
the nearest vertical edge of the solid.
5 Use the AccuDraw shortcut <O> to place the origin at the snap point.
6 Index to the axis back to the center of the face and press <Enter>.

7 Key‐in 300 and data to accept the new location of the edge.
Edge moved to mid‐point to mid‐point

8 Repeat for the other vertical edge.
Second edge moved mid‐point to mid‐point

9 Continue with Modify Solid Entity and snap to the mid‐point of the upper
edge of the solid.
10 Press <O>, index back to the center face, and press <Enter>.

11 Key‐in 1000 and data to accept the new location of the edge.
12 Repeat this process for the other 3 faces.
Now you will modify the face by extruding it.
 Exercise: Extrude a face
1 Continue with the Modify Solid Entity (T+2)., and with Face depressed in
the tool settings.
2 Select the solid and then select the newly created face, by selecting the
middle of the face.
3 Data once more inside the face to accept it for modification.

4 Using AccuDraw Top or Side rotation move the face out 1000.
One face extruded
5 Now repeat on the opposite face, using the same dimensions.

6 Repeat for the other two faces except make the distance from the top
1500 and the extrusion distance to 500.
Now you will cut holes into two of the newly extruded faces.
 Exercise: Draw on circle on solid and modify
1 Select the Draw on Solid tool (T+1).
2 In the tool settings, select Draw Block.
3 Draw a Block on one of the extruded faces.

4 Read the prompt and start to draw from the upper left corner of the
extruded face, by using <O> for Set Origin. Index down 500 units (y) and
and to the right by 700 units (x).
5 Make the block 1000 units wide by 2000 units tall.
6 Select the Modify Solid Entity tool (R+2), set your tool setting to Face.

7 Read the prompt, and select the newly created block, data to accept the
face.
8 Index toward the center of the solid, key‐in 500 and accept with a data
point.
9 Repeat for the opposite extruded face.
Now you will taper all the faces from the bottom.

 Exercise: Use Modify Solid to Taper a Face
1 Select the Modify Solid Entity tool (T+2). with the following tool settings:
All
Full Dynamics: Enabled
2 Select the extruded face at the bottom center edge.

3 Snap to the lower left corner and accept with a data point.
4 Taper the other three faces in the same way.

 Exercise: Adding a Slab, modifying it and Union to previous solid
1 Select Place Slab (E+1), and snap to the base of the extruded face with the
cut‐out. Accept the origin with a data point.
2 Snap to the other end of the extruded face to define the length.
3 Index away from the solid to define the width of 250.
4 Define a height of 2500. Enter a data point to complete the solid.
5 Set the snap divisor to 3 (AccuDraw shortcut <K>).
6 Select Draw on Solid tool and choose the Draw Line method.
7 Snap to the upper one‐third of the new slab and draw a horizontal line.

Hint: You do not need to draw the entire line. The tool will draw the line to
edge of the face for you.
8 Draw another line snapping to the bottom one‐third of the new slab face.
Note: You snapped to the lower 1/3 of the remaining 2/3 of the front face of
the new slab.
9 Select the Modify Solid Entity (T+2) tool and select the lower face and
extrude it by 500 units.
10 Continuing with the Modify Solid Entity, select the middle face and
extrude it out by 250 units.

11 Select the Unite Solids tool (T+7) and select the newly modified solid and
the original solid.

Introduction to Feature
Modeling
Module Overview
Solids created with the Feature Modeling tools are fully editable, either using the
parameters used to create them, or graphically using handles after selecting with
Element Selection. If you add a feature to a SmartSolid, it is converted to a
feature solid, but only those features that were placed with the Feature Modeling
tools contain the intelligence of feature solids and can be edited.
When you work with the Feature Modeling tools, each item that you create is
known as a feature. Each feature is stored in a feature tree, along with the
parameters used to create it.
MicroStation's Feature Modeling tools let you create parametric feature‐based
solids. That is, a parametric solid that is created from one or more features.
Parameters used to create the features are stored in the design and can be edited
with the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool. Alternatively, you can edit a
feature interactively by selecting it with the Element Selection tool and then
dragging its handles.
• Knowledge of basic MicroStation 3D tools
Module Objectives
• Set seed files for Feature Modeling
• Create Feature Solids
• Modify Feature Solids
Feb-09 245 Introduction to Feature Modeling

Questions
1 How do you limit the display depth of a view?
3 What can the Place Slab tool can be used to draw?
Answers
1 You can limit the display depth of a view by turning on the front and back
clipping planes, which restrict the view to a specific slice of the design
cube.
2 A B‐spline is defined by placing control points, or poles, with a minimum
of 3 poles required.
3 The Place Slab tool can be used to draw any cubic object. Using this tool,
you can draw cubic solids and surfaces.
Introduction to Feature Modeling 246 Feb-09

Feature Modeling Task
Feature Modeling Task
Tools for creating and manipulating feature‐based solids are located in the
Feature Modeling task.
Sub‐tasks, in order, are:
• Drawing
• Primitive Feature Solids
• Boolean Feature Solids
• Profile Feature Solids
• Modify Face Features
• Manipulate Feature
• Features
• Delete Feature
• Modify Feature
• 3D Utility
• Dimension Driven Design
• Surface Modeling

Feature Modeling versus Solid Modeling
Another way to look at Feature Modeling is to recognize what you can do with
the tools.
The names of the sub‐tasks are similar to the tasks for Solid Modeling, and so are
the specific tools, but Feature Modeling has many more tools and options.
Feature Modeling versus Solid Modeling
When should you use Feature Models and when should you use Solid Models?
Generally, you should always use Feature Models since you can drop them to
regular solids later if needed. In addition, Feature Modeling tools are more robust
and let you use Dimension Driven Design. A downside is that Feature based solid
models tend to produce slightly larger file size than regular solids because of their
added intelligence.
Creating Feature‐Based Solids
Seed Files and Feature Modeling
Using the correct seed file is critical when using the Feature Modeling tool set.

Creating Feature-Based Solids
Working Area and Feature Modeling
When working with feature‐based solids, the Solids setting in the Working Areas
section of the DGN File Settings dialog’s Advanced Unit Settings dialog (Settings >
Design File, Working Units category) determines the largest single feature‐based
solid that can be created in a model.
For example, if you set the Solids working area to be 1 kilometer, then no single
solid in a model can be larger than 1 kilometer. This is the recommended setting,
and should cover most, if not all, solids that you are likely to have to model.
This system of local solids working areas provides a flexible environment.
• With SmartSolids, the Solids Working Areas setting specifies the area in the
model in which solids can be constructed (centered on 0,0,0). All SmartSolids
should be constructed within this working area.
• With feature‐based solids, the solids working area is a local area for each
solid. You can construct as many solids as you like, anywhere in the models, as
long as each solid does not exceed the Solids Working Areas dimension.
Creating Feature‐Based Solids
Working with the Feature Modeling tools lets you create solids with various
features in a very simple workflow:
1. Create the underlying feature solid(s).
2. Add features to the solid.
Typically, feature‐based solids consist of an underlying base solid to which
features are added. The underlying solid may be a solid formed from a union of
other solids, a Primitive Feature Solid, a solid created by adding thickness to a
surface, or from extruding a profile.

For this initial exercise, you will start with a simple design of a square cover plate,
which will start as a Primitive Feature Solid, a slab. To this slab, you will add
features in the form of blends and holes.
Tools for these operations are contained in the Primitive Feature Solids and
Features toolboxes. They are located in the Feature Modeling toolbox, at top left
and third from top on the left, respectively.
 Exercise: Draw the slab
User: untitled
2 Open Feature_create.dgn from the class data set.
3 Open the model 01_Basic Features.
4 Make the Feature Modeling tasks active in the Task Navigation dialog.
5 Select the Slab Feature tool (T + 1) with the following tool setting:
Axis: Design Z
Length and Width: Enabled and set to 100
Height: Enabled and set to 10
6 Enter 3 data points to create a slab in the center of the view.
7 Fit View.
 Exercise: Round the corners and top edge of the slab
1 Continuing in Feature_create.dgn, in the model 01_Basic Features, select
Blend Feature (S + 1), with the following tool settings:
Blend: Edge Constant
Radius: 15
2 Identify one of the vertical edges of the slab with a data point.

Note that the value of the radius appears at the highlighted edge.
3 Use Ctrl data points to identify the remaining three vertical edges.
If you inadvertently select the incorrect edge, reset until the correct edge
highlights.
4 Accept with a data point to view the blends (rounding).
5 Accept again to complete the rounding.
If you had reset instead of accepting, the solid would have returned to its
original state, without the rounding.
Radius: 5
Add Smooth Edges: Enabled
7 Identify the top edge of the slab with a data point.
8 Accept to view the rounding, and again to complete the construction.
You can use the Hole Feature for circular holes. It has options for creating a
Simple, Counterbore, or Countersink hole.
You can set their direction normal to the face or they can align with the x, y, or z
axis of the view, design, or active ACS. Additionally, you can specify whether the
counterbore/countersink end is on the first face, the last face, or both.

When placing holes in a solid, dynamics display to show you how the hole will be
aligned. When the Direction is set to Face Normal, you will see that, as you move
the pointer over the solid, the dynamic hole will align itself with the nearest
surface in the view.
In this exercise you will be placing 4 countersink holes, 1 at the center of the
rounding on each corner. You will temporarily rotate the view to a Top view.
 Exercise: Add hole features to the solid
1 Continuing in Feature_create.dgn, in the model Basic Features, select
Hole Feature (S + 3) with the following tool settings:
Hole Type: Countersink
Drill: Through
Direction: Face Normal
Diameter: 10
Csink End: First Face
Csink Diameter: 12
Csink Angle: 82
2 Identify the solid.
Move the pointer over the solid and note that the hole aligns itself normal
to the nearest face in the view.
3 Using the Center snap mode, snap to the center of the corner arcs and
place holes at each corner arc of the solid.

Modifying Feature-Based Solids
5 Set the Isometric view’s View Display Mode to Smooth.
Modifying Feature‐Based Solids
Solids that you create with the Feature Modeling tools are referred to as feature‐
based, or parametric, solids. You have much more flexibility with these solids, so
you can incorporate design changes. You can modify them using the parameters
used to create them, or you can modify them interactively, similar to 2D
elements.
Modifying features parametrically
Feature‐based solids retain the parameters used to create them. This applies
both to the underlying feature solid, as well as features applied to it. The Modify
Parametric Solid or Feature tool in the Modify Feature toolbox let you quickly edit
the solids and/or features by modifying their parameters.
Modifying one or more blends of a group
If you have created several blend features in a single operation, you can modify
them in a single operation. Alternatively, you can choose to change the radius for
selected blends of the group.
 Exercise: Modify the corner blends
1 Continuing in Feature_create.dgn, and model 02_Modify Features 1.
This model is a completed version of the one you worked on in the
previous exercise.
2 Select Modify Parametric Solid or Feature (Z + 1).

3 Identify any corner blend and accept with a data point (2 data points).
The tool settings show the setting used in the construction of the blend,
with its current value.
4 Change the Start Radius to 25 and click OK.
5 Identify the blend along the top edge of the solid at location 2.
It is easy to add blends to several edges in a single step and you can easily modify
the radius of these blends later. There will be occasions, however, where you are
required to change the radius of only selected blends that were grouped together
during construction. To do this, you need to enable Show all edges after you have
selected 1 of the blends. The blends are numbered, letting you choose the correct
blend(s) to edit.

 Exercise: Modify selected blends of a group
1 Continuing in Feature_create.dgn, open the model 03_Modify Features 2.
2 Select Modify Solid Or Feature (Z + 1).
3 Identify a corner blend and accept with a data point.
Each of the blends that highlights has a number associated with it.
4 In the tool settings, enable Show all edges.
5 In the list box, highlight blends numbered 1 and 2, using Ctrl data points.
Only the selected blends are altered.

Modifying holes
When you create a hole, you have various options to choose from and several
dimensions that you can specify. Similarly, if you want to modify an existing hole
features in a solid, you can edit any of the settings.
Next, you will change 2 of the countersunk holes to be counterbore, plus you will
change the diameters for all of the holes.
 Exercise: Modify the holes
2 Select Modify Solid Or Feature.
3 Identify the hole and accept with a data point.
Hole Type: Counterbore
Diameter: 6
Cbore. Diameter: 10
Cbore. Depth: 2
5 Click OK.

6 Use the same technique to experiment with modifying the remaining
holes to various settings.
Modifying the underlying solid
In the sample solid, the underlying slab feature has had various blends and holes
added to it as features. Next, you will modify the slab itself. To correctly identify
any feature graphically, you must identify an edge of the feature. In this case, the
only remaining visible edges of the slab are along its lower edge, as all the top
edges and corners have been rounded.
 Exercise: Modify the slab
2 Select Modify Parametric Solid Or Feature, with the following tool setting:
Edit Solids About ID Point: Disabled
This causes modifications to be taken about the center of the solid, rather
than about the ID point.
3 Identify the slab and accept with a data point.
4 In the tool settings, change the Length to 60 and click OK.

The holes no longer appear in the solid. You have decreased the length of
the slab such that it is now inside the holes.
While the holes are no longer located on the solid, they still are
remembered.
5 With the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool still active, change both
the Length and the Width to 125.
6 Click OK.
The holes reappear, in their original positions. When you create feature
solids, the parameters used to create the solid are retained in the model.
While the holes were not visible when you reduced the length of the slab,
the information for placing them still was present in the model.

Manipulating Features
You should be familiar with the 2D tools for deleting, moving, copying, mirroring,
and creating arrays of elements. MicroStation’s feature modeling tools have
equivalents to these tools for manipulating features.
As you complete these exercises, don’t forget that you can change the
orientation of the views. The example model has been saved with the Isometric
view open. Typically, this is an easy view to work in because you can see the
design more clearly.
 Exercise: Delete a feature
1 Continuing in Feature_create.dgn, open the model 02_Modify Feature 1.
2 Select Delete Feature.(V).
3 Identify 1 of the countersunk holes and accept to delete it.
 Exercise: Moving and/or copying a feature
1 Continuing in Feature_create.dgn, in the model 02_Modify Feature 1,
select Move Feature (G + 1), with the following tool setting:
Make Copy Disabled
2 With AccuDraw active, identify the remaining countersunk hole.
The compass correctly rotates to the Top view, in line with the surface of
the feature solid.
3 Index to the x‐axis and press Enter for SmartLock.
This restricts movement to the x‐axis only.

4 Snap to the mid‐point of the bottom edge to define the position.
5 Accept to complete the move.
6 Reset to exit the tool.
To copy a feature, you can enable Make Copy and follow the same
procedure.
7 Select Move Feature, with the following tool setting:
Make Copy: Enabled
8 Identify the counter‐bored hole.
9 Using the Center snap, snap to the center of 1 of the empty curved
corners.
10 Accept to complete the copy.

Modifying and Manipulating Interactively
Other tools in the Manipulate Feature toolbox work like their 2D counterparts.
When you make changes to features interactively, the parameters associated
with the feature update automatically. You still can use the parametric settings to
modify the feature afterwards, if required.
To modify interactively, use Element Selection to select a feature with a data
point when you want to modify or move features, or use Ctrl data point when you
want to scale a solid and all its features.
When you select a feature, handles appear on the feature at the identification
point, at the center, and at the modification points. As well as being able to
modify the feature using menu options, you can modify the feature interactively
by clicking on a modifying handle, moving it to a new location and accepting.
 Exercise: Modify the slab interactively
2 Select Element Selection (1).
3 Identify the solid at the mid‐point of a base with a data point.

In this case, the modifying handles are the vertices of the underlying slab
feature. Resetting on any of the handles opens a menu with various
options, including Modify, which lets you modify the feature by its
parameters, just as you can with the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature
tool.
4 Press <T> to rotate the compass to a top view orientation.
This ensures that the pointer remains at the same z value and you are
adjusting only the length and width of the solid.
5 Move the handle back and accept with a data point.

6 Enter a data point away from the solid to clear the selection.
Two of the holes are no longer present in the modified solid.
Hint: Using the handle at the center of a feature lets you move it with a data point or
copy it with a Ctrl data point.
You can also adjust the blend radius, interactively, the solid is regenerated with
the new radius applied to the blend
You can quickly adjust a feature solid, interactively using selection handles.
Similarly, you can scale a feature solid interactively. When you initially select a
solid with a Ctrl data point, handles appear at the scaling points. You then can
scale the solid, and all its features, by clicking on the handle, moving it to a new
location and accepting or, use click and drag. Whether you selected a solid with a
regular data point or a Ctrl data point, you can alternate between the Modify
handles and the Scale handles by clicking on any part of the highlighted solid, not
its features, away from any handles.
You can determine what each handle does by hovering the pointer over it to
display a tool tip. When the modifying handles are active, those that will modify
the solid/feature display the name of the feature plus its parametric values (such
as “Slab Length: 100, Width: 100, Height: 10”, or “Hole Cbore/Csink Diameter: 12,
Diameter 10”.) When the scaling handles are active, the tool tips display the
number of the scale handle (such as “Scale Handle: 3”).

The Features Toolbox
Feature solid tools typically have many options.
Cut Feature tool
Used to place a cut in a feature‐based solid, using 1 of the following as a cutting
profile:
• A profile element in the design, or a parametric profile created with one of
the DD Design tools.
• Surfaces B‐spline surfaces.
• A cell or dimension‐driven cell in the attached cell library, or another instance
of one that is in the active design.
In addition:
• Cutting profiles may be open or closed elements.
• When an open profile does not extend to the edge of the feature‐based solid
it is extended tangentially to its end point, until it intercepts the edge of the
solid.
• Cutting profiles need not be coincident with the feature‐based solid on which
the cut is made.
• To delete cuts, use the Delete Feature tool.
• To edit cuts, use the Modify Parametric Solid or Feature tool, or edit within
the Feature Manager. Editing an existing cut allows you to change the
parameters used to construct it initially.
• You can edit cuts with the Element Selection tool.
• With a dimension‐driven profile, use the Modify Profile tool to modify the
shape of the cut.
 Exercise: Using the Cut Feature tool with Thickness
1 Continuing in Feature_create.dgn, open the model 06_Features 1.
2 Select Cut Feature (S + 5) with the following tool settings:
Cut Method: Inside Profile

Both Directions: Enabled
Through: Blind
Distance: 10
Back Through: Blind
Back Distance: 10
Thickness: ‐75
The negative value makes the thickness apply to the inside of the profile.
4 Identify the rectangular cutting profile.
5 Position the pointer so that the direction arrow for the cut is downward
and accept with a data point, to view the construction.
The cut was created with a thickness (75mm) applied to the inside of the
profile. This caused a 75mm wide cut to be created.
7 Undo and try different Cut Solid tool settings.
8 Edit the cuts with the Element Selection tool.

Sweep Edge Feature tool
In the previous exercise, you could have created the same cut with the Sweep
Edge Feature tool, which lets you define a cutting profile and an edge, or a group
of edges, to use as a reference path.
 Exercise: Using the Sweep Edge Feature tool
This model contains a slab feature and a rectangular profile in place ready
to use. The white dashed line is for reference only, showing where the
cutting profile was in the previous exercise.
2 Select Sweep Edge Feature (S + 7) with the following tool settings:
Mode: Cut
Method: Selected Edge
Thickness: 0
4 Identify the rectangle.
5 Use Ctrl data points to identify the outer top edge of the solid so that they
are all highlighted.
6 Accept to view the construction, and again to complete.

If edges are tangentially continuous, you can enable Add Smooth Edges to include
all connected portions.
 Exercise: Sweep Edge with smooth edges
2 Select Sweep Edge Feature (S + 7) with the following tool setting:
Add Smooth Edges: Enabled
4 Identify the red cutting profile.
5 Identify the top edge of the solid adjacent to the profile.
6 Accept to view the construction and again to complete.
Boss and Protrusion Feature tools
You can add a circular boss or use a profile to add a protrusion.
 Exercise: Creating a circular boss
2 Select Boss Feature (S + 4) with the following tool settings:
Direction: Face Normal
Diameter: 50
Height: 100
Round Radius: 5

4 Move the pointer over the solid and see how the boss is shown normal to
the nearest face over which the pointer is located.
5 Enter data points to place several bosses at different locations.
7 Click the View Display Mode view control and change the display mode to
Smooth.
When adding protrusions, you first construct a profile for the protrusion. Various
options are available to determine how the protrusion is added to the solid. In
the following example, 6 copies of the solid/profile are present to let you
compare various options.
 Exercise: Adding a protrusion
2 Select Protrusion Feature (S + 6) with the following tool settings:
Through: Blind
Distance: 150
Back Through: Blind
Back Distance: 150
3 Identify the top left solid.
4 Identify its rectangular profile.

5 Move the pointer so that the arrow points towards the solid and enter a
data point.
6 Use the remaining solids/profiles to try the other settings, particularly the
options for the Through setting.
Rib Feature tool
Use this to construct a rib between 2 faces of a solid. Tool settings let you choose
how the rib is constructed.
• Normal Axis: Sets the direction of the normal to the rib’s surface. Options are
Points, or Edge/Face Normal. Points lets you define the rib’s normal by data
points, while Edge/Face Normal defines the normal relative to the edge of
face on which the rib is placed.
• Thickness: Sets the rib’s thickness (must be greater than zero).
• Draft Angle: Lets you set a taper, from the root of the rib.
• Top and Base Blend Radii: Lets you define blends at the base and/or the top of
the rib.
After you have placed the rib, you have the option of using the Modify Parametric
Solid or Feature tool to edit its values.
 Exercise: Place a rib feature
2 Select Rib Feature (S + 8) with the following tool settings:
Normal Axis: Edge/Face Normal
Thickness: 10

All other settings: 0
4 Snap to the solid and accept to the mid‐point of the top and bottom edges
at locations 1 and 2.
5 Move the pointer so that the direction arrow points towards the solid, and
accept with a data point to view the rib.
After placing the rib, you can modify it. You will add rounding to its base and top.
 Exercise: Modify the rib feature
1 Continuing in Feature_create.dgn, in the model 11_Features 6, select
Modify Parametric Solid Or Feature (F + 1).
2 Set the following in the Edit Rib dialog set
Top Blend Radius and Base Blend Radius: 5
All other options: Default

3 Click OK to change the rib.
Thin Shell feature
With this tool, you can specify the following.
• Shell Thickness: Default thickness for walls of the solid. Positive values add
material to the outside of the original solid, while negative values remove
material from inside the original solid.
• Face Thickness: Lets you define values for 1 or more walls that differ from the
Shell Thickness. Entering a Wall Thickness of zero removes the face entirely.
In the following exercise, you will shell out the solid and remove the front face.
You will specify that the vertical walls are 5mm (Shell Thickness), while the Top
and Bottom faces will be defined as 2mm and 10mm thick respectively (Face
Thickness).
When you need to identify a face that is behind another in a view, such as the
bottom face in this example, you simply place the pointer over the required
surface and select with a data point, or Ctrl data point, and then reset to highlight
the face behind.

 Exercise: Thin Shelling a solid
2 Select Thin Shell Feature (S + 9) with the following tool settings:
Shell Thickness: 5
Face Thickness: 2
4 Select the top face at location 1 with a data point.
The face highlights and the face thickness (2.00) value displays.
Face Thickness: 10
6 Select the bottom face at location 2 with a Ctrl data point.
The face nearest you in the view highlights, with the Face Thickness value
(10.00) displayed.
Face Thickness: 0
8 Select the front face at location 3 with a Ctrl data point.
9 Enter a data point to view the construction, then another to accept.

Modeling Methods
Smooth.
Smooth rendered view of the thin‐shelled solid, showing the difference in thicknesses
between the wall thickness and the thickness of the Top and Bottom faces
Modeling Methods
In many cases, a particular operation can be accomplished in a number of ways.
One thing you should consider when modeling is how different elements will
react if you need to modify parts of the solid.
You will examine an example that uses protrusions and bosses. Both of these
features could be constructed with other tools, such as Extrude Feature, and then
a boolean Union Feature. The following exercise will show what can happen
when you modify solids that have other features applied to them.
 Exercise: Effect of modifying a solid
This simple solid consists of a slab feature to which various features have
been added:
On the left are 2 red features, a round feature consisting of a cylinder
joined to the slab with a boolean union, and then a blend applied at the

Modeling Methods
joining edge. The rectangular (red) feature is an extrusion that has been
joined to the slab with a boolean union.
On the right are 2 green features, a boss feature and a protrusion feature.
Reduce the height of the slab and see what happens.
2 Select Modify Parametric Solid Or Feature with the following tool setting:
Edit Solids About ID Point: Enabled
You want the slab to be modified relative to the bottom face.
3 Identify the slab at one of its lower edges and accept with a data point.
4 Change the Height to 5.
5 Click OK.
6 Use the Front View and Right View viewing tools to inspect the solid.
The 2 red features no longer are connected to the slab. Still they are part
of the overall solid, but they have not retained contact with the surface of
the slab. Because these features were created as separate items, a
cylinder and an extrusion, they retain the values used to create them in
the first place.
Both the green features have maintained contact with the slab feature.
The boss is a feature that is applied to a face of a solid, so it moves with
the face. The protrusion was created to extend to the face of the solid, so
if the face moves, the protrusion is adjusted to maintain contact.

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 When working with feature‐based solids, what setting determines the
largest single feature‐based solid that can be created in a model?
2 What can you do if you inadvertently select an edge or face that is
undesired?
3 Name 2 ways to modify a feature‐based solid.
4 What operations can you perform using handle at the center of a feature
when modifying?
5 What is the first thing you do when adding protrusions?
Answers
1 The Solids setting in the Working Areas section of the DGN File Settings
dialog’s Advanced Unit Settings dialog (Settings > Design File, Working
Units category) determines the largest single feature‐based solid that can
be created in a model.
2 Reset until the desired one is selected.
3 You can modify them using the parameters used to create them, or you
can modify them interactively, similar to 2D elements.
4 Move it with a data point or copy it with a Ctrl data point.
5 Construct a profile for the protrusion.

Advanced Feature Modeling
Module Overview
When you modify the size of a solid that contains holes, the position of the holes
remains static. If you adjust the size so that the solid does not encompass the area
in which the holes are located, they disappear. You could move the holes prior to
adjusting the underlying solid, but it is much better if this type of procedure is
automated.
• Basic knowledge of Feature Modeling
Module Objectives
• Use Dimension Driven Design
• Use advanced functions of Feature Modeling
Feb-09 277 Advanced Feature Modeling

Questions
1 When working with feature‐based solids, what setting determines the
largest single feature‐based solid that can be created in a model?
Answers
1 When working with feature‐based solids, the Solids setting in the Working
Areas section of the DGN File Settings dialog’s Advanced Unit Settings
dialog (Settings > Design File, Working Units category) determines the
largest single feature‐based solid that can be created in a model.
can modify them interactively (with handles), similar to 2D elements.
Dimension Driven Design
Dimension Driven Design or DDD is the ability to use a predefined geometrically‐
constrained profile to spawn many other designs. Dimension‐driven design (DDD)
is the process by which elements are drawn with respect to previously
determined dimensions, and/or relationships between dimensions.
You may have a rectangular element in which you want the width to always be
half the length. You can create a dimension‐driven cell, with this constraint
defined. When you place the cell, you need only define the length and the width
is determined from the constraint formula. Similarly, when you use the DDD tools
to modify the length, the width also is modified to maintain the relationship
Advanced Feature Modeling 278 Feb-09

The Purpose of Dimension‐Driven Design
Very often you find yourself recreating a drawing feature with only slightly
different dimensions than the last time you created it. You may even reproduce it
more than once at different dimensions, depending on other elements in the
design. To save time in this situation, MicroStation provides a form of variational
geometry called Dimension‐Driven Design.
Based on constraints defined in the profile structure, MicroStation can
automatically update this kind of design to fit dimensional changes initiated by
the designer. In this way, designers can create whole families of parts (2D or 3D)
from 1 basic profile. This eliminates the duplication associated with traditional
techniques.
One profile can create a family of parts by modifying the right dimensions
How does it work?
Traditionally, the elements you draw in MicroStation are dimensionally controlled
by attributes of the element itself. Dimensions are associated to the element.
However, you can associate elements to dimensions.
By changing a dimension value (text) the element is adjusted to maintain its
relationship to the updated dimension value. Dimensions can even have
relationships to other dimensions using equations or algorithms. You can store
these dimensions and their associated elements as cells to be used over and over

again. Each time you use this cell or profile you can create a new design by simply
changing the dimensional values within it.
It is important to understand the terms and concepts associated with the
dimension‐driven design process.
Glossary of terms
• Constraint ‐ a piece of information that limits or controls a construction. This
can be a Geometric (parallel, perpendicular, etc.), Locational (intersection,
midpoint, etc.), Dimensional (2", 4.525"), or Algebraic (h=w*2) control.
• Construction ‐ an element (point, line, circle, ellipse, or B‐Spline curve) that
lets constraints locate, delimit or arrange other elements. For example, a
construction line can be the center line of a symmetric design. Constructions
carry the class attribute by the same name and can be toggled using the
Constructions view attribute.

• Under‐constrained ‐ a condition that describes a set of constructions that is
not completely defined by constraints. An under‐constrained construction has
many possible “solutions” and is usually unacceptably ambiguous.
• Well‐constrained ‐ a condition that describes a set of constructions that is
completely defined by constraints or is constant and has no redundant
constraints. This is the desired condition when creating profiles as it leaves no
ambiguous movement within the set of constructions.
• Over‐constrained ‐ a non desirable condition that describes a set of
constructions that has 1 or more redundant constraints. A redundant
constraint may or may not be inconsistent with other constraints, but in either
case, it adds no useful information.
• Degrees of freedom ‐ the number of movements left unconstrained in a
profile and is usually referred to as DOF.
• Solve ‐ to analyze the existing constraints, recalculate any constraint changes,
and rebuild the profile using the new values. As a result of re‐solving
constraints, degrees of freedom are recalculated and displayed for reference.
The process is as follows:
1. Draw graphics to represent the profile using the dimensions that are most
likely to be final.
2. Convert the graphics to a constrained profile using the Convert Element to
Profile tool or Constrain Elements tool.
3. Add any necessary dimensions and equations to fully constrain the profile.
4. Re‐solve the profile to check for DOF.
5. If DOF is not equal to zero then add or modify the Geometric and/or
Locational constraints.
6. If DOF equals zero then add to cell library as a dimension driven cell.
Dimension Driven Design task
The DD Design task contains tools for creating and modifying dimension‐driven
profiles and cells plus dimensioning tools.

Each tool is the top tool in a sub task.
Profile
Parameter Constraints
Attach Element
Geometric Constraints
Evaluate Constraints
Modify Constraints
Your ability to create useful and predictable dimension‐driven profiles will largely
be determined by your understanding of constraint geometry. Since constraints
are so fundamental to success, you’ll focus on the types of constraints, adding
constraints, and Degrees of Freedom (DOF).
Geometric constraints
A Geometric constraint establishes some relationship between drawing elements.
This might be a specific angle, or perpendicularity between 2 lines, a tangent
relationship between 2 circles, or it might fix an intersection between 2 lines.
When a Geometric constraint is applied, MicroStation places a symbol

representing the constraint graphically. The size of these symbols is controlled by
the active text style size.
The most useful tool is the first, Constrain Element. It is used to apply tangent,
perpendicular, parallel, or fix angle constraints to profile geometry. The tool
settings are:
• Method: Sets the method by which to constrain profile geometry.
Smart Constrain Elements — Constrains constructions tangent, perpendicular,
or parallel, or by fixing the angle, depending upon the identified element(s)
and the number of data points. This Method is recommended unless you need
to override or force constraints.
Constrain Two Constructions to be Tangent — Constrains 2 constructions (2
circles, 2 ellipses, a circle or ellipse and a line) to be tangent at as many points
as their geometry makes possible.
Constrain Two Lines to be Perpendicular — Constrains 2 lines (or the primary
axes of 2 ellipses) to be at a right angle (90°) to one another.
Constrain Two Lines to be Parallel — Constrains 2 lines (or the primary axes of
2 ellipses) to the same rotation angle.
Fix Angle of Line or Ellipse — Constrains a line's orientation or an ellipse's
rotation angle.
• Fix Angle Snap Tolerance: (Method set to Smart Constrain Elements only) Sets
the tolerance for constraining a line or the primary axes of an ellipse (that is
on an angle) to the closest view axis (x‐ or y‐).
Used in conjunction with the Smart Constrain Elements method, this setting
forces individually selected elements to be constrained to the view x‐ or y‐axis
if the current position of the element is within the tolerance value from a
vertical or horizontal position.
For example, if Fix Angle Snap Tolerance is 10° and a single line drawn at 45° is
identified, the line is fixed at 45°. If the line was placed at a 5° slope off the
view x‐axis, the line is forced to be horizontal.
This setting also forces multiple elements to be constrained parallel,
perpendicular, or tangent with one another along the view x‐ and y‐ axes if the
current position of the elements are within the tolerance value from a vertical
or horizontal position.

• Angle Lock: (Method set to Fix Angle of Line or Ellipse only) Constrains a line
or the primary axes of an ellipse by the following options.
None — Geometry is constrained at the angle it was created.
Horizontal — Geometry is constrained to the view x‐axis.
Vertical — Geometry is constrained to the view y‐axis
SettingsToggles the display of the Convert to Constructions and Join Ends at
Junctions check boxes.
• Convert to Constructions: Converts primary elements to construction
elements.
• Join Ends at Junctions: Extends primary elements to intersection.
In the following exercise you will take a MicroStation block element that has
associated dimensions placed, and convert it to a dimension driven profile. You
can create profiles directly in cell library files.
Variable names may have up to 32 characters, with no embedded blanks. They are
case sensitive and must begin with a letter, followed by letters, numbers, or
underscores
 Exercise: Basic Dimension Driven Design
User: untitled
2 Open Feature_advanced.dgn.
3 Open the model 01_DDD Constraint 1.
4 Make the Feature Based Solids Modeling tasks active in the Task
Navigation dialog.
5 Select Constrain Elements (W + 2 + 1) with the following tool settings:
Method: Constrain Two Lines to be Perpendicular
Join Ends at Junctions: Enabled

6 Select the top edge of the block and then the left edge.
A perpendicular constraint appears.
7 Using the same tool settings, select the left edge and the bottom edge.
8 Select the right edge and the bottom edge.
Three perpendicular constraints for the block.
9 Select Tools > Parametrics > DD Design > Parameter Constraints > Convert
Dimension to Constraint and select the top dimension.
10 In the parameter dialog, type the name Length.
11 Convert the vertical dimension and name it Height.
12 Select Modify Constraint (W + 3+ 2) and select one of the dimensions.

Constraints and Feature Modeling
13 Edit the value of the dimension in the tool settings.
Note: Additional DDD examples are in the DDD Extra models.
In many cases, features such as holes must retain a particular relationship to an
edge, or a vertex, of a solid. You apply constraints to 4 countersunk holes to force
them to stay concentric with the corner blend of an underlying slab feature. With
the constraints in place, any changes you make to the size of the underlying slab,
or to the radii of the corner blends, will result in a repositioning of the holes to
maintain their constraint values.
Constrain Feature
Used to parametrically locate features within a solid, and to modify previously
established constraints settings.
Features that can be constrained include holes, bosses, cuts, and protrusions. In
the case of cuts, you can constrain the depth of the cut, as well as its location on
the face of the solid. Profile features (cuts and protrusions), holes, bosses, and
ribs can be constrained to edges, vertices, and faces of a solid.
Features can be located relative to vertices on the solid, another (previously
placed) feature on the solid, or an edge, plane, or line.

When locating a feature relative to another feature, the direction of the x, y, and z
axes of the coordinate system that appears is relative to the direction that the
original solid was created.
Tool Setting Effect
Add New Adds a constraint
Constraints
Modify Existing Edit existing constraint
Constraints
Type of Distance ‐ Lets you locate a feature, or a Dimension Driven profile at a specified
Constraint distance from another feature. Distances may be set between:
• parallel edges
• edge and a vertex
• vertex and edge
• holes, bosses, ribs
• other combinations of these entities and features.
Edges must be parallel, otherwise they cannot be selected. If the edges are not
parallel, they must first be constrained with the Parallel constraint.
Angle Lets you specify an angle between linear elements of a profile feature and
another feature.
Angles are in degrees.
Concentric makes 2 point‐like entities concentric. This works on vertices of a profile
as well as on holes and bosses.
Perpendicular makes 2 edges perpendicular.
Parallel makes 2 linear edges parallel.
Plane Distance lets you constrain the plane of a profile or hole/boss to be parallel
to and at a distance from a planar face on the solid.
Plane Angle constrains the plane normal to a profile, hole, boss to be at an angle
from the other specified plane.
Feature‐Feature places this feature the specified X, Y, and Z distance from the
specified feature location.
Distance Lets you define the distance of the constraint
Angle Lets you define the angle of the constraint
X Delta, YDelta, Z Feature‐Feature only. Lets you define the distance change in x‐, y‐ and z.
Delta

Tool Setting Effect
Equation Icon Distance and Angle settings only. Located adjacent to the Distance or Angle setting
and is enabled prior to accepting the value. Opens a dialog that optionally lets you
define each setting with variables. For more information, see Variable Driven
Modeling and Constraints.
Treat DD profiles If on, dimension driven profiles are treated as rigid profiles, and their dimensions
as Rigid may not be modified to change the shape of the profile and the generated solid.
If off, dimension driven profiles may be modified to change their shape, and that of
the generated solid.
 Exercise: Add concentric constraints
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, open the model 02_Constraint 1.
2 From the Manipulate Feature toolbox, select Constrain Feature (G + 5).
3 Make sure Add New Constraints icon is enabled.
The Add New Constraints tool has a number of options that you set using
icons.
4 In the tool settings, click the Concentric icon.
5 Identify the hole in the lower center.
6 Identify the arc of the corner rounding at location 2.
A concentric constraint graphic appears at the center of the arc, showing
the point to which the center of the hole will be placed.
7 Accept to view the new position of the hole.

8 Accept to complete the operation.
9 Repeat the previous steps for the 3 remaining holes, constraining them to
be concentric with the rounding on the 3 remaining corners of the solid.
When holes are constrained, whenever you make a change to the solid that
causes the center of the corner rounding to move, the hole will move also.
 Exercise: Modifying a solid with constrained features
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, open the model 03_Constraint 2.
This is a completed version of the model from the previous exercise.
2 Select Modify Parametric Solid Or Feature (Z + 1).
3 Identify the rounding on the corners at location one and accept with a
data point.
The Edit Edge Blend dialog appears, with the current settings for the
selected blend feature.

4 Change the Start Radius value to 25 and click OK.
All of the holes have shifted slightly to maintain the concentric constraint
with the edge rounding.
5 Identify the solid at location 2 and accept with a data point.
The Edit Slab dialog appears, with the current values for the slab.
6 Change the Length value to 75 and click OK.
The holes shift to maintain their constrained position.
After modifying the solid, the holes still maintain their concentric position relative
to the rounding on the corners, due to the concentric constraint.

The Feature Manager
The Feature Manager
This tool lets you inspect the structure of any feature solids using a feature tree. It
also lets you perform various manipulations of the features. In the Feature
Manager dialog, all features of a solid are displayed as branches on a tree view, in
the order in which they were added to the solid. You can:
• Identify features
• Analyze features
• Modify features
• Suppress features
• Temporarily suppress the display of features
• Re‐order features in the feature tree
The dialog can be opened from the Feature Modeling Primary toolbox and can be
docked to the left or right of the screen. The dialog can also be opened from the
menu bar Element > Feature Modeling > Feature Manager.
Working with Feature Manager
You can display a feature tree of a selected solid and identify, analyze, modify,
suppress, or re‐order features in the feature tree. You can discover how a solid
was created and you can display the solid at any stage in its construction.
Use Feature Manager when an underlying feature has none of its edges showing
and you cannot identify it graphically. This can happen, for example, if a slab has
all its edges rounded with blends. In these instances, use Feature Manager to
identify the underlying slab feature for manipulation or modification. When you
select a solid or one of its features in Feature Manager, the selected item is
highlighted in the model view(s).
 Exercise: Open Feature Manager
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, open the model 04_Feature
Manager 1.
2 Select menu item Element > Feature Modeling > Feature Manager.
You can dock both the toolbox and the Feature Manager dialog.
3 Identify the solid to view its feature tree.

The Feature Manager
4 Left click on various items in the feature tree and note that the selected
feature highlights in the view.
Viewing a solid at various construction stages
Often, feature solids consist of 1 or more underlying solids to which various
features have been added. Using Feature Manager, you can roll back the display of
the solid to its state at a particular feature, using the Display Geometry at Feature
command. This is a temporary display only, and a data point returns the display to
the current state of the feature solid.
 Exercise: View the solid at various stages of its construction
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, in the model 04_Feature Manager 1,
right click on the entry Union Solids (6) in the Feature Manager dialog.
2 In the menu that opens, select Display > Geometry At Feature.
3 Enter a data point to cancel the display.
4 Repeat for other features in the feature tree.
Controlling the display of features
Sometimes you may want to look at a simplified version of a design without some
of the finishing touches (features) displayed. This may be to help in making
adjustments to the underlying solids. Feature Manager lets you toggle the display
of selected features. You can select to suppress display of features as follows.
• By Instance: Suppresses only the selected feature.
• By Type: Suppresses all of selected type within specified dimension range.

The Feature Manager
• All Above Feature: All features above the selected feature in the feature tree.
When features are suppressed, they appear grayed out in the feature tree.
 Exercise: Suppressing features
select the left countersunk hole in the view (Hole (8)).
The feature highlights in the Feature Manager dialog.
2 Right click on the highlighted feature in the Feature Manager dialog and
select Suppress Feature > By Instance.
The hole disappears from the solid in the view and its entry in the feature
tree is greyed out.
3 Right click on the grayed out feature in the feature tree and again select
Suppress Feature > By Instance to cancel the suppression.
4 Right click on any of the hole features in the feature tree and select
Suppress Feature > By Type.
5 In the Feature Type Suppression dialog, set the following:
Suppress Feature Type: Enabled
Compare Using: Greater Than
Hole Diameter: 0
6 Click OK.
The countersunk holes disappear from view, as do the hinge pin holes. You
instructed the system to suppress display of all holes with a diameter
greater than zero. In other words, every hole.

The Feature Manager
Once you have seen whatever was required, you can simply disable the
suppression of the features, so that they again display in the solid.
7 In the feature tree, right click on any of the grayed out hole features and
select Suppress Feature > By Type.
8 Disable Suppress Feature Type in the dialog and click OK.
You can suppress all features above a selected feature. This can be useful in
working with underlying solids.
 Exercise: Suppressing features above a selected feature
in the feature tree, right click on Union Solids (6), and select Suppress
Feature > All Above Feature.
All features above the selected one are grayed out and they have
disappeared from the solid in the view.
2 To remove the suppression, right click on the topmost feature in the
feature tree, Edge Blend (14), and select Suppress Feature > All Above
Feature.
Rearranging feature order
As you add features to a solid, they appear at the top of the feature tree. Typically,
features only know about those features that are below them in the tree. If this
causes a problem with an operation you can rearrange features in the feature
tree.

The Feature Manager
 Exercise: Inspect the feature trees for both solids
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, open the model 05_Feature
Manager 2.
In this example, both solids look identical. They were created from a union
of 2 slabs, with a through hole and several blends. When the features are
inspected, however, you will see that there are differences.
2 Select the Feature Manager menu item (Element > Feature Modeling >
Feature Manager).
3 Identify the countersunk hole in the yellow solid (on the left).
The hole feature, Hole (3), is located above Slab (2), but lower than the
Union of the slabs, Union Solids (4). In other words, it only knows about
Slab (2), the slab in which it was placed originally.
4 Identify the countersunk hole in the green solid (on the right).
This time that the hole feature, Hole (4), is located above the Union of the
slabs, Union Solids (3). In other words, in this solid it knows about both
slabs below it in the feature tree.
In these solids, the difference is because in the yellow solid the hole was placed in
1 of the underlying slabs prior to the creation of the union. In the green solid, the
hole was placed after the 2 slabs had been merged into 1. Wherever you move
the hole in the left solid, it will only ever pass through the top part of the solid
(the first slab), while moving the hole in the green solid will always result in the
hole passing through both of the original slabs.
 Exercise: Move the hole in both solids
select the Move Feature tool with the following tool setting:
Make Copy: Disabled

The Feature Manager
2 In the yellow solid, identify the hole.
3 Using AccuDraw, move the hole ‐100mm along the x‐axis (to the left).
Even though the hole is a through hole, it still only penetrates the height
of the top slab of the union.
4 Repeat for the hole in the green solid.
This hole penetrates through both slabs of the union.
The hole in the solid on the left penetrates only the first slab, while that in the
solid on the right penetrates both slabs of the union
Assuming that you really want the hole to pass through the entire solid, you can
fix the problem by deleting the hole and recreating it, or you can simply move it
up higher in the feature tree. In this case, you want to move the hole feature to a
position above the Union Solids (4) feature.
 Exercise: Move the feature in the feature tree
select the Feature Manager tool.
2 Identify the short hole in the yellow solid.

Variable Driven Modeling
3 In the Feature Manager dialog, right click on the highlighted feature and
select Re‐order Tree > Mark For Move.
The feature to be moved highlights.
4 Right click on the Union Solids (4) feature and select Re‐order Tree > Insert
Marked Above.
The Hole (3) feature now is above the Union Solids (4) feature in the
feature tree. In the view, the hole passes through the entire solid.
MicroStation's Variable Driven Modeling (VDM) tools let you assign variables or
equations to the parameters of solids and features contained in your models.
Variables may contain simple values, or equations that define a value. Equations
also may include previously defined variables.
Many of the settings for features have an equation icon, signifying that you can
assign a variable, or an equation, to the particular setting.
Equation icon

Working in conjunction with the variable driven modeling tools, the Constrain
Feature tool lets you constrain a feature of a solid with variables.
While each dimension for a feature can be edited individually, other options let
you use variables to define dimensions, such that editing a single variable can
propagate changes to all solids in the model that use that variable.
By default, each feature is given local variables to define its various parameters.
As well, you can create your own global variables, which you may assign to the
parameters of a feature.
Taking this further, you can use equations to link dimensions, or variables. For
example, you may want the width of a slab to be 1 meter plus one‐fifth of its
length, and the Height to be one‐third of the Width. By assigning the appropriate
equations to the Width and Height dimensions, only the Length parameter would
be available for manual editing, with the remaining 2 dimensions automatically
updated as per the equations.
Variables can be divided into 2 categories:
• Global — created manually and available to all solids in the model.
• Local — created by MicroStation automatically, for all feature parameters of a
solid, and available for that solid (only).
Variables can be defined as individual values, or they can be defined by equations,
which in turn may contain previously defined variables. Equations can include
trigonometric and algebraic expressions, giving you a full range of options.
The general process is as follows.
1. Create the variable in the Global Variables dialog.
2. Assign it through the equation icon of a tool.
3. Edit value in Global Variables dialog.
 Exercise: Using Global Variables
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, open the model 06_Global
Variables.
2 Select Element > Feature Modeling > Variables.
There are variables defined in this model for the slab and the thin shell.

3 Click New in the Global Variables dialog and name the new variable:
hole_dia.
4 Set the default value of hole_dia to 1 and save it.
5 In the Feature Manager, right click on the Hole feature and select Modify.
6 In the Edit Hole dialog click on the Equations icon next to Diameter and
select hole_dia as the variable.
7 Click OK.
8 In the Global Variables dialog change the value of hole_dia from 1 to 2 and
click Apply.

Profile-Driven Feature Solids
Feature modeling examples
The Plant Examples data set includes several files with Feature modeling. These
are found in \Document and settings\All Users\Application
Data\Bentley\Workspace\Projects\Examples\Plant\Cell\
• StructShapes.cel
• Ladder.cel
• Equipmentprofiles.cel
• HardwareParts.cel
Profile‐Driven Feature Solids
Feature modeling tools let you create feature solids from profile elements in a
variety of ways. Methods include:
• Extruding or revolving a closed profile element
• Extruding a closed profile along a path element
• Using the Skin Solid Feature tool to create a solid from 2 or more profile
elements
When you create a feature‐based solid from a profile element, you have the
option of later modifying or replacing the profile element to change the shape of
the solid. You can do this using the Modify Profile tool, or you can work with the
profile interactively after selecting the solid with Element Selection. If the profile
is a fully‐dimensioned dimension driven design (DDD) profile, you have the ability
to edit its dimensions. Additionally, you have the editing functions available using
the Modify Parametric Solid Or Feature tool. This can be used to edit the value of
the extruded distance for extruded solids, or for changing and specifying a
thickness for hollow extrusions.

Creating profile‐driven feature solids
Tools for creating profile‐driven feature solids are located in the Profile Feature
Solids toolbox. Feature‐based solids can be edited after placement. This is true
even if they have been merged with other feature solids.
Extruded and Revolved features
Like other feature solids, the solids created with the Extrude Feature and Revolve
Feature tools are editable.
 Exercise: Create an extruded feature
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, open the model 07_Profiles 1.
2 Select Extrude Feature (A + 1) with the following tool settings:
Distance: 200
All other settings: Disabled and other values 0
3 Identify the profile on the left, in the view.
4 Move the pointer to the right to define the direction, and accept with a
data point.
 Exercise: Create a revolved feature
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, in the model 07_Profiles 1, select
Revolve Feature with the following tool settings:
Revolve Axis: Vertical

Angle: Enabled and set to 180
Radius: Enabled and set to 50
All other settings: Disabled and other values 0
2 Identify the profile on the right, at location 1.
3 Move the pointer to the left and accept with a data point.
4 Move the pointer upward to define the direction of rotation and accept
with a data point.
When the solid that you want to create should be hollow, specify a wall thickness
for the extrusion. When defining the Thickness setting, a positive figure adds
thickness outside the profile shape, while a negative figure adds thickness inside
the profile shape.
 Exercise: Create hollow extrusions/revolutions
2 Create an extrusion and a revolved solid as before, but with the Thickness
setting at 3mm.
The solids are hollow, with walls at the specified thickness this time.

Smooth.
Use the view rotation tools in the toolbox to select standard views, and the Rotate
View view control to interactively rotate the view to inspect the solids.
Tube Feature
The Tube Feature tool lets you extrude a profile along a path element. The profile
can be an existing element or cell.
 Exercise: Creating tube features
2 Select Tube Feature (A + 3), with the following tool setting:
Thickness: 0
3 Identify the yellow ellipse path element on the right.
4 Identify the orange profile element attached to the path element.
6 Set Thickness to 5.
7 Identify the red path element on the left.
8 Identify the green profile element.

Skin Solid Feature
Used to construct a solid, or surface, using 2 or more section profiles to define the
shape. Once the solid has been created, you can use the Move Feature tool to
move any of the section profiles to reshape the solid. You can modify the shape of
1 or more profiles again to change the shape of the solid.
Where more than 2 profiles are used in the construction, use Ctrl data points to
select the profiles, or you can use Element Selection or Power Selector to select
the profiles.
 Exercise: Create a Skin Solid Feature
2 Select Skin Solid Feature (A + 4), with the following tool setting:
Thickness: 10
3 Select Element Selection (1), with the following tool settings:
Method: Line
Mode: Add
4 Draw a line through the 5 profiles, so that they all highlight.
5 Select Skin Solid Feature.

Helix Feature
Using this tool, you can create a helical‐shaped feature solid, by sweeping a
selected profile element or cell along a helical curve. Tool settings let you define
the height, radius, and pitch. You can define a right or left thread and whether or
not the pitch is variable. The amount of variation in the pitch is determined by the
radius of the helix.
 Exercise: Create a helix feature
This model shows a Front view of a ramp profile.
2 Select Helix Feature (A + 5), with the following tool settings:
Thread: Right
Pitch: Constant
Height: 4
Top and Bottom Radius: 5
Helical Pitch: 4
3 Identify the profile at its left edge.
4 Move the pointer to the left and, with it indexed to AccuDraw’s x‐axis,
enter a data point to define the direction of the bottom radius.
5 Move the pointer upward and enter a data point to define the height.
6 Enter a data point to accept the top radius.

7 Accept again to complete the construction.
8 Rotate the view to see the result.
Thicken Feature
This tool adds thickness to a surface to create a solid. The Thickness setting lets
you define the amount of the thickening. The Apply To setting lets you define
which side of the surface that the thickening is placed.
• Side One: The side from which the surface normals point outward. You can
use the Change Normal Direction tool in the Modify Surfaces toolbox to check
or change surface normals direction.
• Side Two: The reverse side to side 1.
• Both Sides: Thickening is applied to both sides of the surface.
When you apply thickening to a surface, it becomes a feature solid.
 Exercise: Add thickness to a surface
2 Select the Thicken Feature tool with the following tool settings.
Apply To: Both Sides
Thickness: 5
3 Identify the surface.

4 Accept to add the thickening.
Modifying profile‐driven feature solids
Next, you will use the Modify Profile tool to change the shape of a profile used to
generate a solid. You will see that this updates the solid to conform to the new
shape of the profile. When modifying profiles, you can use the Modify Profile tool
or you can make the modification interactively.
 Exercise: Modify the profile of the extruded feature solid
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, open the model 13_Profiles Modify
1.
2 Select Modify Profile (Z + 2) with the following tool settings,
Extract Profile
Interactive Positioning: Disabled
3 Identify the extruded feature and accept with a data point.
The profile displays, and the solid is temporarily converted to a
construction class element. If Constructions are on, the solid appears as
dashed lines.
4 Open the View Attributes dialog and toggle Constructions to disable
display of construction elements.

5 Select Modify Element (7 + 1) to thicken the vertical leg of the profile
50mm to the left, and the right side of the horizontal leg downward by
50mm.
6 Open the View Attributes dialog and toggle Constructions to display the
extruded solid.
7 Select Modify Profile, which now defaults to Replace Profile in the tool
settings.
8 Identify the feature (shown dashed).
9 Identify the modified profile (shown solid).
10 Accept to complete the modification.

The solid is regenerated to reflect the shape of the modified profile.
When you want to modify the distance of an extrusion, you can use the Modify
Parametric Solid Or Feature tool.
 Exercise: Modify the extrusion distance of a feature solid
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, in the model 13_Profiles Modify 1,
select the Modify Parametric Solid Or Feature tool.
2 Identify the solid and accept with a data point to open the Edit Extrusion
dialog.
3 Change the Distance to 300 and click OK.
Similarly, if you wanted to change the extrusion from solid to hollow, you could
use the Modify Parametric Solid Or Feature tool to add a thickness value to the
walls of the extrusion.
You can change the shape of the profile and other settings, such as the distance of
the extrusion with this method.
 Exercise: Interactively modify the solid
2.
2 Use Element Selection (1) to select the extruded solid.
Handles appear at the ID point and at each vertex of the profile shape.
They are also at the beginning and end points defining the distance of the
extrusion. At the moving handle, a graphic indicates the x, y, and z
directions of the extrusion.
3 With the Element Selection tool still active, use Ctrl data points to select
the 2 handles at locations 1 and 2.

When selected, the handles change color from blue to yellow.
4 With AccuDraw active, click on either of the highlighted handles and use
AccuDraw to move them 50mm to the left.
5 With the Element Selection tool still active and the solid still highlighted,
use Ctrl data points to select the 2 handles at locations 3 and 4.
6 Click on either highlighted handle and use AccuDraw to move them 50mm
downwards.
7 Still with the Element Selection tool active and the solid highlighted, click
on the extrusion handle at location 5.
The AccuDraw compass is positioned back at the plane of the profile and
only movement in the extrusion direction is allowed. This lets you use
AccuDraw to define a new distance.
8 In AccuDraw’s x field, type 300 and accept with a data point.
9 Enter a data point away from the solid to complete the modifications.
If a solid has been created by extruding a profile along a path, not only can you
modify the profile, you can use the same techniques to modify the path element.
 Exercise: Modifying a path element
3.
2 Open the View Attributes dialog and toggle display of Construction
elements on.
These are the path element and the profile used to construct the solid.
3 Use Element Selection to select the path element at location 1.
4 Select the handle at location 2.
5 Move the handle to modify the path element and enter a data point.

6 The solid updates to reflect the new shape of the path element.
As you can see, feature‐based solids are easy to modify, either with
specific tools or interactively.
You have modified an existing profile. Another option is to replace the existing
profile with a new one.
Note: When viewing solids created from profiles, if you turn on construction elements
in a view, the profiles are displayed as a dashed line.
 Exercise: Replace the profile for an extrusion
4.
elements on.
This model contains a solid created from a profile that was extruded along
a path element. Both these elements are represented by the dashed lines
in the view. You will replace the existing profile with the red profile.
3 Select Modify Profile (Z + 2), with the following tool setting:
Replace Profile
4 Identify the existing profile at location 1.
5 Identify the new (red) profile at location 2.

6 Accept to make the replacement.
If a solid has been created from multiple profiles, such as with the Skin Solid
Feature tool, you can modify or move any of the profiles to edit the feature solid.
 Exercise: Modify individual profiles
5.
elements on.
The original profiles display as dashed lines.
3 Use Element Selection to select the center profile of the solid.
4 Select the move handle (Handle with arrows) for the profile.
This is at the center of the graphics indicating the x, y, and z axes of the
profile.
5 Use AccuDraw to move this profile ‐50mm along the x‐axis (to the right in
the view.)

Similarly, you can move or modify any of the profiles used to create the feature
solid.
When a dimension driven (DD) cell is used as the profile you can edit the values
assigned to the DD cell using the Modify Profile tool.
 Exercise: Modifying a DD cell profile
6.
2 Select Modify Profile (Z + 2), with the following tool setting:
Modify DD Profile Parameters
3 Identify the solid and accept with a data point.
The Modify Profile dialog appears, displaying the cell in a preview window
and containing a list box with the parameters for the DD cell used as a
profile.
4 Select Parameter T1 in the list box.
5 In the input field below the list box, change the value from 20 to 50, then
enter a data point in the preview window to effect the change.
6 Repeat for the T2 parameter, changing its value to 50.

Modifying Face Features
7 Click OK, to close the dialog and update the solid.
Often you are required to make modifications to a design. The Modify Face
Features toolbox contains tools for manipulating and modifying faces of a solid.
Taper Face Feature
This tool lets you add a taper, or draft, to 1 or more faces of a solid. Tapers are
constructed relative to the position of the identification point of the solid. Tool
settings let you specify the following.
• Draft Direction: Sets the direction of the taper on the face relative to the
Screen, Design, or ACS X, Y, or Z direction.
• Draft Angle: Sets the angle of the taper, relative to the Draft Direction. Angles
may be positive to taper inwards, or negative to taper outward, from the start
point.
• Add Smooth Faces: If on, faces that are connected tangentially to the selected
face also are tapered.
 Exercise: Tapering face(s) of a solid
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, open the model 19_Modify Faces 1.
2 Select the Taper Face Feature tool (F + 1), with the following tool settings:
Direction: Design Z
Draft Angle: 5
Add Smooth Faces: Disabled
3 Identify the (left) solid at location 1.
This determines the point from which the taper will be applied.
4 Identify the face to taper at location 2.
5 Accept to view the taper, and again to complete the construction.
When you enable Add Smooth Faces, all faces that are connected
tangentially to the selected face will be included in the taper.
6 In the tool settings, enable Add Smooth Faces.

7 Identify the (right) solid at location 3.
8 Identify the face to taper at location 4.
9 Accept to view the taper, and again to complete the construction.
You can adjust the taper with the Modify Solid or Feature tool. You will increase
the taper to 10 degrees.
 Exercise: Modify the taper
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, in the model 19_Modify Faces 1,
select Modify Parametric Solid Or Feature (F + 1).
2 Identify the (left) solid at location 1, to highlight the tapered face.
3 Accept to open the Edit Taper dialog.
4 Change the Draft Angle setting to 10.
5 Click OK.
6 Repeat for the remaining solid.
Extend Face Feature
This tool gives you a range of options for extending a face of a solid. You will work
with the simple solid shown.
 Exercise: Extending a face of a solid
2 Select Extend Face Feature (F + 2), with the following tool settings:
3 Identify the solid at the left.
4 Identify the top face with a data point so that it is highlighted.
5 Accept to view the construction.
6 Accept again to complete the construction.

7 Repeat the exercise on the next solid, this time with Offset Face enabled.
You can select multiple faces when using this tool. Each selected face will
be extended by the same amount.
 Exercise: Extend multiple faces
select Extend Face Feature (F + 2) with the following tool settings:
2 Identify the solid second from right.
3 Use Ctrl data points to select the front face, and the face on the right side
of the chamfer, so that all are highlighted.

4 Accept to view the construction and again to complete it.
5 Repeat the exercise on the far right solid, with Offset Face enabled.
Another option is to display the original face position. These are displayed as
construction class elements and you can enable them by turning on Show Original
Face Position when you extend the face. Or, you can use the Modify Parametric
Solid Or Feature tool to turn them on. Constructions Elements must be turned on
for the view as well.
Spin Face Feature
As its name suggests, this tool lets you spin a face on a solid. Settings for the tool
let you select from the following.
• Revolve Axis: Options are X, Y, or Z axis for Screen, Design, or ACS, or you can
set the axis to be Edge Tangent, the direction of the tangent of the selected
edge at the point of identification of the solid.
• Angle: Sets the angle through which to spin the face.
• Radius: Sets the radius for the spinning operation.
• Show Original Face Position: If on, the original location of the face is displayed
in the form of construction class elements.
When you want to spin the face about an Edge Tangent, the point with which you
identify the solid is the edge used for the spin operation.

 Exercise: Spin a face on a solid
2 Select the Spin Face Feature tool (F + 3) with the following tool settings:
Revolve Angle: Edge Tangent
Angle: 90
Radius: 0
3 Press <T> to switch to Top rotation.
4 Identify the green solid at location 1.
This will be the edge about which the face will be rotated.
5 Select the end face at location 2 and index to the left with AccuDraw.
6 Accept to view the construction and again to complete it.
7 In the tool settings, set Radius to 40.
8 Repeat the exercise for the red solid.
This time that a radius has been applied to the rotation, from the selected
edge.

Remove Face Feature
This tool lets you remove an individual face from a solid. When the setting Add
Connected Faces is enabled, then all connected faces are included when you
select a face. This tool is useful for removing disjointed parts of a feature solid.
If you extrude multiple shapes in 1 operation, for example, they are a single
feature. If you then tried to use the Delete Feature tool to remove 1 of the
extrusions, all would be highlighted, as they are a single feature. Using the
Remove Face Feature tool, however, lets you remove 1 of the extrusions.
Similarly, if you cut through a solid, leaving 2 separate parts, then this tool will let
you delete the unwanted portion of the solid.
Replace Surface Feature
This is a good tool for matching other faces of a single solid to the plane, or curve,
of an existing face, or to that of a separate element.
 Exercise: Replacing surfaces on a solid
2 Select Replace Surface Feature (F + 5), with the following tool setting:
Use Existing Face: Enabled
4 Select the top left face at location 1, as the replacement surface.
5 Use Ctrl+data points to identify the remaining top faces at locations 2 and
3.

6 Accept to view the result, and again to accept the changes.
All top surfaces now align with the one selected first.
7 Repeat the previous steps on the Red solid, this time selecting the
rounded top surface at location 1 as the replacement surface.
The curvature of the rounded surface is continued through to the surfaces that
have been replaced.
You also have the option of using a separate element to define where the surfaces
should be located.
 Exercise: Replace surface using a separate element
and with Replace Surface Feature (F + 4) still active, change the following
tool setting:
Use Existing Face: Disabled
2 Identify the cyan solid.
3 Identify the red rectangular surface.
4 Use Ctrl data points to identify the 3 top faces of the solid.

5 Accept to view the result, and again to accept the changes.
Deform Face Key‐in
Using this tool you can interactively change the shape of faces on a solid by
pushing and pulling them. You can define which edges/vertices you want to
remain as is and you can place a curve element to that you want the face to
match. Options available with this tool are:
• Type: Defines how the face is deformed:
• Center Point deforms the face from the center point of the selected face.
• Picked Point deforms the face from the identification point of the selected
face.
• Space Curves let you define the deformation with selected curves.
• All Edges/Vertices Fixed: If on, all edges and vertices of the selected face are
fixed while the rest of the surface is deformed.
• All Vertices Fixed (Applicable only when All Edges/Vertices Fixed is off): If on,
all vertices of the selected face are fixed while the rest of the surface is
deformed.
• Smooth Edges (Applicable only when All Edges/Vertices Fixed is off): If on,
when you identify an edge to be fixed, all edges that are tangentially
continuous also are selected.
 Exercise: Deforming a face of a solid
2 You may need to load the 3ddeform.ma from

C:\Program Files\Bentley\MicroStation
V8i\MicroStation\mdlsys\asneeded\smartsolid
3 In the Key‐in window, type in: Deform Face
4 Use the following tool settings:
Type: Center Point
All Edges/Vertices Fixed: Enabled
5 Identify the top left (green) solid.
6 Select the top face with a data point.
The pointer now controls a surface element.
7 Move the pointer upward and enter a data point.
Smooth.
Wireframe.
The face has deformed, but all edges have remained fixed.
10 Select Deform Face, with the following tool settings:
All Edges/Vertices Fixed: Disabled
All Vertices Fixed: Enable
11 Identify the top right (yellow) solid.
12 Select the top face of the solid.
All 4 vertices of the top face are now highlighted.

Smooth, then return to Wireframe.
This time only the vertices remained fixed when the surface deformed.
You can also select which edges or vertices you want to remain fixed.
 Exercise: Selecting from a Picked Point
1 Continuing in Feature_advanced.dgn, in model 23_Modify Faces 5, key‐in
Deform Face
2 Use the following tool settings:
Type: Picked Point
All other settings disabled.
3 Identify the lower left (red) solid.
4 Select the top face of the solid.
5 Select the right edge at location 1.

6 Use Ctrl data points to select the vertices at location 2 and 3.
When you move the pointer over each vertex, a handle appears to
indicate that you can select it.
9 Click the View Display Mode view control, change the display mode to
Smooth, and then return it to Wireframe.
Using Picked Point, the point that you use to identify the surface also
becomes the point from which the deformation occurs.

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 What is Dimension‐driven design?
2 What is a Constraint?
3 What is a Construction?
4 True or False: You can create profiles directly in cell library files.
5 Name three methods to suppress display of features using Feature
Manager.
6 For what purpose do you use the Variable Driven Modeling (VDM) tools?
7 What is a Local variable?
8 Name 2 methods of creating feature solids from profile elements.
Answers
1 It is the process by which elements are drawn with respect to previously
determined dimensions, and/or relationships between dimensions.
2 An item of information that limits or controls a construction.
3 An element (point, line, circle, ellipse, or B‐Spline curve) that lets
constraints locate, delimit, or arrange other elements.
4 True.
5 By Instance: Suppresses only the selected feature. By Type: Suppresses all
of selected type within specified dimension range. All Above Feature: All
features above the selected feature in the feature tree.
6 To assign variables or equations to the parameters of solids and features.
7 It is a variable that is created by MicroStation automatically, for all feature
parameters of a solid, and available for that solid (only).
8 Extruding or revolving a closed profile element. Extruding a closed profile
along a path element. Using the Skin Solid Feature tool to create a solid
from 2 or more profile elements.

Module Review

Introduction to Surfaces
Module Overview
MicroStation’s surfaces tools let you create and modify both simple and complex
surfaces. Surface modeling tools are in the Surface Modeling task,which includes
the Create Surfaces, Modify Surfaces, Fillet Surfaces, 3D Query, Mesh and Curve
toolboxes.
Surface objects are like balloons. They have an outer boundary, but are empty on
the inside. While in Solid modeling, you thought as a sculptor, with Surfaces you
must be thinking in profiles or edges. You must find the profile curves that define
the edges of your surface. What do they look like? How can I build them? Solving
this problem solves many of the 3D surfacing problems.
You can construct a rectangular B‐spline surface with 2 points and more complex
B‐spline surfaces by entering a network of points, or by using existing elements in
the model. These existing elements may form the edges of the surface, or you
may sweep 1 element (curve) along 2 other elements (traces). You can create
other surfaces from a network of elements, or by a number of sections.
Additionally, you can create a helical surface by sweeping a profile along a helix,
or create a surface that is offset from an existing surface.
Example of a helical surface, surface by section and free‐form surface
Feb-09 327 Introduction to Surfaces

• Knowledge of 3D View Control
• Knowledge of B‐Spline Curves
Module Objectives
• Recognize the value of NURBS Surfaces
• Modify a NURBS Surface
Questions
2 True or False: When you use key‐ins, or use the view rotation tools from
the toolbox, the tool applies to the active view.
Answers
2 True.
Introduction to Surfaces 328 Feb-09

B-spline Surfaces
B‐spline Surfaces
Free‐form surfaces, or NURBS surfaces, are the most flexible of all surfaces.
NURBS stands for Non‐Uniform Rational Basis Spline. They use a basis function to
mathematically determine the curve or surface. The 3 advantages are as follows.
• B‐splines are locally controllable. You can edit a small portion of the surface
without changing the rest of the surface. For example, if you were modeling a
human face, you could change the size of the nose without affecting the
shape of the cheeks.
• B‐splines have no resolution. You can zoom in very close to the surface and it
still looks smooth, not faceted.
• B‐splines are efficient. B‐splines are calculated surfaces so you do not need to
store as many points as you would if you used a Mesh surface.
These surfaces can be used to model the most complex of surfaces, such as the
human body, the surface of an aircraft wing, a double‐curved roof, the hull of a
ship, and many other things.
As with B‐spline curves, B‐spline surfaces have a control polygon, sometimes
called a control net, which determines their shape. You can modify a B‐spline
surface by changing the control points, or poles, which make up the control
polygon of the surface. These poles are located in the U and V direction, which are
2 directions that define the number of points in each row (U) and column (V) of
the control polygon. The order of the B‐spline surface in each direction sets the
minimum number of points required to define each row or column of the control
polygon.
Much of your work with surfaces will involve B‐spline surfaces. When you create a
B‐spline surface, you can choose whether the control polygon is visible. Visible or
not, you still can modify a B‐spline surface since when you identify it, the control
polygon displays. Additionally, you can enable display of the control polygon
when needed.
In the following exercise, the model contains a rectangular shape, but it is not a
standard block. It is a B‐spline surface, placed with the Create Planar Surface tool.
It has been set to display extra rule lines to help you visualize the surface as you
modify it.
 Exercise: Modify a B‐spline surface
User: untitled

B-spline Surfaces
2 Open Surfaces.dgn from the class data set.
3 Open the model 01_Modify Surface.
4 Select Modify Element (7 + 1) from the Main toolbox.
5 In the Isometric view, snap to the surface at lower left corner and accept
with a data point.
Lines and points display to represent the control net for the B‐spline
surface. Note that the pointer controls the shape of this control net.
6 Move the pointer to the lower left and accept with a data point.
The edge of the surface has been stretched and is no longer linear.
Note the changes in the Top view, but you can see that this was a planar
edit by looking at the Front and Right views.

B-spline Surfaces
7 Select the right front corner.
8 In the Front view move the pointer down and to the left (use AccuDraw
shortcut <F> if necessary), and accept with a data point.
9 Inspect the modified surface in the Front view.
As you can see, B‐spline surfaces are flexible and you can stretch them in
any direction. B‐spline surfaces can take on virtually any shape, and still
you can modify them.
Another way to modify B‐spline Surfaces is with the Element Selection tool.
 Exercise: Using Element Selection to modify a B‐spline Surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces.dgn, in the Modify Surface model, select Element
Selection (1).
2 In the tool settings turn off Disable Handles.

B-spline Surfaces
3 Select the surface to the right and note the handles on the surface.
4 Press the Ctrl key and select the 2 handles shown.
The 2 handles change color.
5 Release the Ctrl key and select either handle.
You can now modify both symmetrically.
6 Press <T> for Top and modify the surface.

B-spline Surfaces
7 Modify the other parts of the surface.
Creation methods
As with B‐spline curves, there are 5 methods available for creating Free Form B‐
spline surfaces in MicroStation:
• Define Poles
• Through Points
• Least‐Square By Tolerance
• Least‐Square By Number
• Catmull‐Rom
You can define a B‐spline surface by placing points or by applying the surface to an
existing element in the model. This is determined by the Define By setting.
Choose between Placement, where you place each control point or pole and
Construction, which uses the vertices of a previously created construction
element to define the poles. The construction element must have at least the
same number of vertices as the Order, in each direction.
You can create an Open or Closed surface. A closed surface closes upon itself
automatically, or you can enter an additional data point(s) to make the last data
point entered the same as the first data point.
Least squares is a method of fitting data. The best fit in the least‐squares sense is a
mathematical procedure for finding the best‐fitting curve to a given set of points

by minimizing (least) the sum of the squares of the offsets (the residuals) of the
points from the curve. A residual is the difference between an observed value and
the value given by the model. The method was first described by Carl Friedrich
Gauss around 1794.
Module Review
Questions
1 What does the order of a B‐spline surface define?
2 What is a control polygon?
3 Name 2 methods you can use to define a B‐spline surface.
4 How can you modify a B‐spline surface?
Answers
1 The order of the B‐spline surface in each direction (U and V) sets the
minimum number of points required to define each row or column of the
control polygon.
2 Sometimes called a control net, the control polygon determines shape.
3 You can define a B‐spline surface by placing points or by applying the
surface to an existing element in the model. This is determined by the
Define By setting, which lets you choose between Placement and
Construction.
4 You can modify a B‐spline surface by changing the control points, or poles,
which make up the control polygon of the surface.

Surface Creation
Module Overview
Using the surface modeling tools in the Create Surfaces task, you can create
surfaces that follow virtually any shape, no matter how complex. You will be able
to create primitive surfaces, lofted and extruded surfaces, plus mesh and free‐
form surfaces.
• Basic Understanding of Surfaces
Module Objectives
• Apply different surface modeling techniques
• Create a variety of 3D surfaces
Feb-09 335 Surface Creation

Surface Modeling
Surface Modeling
The Surface Modeling Tools can be found in the Surface Modeling task. The tools
place surfaces using various methods.
Primitive Surfaces
Most of these tools are the same as Solid Primitives except they are created as
surface models. There is a new Primitive Surface tool for creating a Pyramid, an
Elliptical Cone and a Domed Surface.
A domed surface is created by placing a center point and a sphere radius.
Surface Creation 336 Feb-09

Create Free Form Surfaces
After the sphere is create you can move the cursor up or down to remove the
bottom or top portion of the sphere.
Create Free Form Surfaces
The Create Freeform Surfaces toolbox contains tools to place or construct a free‐
form, helical surface, and to construct a surface by cross‐sections, edges, skin, or
by sweeping along curves. The tools here are very powerful but rely on good
graphics for sections, edges, paths, etc.
Construct Loft Surface
This tool was formerly the Construct Surface by Section tool and has been
substantially modified for MicroStation V8i.

The Loft Surface tool's Start and End Continuity settings let you control how the
surface is constructed. When set to Tangent and an edge of a surface is selected,
the tangency of the surface is considered. This creates a smoother transition from
the original surface to the newly lofted surface.
Direction Arrows
When the loft curves are selected their start points are indicated by a direction
arrow. If any curve has a reverse direction simply click on the arrow to change the
curves direction. The following image demonstrates this process.
The image on left shows the start points for the loft curves. The middle image is the result of clicking on the arrow with
reverse direction.
When the Force Start Point at Selection Point is enabled, you simply use the Ctrl +
Data point and select the curve at your desired start point and this will force all
points to have same direction.
In the image on the left, the arrows indicate all sections have the same direction.
When the Close Loft is enabled the loft curves are closed resulting in a closed
surface model.

In the image on the left, the loft curves would not normally create a closed surface. On the right the results with Close
Loft enabled.
Using the same section curves but Closed Loft disabled and Segmented Loft is
enabled the resulting surface is made up of ruled surfaces between each set of
two loft curves.
Loft Curves closed in this example, note how the surface is closed as a result of closing the loft curves.
To provide further control of a lofted surface, guide wires are now available. The
wire or path curve can be an element or an edge of another surface.
Choose Edges, Faces or Surfaces for Section
Section elements that can be chosen as cross sections include the edges of solids
or surfaces. Using the Loft Surface tool, you can create a surface between selected
edges of 2 existing surfaces. Multiple edges are selected with Ctrl+data points.
Other valid section elements are lines, line strings, arcs, ellipses, complex chains,

complex shapes, B‐spline curves, or the edges of a surface. The order in the u‐
direction is 4. The order in the v‐direction is determined by the sections.
Tool Setting Effect
Start Continuity Defines how the start of the generated surface merges with an existing
surface. Only where start sections are part of an existing surface.
• Position — The surface containing the start section is ignored.
• Tangent — The start of the created surface is tangential to the surface
containing the start section.
• Curvature — The start of the created surface matches the curvature of
the surface containing the first section.
End Continuity Defines how the end of the generated surface merges with an existing
surface. Only where end sections are part of an existing surface.
• Position — The surface containing the end section is ignored.
• Tangent — The end of the created surface is tangential to the surface
containing the end section.
• Curvature — The end of the created surface matches the curvature of
the surface containing the last section.
Force Start • For a closed curve, the start point is at the snap point.
Point at • For an open curve, the start point is at the end nearest to the snap
Selection Point point.
Close Loft If on, a closed surface is constructed in which the first section curve is
also used as the last section curve.
Segmented Loft If on, surfaces are created linearly between each section curve, with no
smoothing. between curves.
If off, smoothing is applied to the generated surface
Keep Profiles If on, the profile curves are retained after the surface is created.
Simplify Section If on, each input cross‐section is approximated by a smooth B‐spline
Curves curve within the specified Rebuild Tolerance value, and the surface is
created from the approximation curves.
Tolerance (Rebuild Section Curves on only) Lets you change the value of the
smoothing tolerance value. Smaller tolerance values cause the
constructed surface to follow the construction elements more closely.
In these next exercises, you will first set the B‐Spline parameters and then use
both lofting methods.
 Exercise: Set the B‐spline parameters
User: untitled
2 Open Surfaces_create.dgn from the class data set.
3 Open the model 01_Construct Loft Surface.
4 Select Element > B‐spline and 3D.

5 In the B‐spline Control Polygon section, set the following:
Surface Polygon: Invisible
Surface Display: Visible
6 In the Surface/Solid Iso lines section, set the following:
U Rules: 10
V Rules: 10
This sets the number of lines that represent the B‐spline surface in
wireframe display mode.
7 Close the B‐spline and 3D dialog.
Using Loft Elements
When using loft elements, they must all go in the same direction to avoid twisting
of the surface. As the elements are selected individually, an arrow displays the
element’s direction and start point. If a loft element is in an opposing direction,
you can reverse its direction by clicking on the arrow to Change it’s direction.
The prompts for this command include the Data‐drag for multiple profiles, this
permits the selection of multiple loft curve elements only. Loft combinations that
include solid and or surface edges and curve elements should use the (Ctrl + Data)
selection method and select each profile member in sequential order.
 Exercise: Construct a surface using Loft Surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces_create.dgn, in the model 01_Construct Loft
Surface, make the Surface Modeling tasks active in the Task Navigation
dialog.
2 Select Loft Surface (A + 1) and follow the prompts, with the following tool
settings:
Start Continuity: Tangent
End Continuity: Tangent
Enable: Force Start Point at Selection Point

3 Select the surface edge on left side then subsequent curves and last
surface edge on right side using the (Crtl + data) selection method.
Note the element direction arrow that appears at the start point of each
edge and loft curve element. The arrows all begin at the top of the curves
because the, Force Start Point at Selection Point, option was enabled. This
also indicates that all curve directions are the same. If a curve happens to
have an arrow going in the opposite direction, you can select the arrow
and the direction will be reversed. Turn on level Backdrop and smooth
shade with shadows to see the resulting curved display wall.
Loft by Section with Guide Wires
You can use several guide wires between two section curves to describe a surface.
The two edge or section curves can be part of a surface or solid. The guide wires
must be lines or curves.
 Exercise: Construct a surface using Loft by Section and Guide Wires

1 Continuing in Surfaces_create.dgn, in the model 02_Loft by Section, make
the Surface Modeling tasks active in the Task Navigation dialog.
2 Select Loft Surface (A + 1) and follow the prompts, with the following tool
settings:
Start Continuity: Position
End Continuity: Position
Enable: Force Start Point at Selection Point
3 Select the blue‐dashed guide wire.
4 Draw a line through the red section segments.

5 Notice that the 4th section segment is in the wrong direction, click on the
red arrow to make it start on the right end.
6 Data once more to see the potential surface.
7 Enter another data point to accept the surface.
8 Zoom Out and try again on the other geometry shown.

Loft Surface By Vertices
The Loft Surface By Vertices is used to construct a surface between the vertices of
two profiles (or groups of profiles).
Profiles can be:
• Individual elements, or groups of elements, such as lines, line strings, arcs.
• Selected edges of one or more solids or surfaces.
After selecting the profiles, prior to accepting the displayed surface, you can
manipulate the shape of the surface by:
• Clicking the direction arrows to reverse the direction of a profile.
• Dragging vertices (denoted by spherical graphics) to a new position on the
profile. This manipulation is available only when the profiles have differing
numbers of vertices.
 Exercise: Construct a surface using Loft Surface By Vertices
1 Continue in Surfaces_create.dgn, open the model 03_Loft Surface By
Vertices, make the Surface Modeling tasks active in the Task Navigation
dialog.
2 Select Loft Surface by Vertices (A + 2) and follow the prompts, with the
3 Select the open line string and then select the arc.

4 Enter a data point to accept the surface.
Notice how it is drawing the arc to one vertex of the line string
5 Select Undo (Ctrl + Z).
6 Select Loft Surface by Vertices (A + 2).
7 Select the line string and arc again.
8 This time click on the black ball and move and snap to the other endpoint
of the arc., to add an extra vertex.
9 Enter a data point to accept.
 Optional Exercise: Construct a surface between Solids using Loft Surface By
Vertices

1 Continue in Surfaces_create.dgn, open the model Loft Surface By Vertices
Extra, make the Surface Modeling tasks active in the Task Navigation
dialog.
2 Select Loft Surface by Vertices (A + 2) and follow the prompts, with the
3 Select the back, lower left edge of the hexagonal solid as shown.

4 Select the arc on the other solid as shown.
5 Click on the red arrow on the arc to change position of the vertex of the
new surface.

6 Enter a data point to accept the new surface.
7 Rotate so that you can see the face with the edge selected, as shown:
8 Continue in the Loft Surface By Vertices command (A + 2).

9 Select the three edges shown on the hexagonal solid. Use Ctrl+data to
select edge 2 and 3.
The next selection will be without the Ctrl key, telling MicroStation to
select edges for the other end of the surface.
10 Select (without Ctrl) the top edge nearest to the hex solid.

11 Enter a data point on empty space to see the current surface definition.
12 Left click on the front red arrow.

13 Click and drag on the black ball to snap and copy to the other endpoint of
the edge.
14 Enter a data point on empty space to see the surface.

Swept Surface along Curves
This tool extends the variety of complex 3D surfaces that you can create. With it,
you can sweep 1 or 2 section profiles along 2 trace curves. Tool settings let you
control how the surface is constructed.
• Swept Two Along One: Permits you to sweep two profiles along one path
curve.
Swept One Along Two: Permits you to sweep one profile along two path
curves.
• Scale To Second Trace: This option is enabled only if Sweep One Along
Two is set to Sweep One Along Two.

• Enabled — the section profile curve is scaled as it sweeps along the 2
trace curves.
• Disabled — the second trace curve simply serves to control
orientation.
• Scale Section Height: This option is enabled only if Sweep One Along
Two is selected and Scale To Second Trace is enabled. If on, the section
profile curve is also scaled in the height direction.
• Swept Two Along Two: Permits two profile curves to be swept along two path
curves.
 Exercise: Create a curved roof using Swept Surface Along Curves
1 Continuing in Surfaces_create.dgn, open the model 04_Sweep Surface
Along Curves.
2 Select Sweep One Along Two (A + 3) and follow the prompts, with the
Method: Sweep One Along Two
Scale to Second Trace: Enabled
3 Turn on level Markers1 for all open views
4 Identify the curve at point 1, click on arrow to change first path curve start
point.
5 Identify the curve point 2, click on arrow to change the start point of this
path curve.
6 Select the profile curve at point 3 and accept twice to create surface.
7 Repeat this process for the other side of the roof.

Helical Surface
Note: You will have to rotate and zoom in to select remaining curves.
8 Turn off level Markers1 and turn on level, building to complete this
exercise.
You can also try the extra models: Sweep Surface Extra 1, 2, and 3.
Helical Surface
The Helical Surface tool used to construct a helical‐shaped B‐spline surface by
sweeping a section profile curve along a helix curve.
The Helical Surface tool has been modified such that you no longer need to use an
existing helical path. The path is now created by entering the parameters of the
helical geometry. The Base, Top radius, Pitch and Height.
You can use open or closed elements as the section profile curve.
In the following exercises, you will use both. In these exercises, you will find that
the Front view is the easiest to use for identifying the various elements in
constructing the helical surfaces.

Helical Surface
 Exercise: Creating a Helical Surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces_create.dgn, open the model 05_Helical Surface.
Make Geometry the active level.
2 Turn on Level, Markers1
3 Select Helical Surface (A +4).
4 Following the status bar prompt, select profile curve to create a helical
surface, (point 1), press (T) to place AccuDraw in a top rotation and enter
the base radius at (point 2) then enter the helical surface height at (point
3).
5 To view how this tool could be used, turn on Level garage.
6 Rotate the model to see how the pitch and height of the helical surface
must be accurate for the path to end at the top of the garage surface.
The image on right is a clip volume and on left the display was set to Transparent with Shadows
 Optional Exercise: Construct the bolt thread

Loft Rectangle to Circle
1 Continue in Surfaces_create.dgn, open the model Helical Surface Extra.
2 Select Helical Surface (A + 4) and follow the prompts, with the following
tool settings:
Thread: Right
Base Radius: 4.0946
Top Radius: 4.0946
Pitch: 2.01
Height: 20.0138
3 In the Front view, identify the thread cross‐section.
4 Press (T) to rotate AccuDraw to the top rotation.
5 Set the base rotation radius center by moving the cursor along the ‐x‐axis
and enter a data point.
6 Move cursor along the positive Z axis to set the helix pitch and height.
7 Enter a data point to accept the structure.
8 Render the view and inspect the bolt thread on the bolt.
When you need to create a transition from a rectangular section to a circle, you
can use the Loft Block to Circle tool to create the required solid or surface.
Settings for this tool let you define the following.

• Axis: Sets the direction of the surface relative to AccuDraw, the Screen
coordinates, or the model’s (Drawing) coordinates.
• Orthogonal: If on, the axis is perpendicular to the sections.
• Top Radius: If on, sets the radius for the circular section.
• Base Length and Base Width: If on set the length and/or width of the
rectangular section.
• Height: If on, sets the height of the surface.
 Exercise: Creating a transition from rectangular to circular section
1 Continuing in Surface_create.dgn, open the model 06_Loft 1.
2 Select Loft Rectangle to Circle (A + 5) and follow the prompts, with the
Orthogonal: Enabled
3 Following the status bar prompt, snap to the vertex of the rectangular
section at location 1 and accept.
4 With focus on AccuDraw, press <T> for Top rotation.
5 Snap to the opposite vertex, at location 2, and accept.
This defines the length of the rectangular section.
6 Snap to the vertex, at location 3, and accept to define the width.
7 Snap to the center of the circular section, at location 4, and accept.
8 Snap to the edge of the circular section, at location 5, and accept to define
the radius of the circular section.
The surface is constructed.
9 In the Isometric view, turn off the level Location Markers.

10 Set the Isometric view’s Display Style to Smooth and use the Rotate View
tool to check the construction.
Where the 2 existing elements are not symmetrical, you can disable Orthogonal
to create an offset transition.
 Exercise: Create an offset transition from rectangular to circular section
1 Continuing in Surface_create.dgn, open the model 07_Loft 2.
2 Select Loft Rectangle to Circle (A + 5) and follow the prompts, with the
Orthogonal: Disabled
3 Following the status bar prompt, snap to the vertex of the rectangular
section at location 1 and accept.
4 Press <T> for Top AccuDraw rotation.
5 Snap to the opposite vertex, at location 2, and accept.
6 Snap to the vertex, at location 3, and accept to define the width.
7 Snap to the center of the circular section, at location 4, and accept.
8 Snap to the edge of the circular section, at location 5, and accept to
define the radius of the circular section.

Surface by Network of Curves
The surface is constructed.
9 In the Isometric view, turn off the level Location Markers.
10 Set the Isometric view’s Display Style to Smooth and use the Rotate
View tool to check the construction.
Rotated view showing the new surface
Surface by Network of Curves
Working with a network is similar to working with sections. The difference is that
when you create a surface from elements arranged in a network, you must be
sure that each element in the network’s u‐direction intersects each element in
the network’s v‐direction.
With this tool, you first identify the sections in 1 direction (u or v) and then the
sections in the other direction. Like with the previous tool, the order in which you
select the network elements in each direction affects the final surface.
Each element in the network’s u‐direction must intersect each element in its v‐
direction and vice‐versa.

Construct Surface by Edge Curves
 Exercise: Creating a Surface by Network
1 Continuing in Surfaces_create.dgn, open the model 08_Surface by
Network.
2 Make Geometry the active level.
3 Select Construct Surface by Network (A + 6).
4 Following the status bar prompt, select the 3 red section curves in order.
(Do not start with the center curve). Select the first curve then use the
Line‐drag for multiple curves/edges to select the remaining curves. To use
this line‐drag tool hold the (ctrl+ key) and drag across the remaining
curves., or you can drag a line through all of the curves.
5 Use the same process to select the green curves.
6 Enter a data point to show the proposed surface.
7 Enter a data point to create it.
With this tool you can construct a B‐spline surface that uses existing elements to
define its edges. You can use lines, line strings, shapes, arcs, curves, B‐spline

curves, complex chains, and complex shapes as edges. Where the number of
edges is 3 to 6 inclusive, they must meet at their endpoints.
The form of the resulting surface depends on the number of edges that are
selected, as follows:
• Two edges: A ruled surface connecting either the closest or farthest ends is
constructed between the edges. You can reverse closest and farthest with a
Reset after selecting the edges and viewing the proposed surface.
• Three edges: You can choose between a Coons patch or an n‐sided patch in
the tool settings.
• Four edges: Bi‐cubically blended Coons patch.
• Five or 6 edges: Five or 6 surfaces respectively, are joined to form 1 patch.
In the tool settings, you choose between 2 patches when 3 edges are selected.
• Method For 3 Edges: Sets the method that is used to create the surface from
the 3 edges
Degenerate Coons Patch or N‐sided Patch
Using this tool, you can create a complex surface from simple edge elements.
Examples of surfaces and the edges used to create them (from 2 through 6).
For 3 edges, both the Coon patch (left) and the n‐sided patch (right) are shown
With this tool you can use either of 2 methods.

First, after picking the tool you can draw a selection box around all of the edge
curves or, second, you can pick the edge curves individually.
 Exercise: Construct a surface from 2 edge elements
1 Continuing in Surfaces_create.dgn, open the model 09_Surface by Edge.
2 Select Construct Surface By Edge Curves (A + 7) and follow the prompts.
3 Identify the 2 red edge elements with data points.
4 With both elements highlighted, enter a data point to view the surface.
5 Accept the surface with another data point.
6 Identify the green edge and one of the red edges with data points.
Note: When you select red edge you may need to use right button to select
original curve.
7 Accept the surface with another data point.
8 Change the View Display Mode to Smooth to see the result.
In some cases, surfaces created from 2 edge elements can be twisted. This is due
to the method used to create the surface. Surfaces created from 2 edge elements
are constructed by joining either the nearest or farthest points on each element.
When a twist appears in the proposed element, a reset will reverse the way that
the surface is constructed and untwist it.

Surface by Corner Points
 Optional Exercise: Create a complex surface from linear elements
1 Open the model Surface by Edge Extra 1.
2 Create a surface from 4 edge elements.
The four red curves will create 1/4th of a convex surface. Select one curve
then use the Ctrl key to identify each of the four red curves. Repeat this
process or use the manipulate element tools to create the other surfaces.
Later you will learn how to stitch these surfaces into one surface.
You can also try models: Surfaces By Edges Extra 2 and 3.
Surface by Corner Points
With this tool you can create a B‐spline surface using any 4 points on an element.
A triangle can also be created by closing the fourth point on the start point.
 Exercise: Create a twisted blade using Surface by Corner Points
1 Continuing in Surfaces_create.dgn, open the model 10_Surface by Corner
Points.
2 Select Surface by Corner Points (A +8) and follow the prompts.

Module Review
If necessary, turn on the Markers1 level, to see the corner point sequence.
3 Place a data point in order at points (1), (2), (3) and (4), to create the
surface.
4 Render the surface.
5 Undo the previously created surface and re‐create the surface using points
(1), (2), (3), and (5) and compare with the previous surface.:
Rotated view showing the new surface.
Module Review
Questions
1 When using the Loft Surface tool, why is it important that all section
elements go in the same direction?
2 If a profile curve is in an opposing direction, how you can reverse its
direction?
3 Besides direction, what else is an important consideration when using the
Loft Surface tool?
4 Name 3 types of elements you can use to define the edges of a B‐spline
surface using Construct Surface by Edges.

Module Review
5 When using Construct Surface by Edges, how do you reverse the way that
the surface is constructed?
6 What is an important consideration when using the Place Free‐form
Surface tool?
7 When using Place Free‐form Surface, which method should you use if you
want the surface to follow the curve of the defined points?
Answers
1 To prevent twisting. If one of the loft curves directions is reversed then the
created surface will be twisted.
2 Select thew red arrow to modify the curve or edge direction.
3 When you select profile curves, the order in which they are selected is
important. The surface will be constructed by transforming the profile
curves in the order in which you select them.
4 Lines, line strings, shapes, arcs, curves, B‐spline curves, complex chains,
and complex shapes.
5 Reset.
6 It is important to have geometry to snap to, or set an AccuDraw Origin
from, in order to draw the surface. Creating construction geometry is
advised.
7 The Through Points method.

Surface Modification and
Blending
Module Overview
Tools for modifying existing surfaces are located in the Modify Surfaces task.
Often the surface creation tools give you a starting surface, with the Modification
tools you can trim, cut or blend surfaces together.
• Knowledge about Surfaces
Module Objectives
• Trim a surface
• Trim Surface by Curves
• Extend a surface
• Stitch and Split a Surface
• Change Surface Normals
• Blend Surfaces
Feb-09 367 Surface Modification and Blending

Questions
1 What does the order of a B‐spline surface define?
3 Name 2 methods you can use to define a B‐spline surface.
4 How can you modify a B‐spline surface?
Answers
1 The order of the B‐spline surface in each direction (U and V) sets the
minimum number of points required to define each row or column of the
control polygon.
2 Sometimes called a control net, the control polygon determines the shape.
3 You can define a B‐spline surface by placing points or by applying the
surface to an existing element in the model. This is determined by the
Define By setting, which lets you choose between Placement and
Construction.
4 You can modify a B‐spline surface by changing the control points, or poles,
which make up the control polygon of the surface.
Surface Modification and Blending 368 Feb-09

Modify Surfaces Tools
Within the Modify Surfaces toolbox are tools that let you modify existing surfaces
in a model.
Included are tools that let you trim, extend, stitch or split surfaces. You can modify
B‐spline specific attributes or change the direction of surface normals.
Trim Surfaces tool
This tool lets you trim two elements to their common intersection or one element
to its intersection with another element.
When selecting elements for trimming, the identified portion of the element is
retained. Before accepting, you can enable Flip 1st, or Flip 2nd, for the first or
second element respectively. These toggles reverse the portion that is retained
and are useful if you inadvertently identify the wrong part of the element.

• Trim 1st Surface: If on, the first surface identified is trimmed to its intersection
with the second element.
• Trim 2nd Surface: If on, the second surface identified is trimmed to its
intersection with the first element.
• Flip 1st: Sets which portion of the 1st selected element is retained after
trimming. Disabled — selected portion is retained. Enabled — selected
portion is deleted.
• Flip 2nd: Sets which portion of the 2nd selected element is retained after
trimming. Disabled — selected portion is retained. Enabled — selected
portion is deleted
• Copy 1st: If on, a copy is made of the first selected element, and the original
element is retained in the design
• Copy 2nd: If on, a copy is made of the second selected element, and the
original element is retained in the design.
• Convert to B‐Spline Surface ‐ Converts the trimmed surface to a B‐Spline.
 Exercise: Trim the 2 cylinders
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, in the model Trim Surface 1, delete
the intersection curve created in the previous exercise.
2 Select Construct Trim (S + 1) with the following tool settings:
Trim 1st Surface: and Trim 2nd Surface: Enabled
3 Turn on the level Markers.
4 Identify the 2 cylinders at location marks 1 and 2.
These identification points also define the portions of the cylinders that
should be retained.
5 Accept with a data point to view the trimmed elements.
Both elements now are trimmed back to the common intersection. When
trimmed, they change from being 3D primitive cylinders to SmartSurfaces.
Their display also changes to that of the default for SmartSurfaces, which
is controlled by settings in the B‐spline and 3D dialog (Element > B‐spline
and 3D).
6 Enable Flip 1st and Flip 2nd.
The trimmed sections are reversed, with the previously deleted portion
being displayed.

7 Disable Flip 1st and Flip 2nd.
8 Enter a data point to complete the trim.
You don’t have to know exactly where to identify the elements prior to using this
tool. You can adjust the settings to get the required effect after selecting the
elements, but prior to accepting the construction.
Trim Surfaces by Curves
With the Trim Surfaces by Curves tool, you can:
• Punch a hole in a surface by projecting a cutting profile.
• Project a B‐spline curve onto a surface.
Tool settings let you choose how the cutting profile is projected, whether or not
the surface is punched, and how it is punched. The inner edge of the newly
punched out surface is called the boundary.
When using this tool, with Direction set to Orthogonal, the direction of the
cutting profile’s projection is in the direction of its surface normals. Using the
Change Normal Direction tool, you can check/set the direction for the cutting
profile.
• Direction: Sets the direction of the projection of the cutting profile, as follows:

• Orthogonal — normal to the cutting profile.
• View — normal to the active view.
• Vector — direction is determined by 2 data points.
• Normal to Surface — normal to the plane of the surface being
trimmed.
• Method: Sets the method used to trim the surface, as follows:
• Trim Surface — the region either inside or outside the projected curve
is trimmed away. The identified portion of the surface is retained.
• Split Surface — the projected cutting profile divides the surface into 2
regions; 1 inside and the other outside the projected profile.
• Project Curve — projects a B‐spline curve on the surface. The surface is
not altered.
• Impose Onto — the cutting profile is imposed onto the surface as a
boundary (a hole is cut into the surface).
• Keep Profile: If on, the cutting profile curve is retained.
• Convert to B‐spline Surface: If on, the resulting element is a B‐spline Surface.
 How to punch a hole in a surface:
1. Select the Trim Surfaces by Curves tool.
2. Identify the surface to punch, on a portion of the surface to be retained.
3. Select projection curves.
4. Accept to create the hole. Or, if Direction is set to Vector, enter the first
point to define the vector direction.
5. Enter the second point to define vector direction and create hole.
Typically, you would use this tool to cut holes in pressure vessels or in surfaces
that depict walls. In this example, you will cut a round hole in the upper surface of
a pressure vessel. To prepare for the exercise, first check the direction of the
surface normals for the cutting profile.

 Exercise: Punch a hole in the surface and retain the punched region only
1 Continue in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model 02_Trim Surface 2
2 Select Trim Surfaces by Curves (S + 2) with the following tool settings:
Direction: Orthogonal
Method: Trim Surface
Convert to B‐spline Surface: Disabled
Keep Profile: Enabled
3 In the Top view, identify the green pressure vessel at location 1.
Note that you are using the Top view to ensure that you identify the
pressure vessel within the boundary of the circle, the cutting profile.
4 Identify the circle cutting profile at location 2 (in any view).
Because you identified the pressure vessel within the region of the cutting
profile, only that region remains.
6 Press Ctrl‐Z to Undo.
7 Continue with Trim Surface by Curves.
8 Select the pressure vessel anywhere else except location 1 then select the
circle.
You could have identified the pressure vessel in any view, and achieved the
same outcome. In View 1, however, it was most obvious visually that the
ID point was within the bounds of the (orthogonal) projection of the circle.

Untrim Surface tool
Use this tool to reverse the sense of trim boundaries in a B‐spline surface or
SmartSurface (convert cutouts to surfaces and vice‐versa) or remove 1 or more
trim boundaries (cutouts) from a B‐spline surface or SmartSurface.
If a trim boundary is shared by 2 faces, along an edge, no change is made.
Three settings let you Reverse, Remove All, or Remove One. Reverse simply makes
the punched hole a surface and the surface a hole.
 How to remove trim boundary from a surface:
1. Select the Untrim Surface tool.
2. Set Trim Boundary to preferred option Remove One, Remove All or Reverse.
3. Identify the trim boundary (hole) to remove with a data point.
4. Accept with a data point to complete the removal.
3. Identify the surface with a data point.
4. Accept with a data point to complete.
In the following exercises, you will see how each of the settings works.
 Exercise: Modifying a Trim Boundary of a Surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model 03_Untrim Surface.
2 Select Untrim Surface (S + 3) with the following tool setting:
Trim Boundary: Reverse
3 Select the green surface with a data point.
4 Enter a second data point to accept.

This reverses the existing surface and the holes. You now have 2 surfaces
where the holes used to be.
5 Undo the previous operation.
6 With the Untrim Surface tool still active, set Trim Boundary to Remove
One.
7 With a data point, select the rounded trim boundary on the surface at
location 1.
8 Accept with a second data point.
The selected boundary is removed.
9 Undo the last operation.
10 In the tool settings, set Trim Boundary to Remove All.
11 With a data point, select the surface.
12 Accept with a second data point.

All the trim boundaries are removed.
Stitch Surfaces
With the Stitch Surfaces tool, you can join 2 surfaces along their abutting edges
creating a new surface. The surfaces must abut along an edge, or at least part of
an edge.
This tool works with shapes, B‐spline surfaces, extruded surfaces, and surfaces of
revolution. The Stitch Surfaces tool does not have any tool settings.
You can stitch surfaces together using selection of elements after selecting the
command. You draw a box from left to right for Inside selection or right to left for
Overlap selection.
In the following exercise you will stitch together 4 surfaces to create a single
surface.
 Exercise: Stitching surfaces together
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model 04_Stitch Surface.
2 Select Stitch Surfaces (S + 4).

3 In any view, draw a selection box from right to left through all 4 surfaces.
The selected surfaces highlight.
The selected surfaces are stitched together forming a single surface.
Observe that the display of the surface is different. It has become a single
SmartSurface. The color of the resulting surface is red, as this was the first
element placed in the design.
Using the Stitch Surface tool is a good way to create surfaces from existing
elements. From simple surfaces you can create complex SmartSurfaces and then
modify these using other SmartSolid and SmartSurface tools.
You can now do further editing on the whole surface.

Offset Surface
The Offset Surface command is used to construct a B‐spline surface by offsetting
an extruded surface, surface of revolution or a B‐spline surface.
The Tool Settings have the following effect:
• Distance ‐ If on, sets the offset distance in the surface normal direction.
• Keep ‐ Original If on, the original element is retained.
• Face Only ‐ If on, lets you select an individual face of a surface to offset.
Change Normal Direction
Surface Normals are indicators that are generated every time you create a
surface. They are invisible during the creation process and after the surface is
created. The only time that you see them is when you use certain surface
modification tools and the Change Normal Direction tool.
A normal to a surface is an imaginary line that is perpendicular to the surface at a
given point.

It determines the side of the surface that is on the outside. You have the
possibility of 2 such lines on any given point on the surface. These lines are 180°
apart, on either side of the surface. The Change Normal Direction tool flips the
normal 180°, thus changing the outside of the surface to the inside and vice‐
versa.
Surface Normals indicate the direction of the surface for rendering and some
surface modification tools. One of these tools, Trim Surfaces by Curves, uses an
element as a cutting profile. The direction of the surface normals of this element
determines in which direction the cutting profile is projected.
 Exercise: Checking/changing direction of Surface Normals
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model 05_Normals and
Project.
2 Select Change Normal Direction (S + 6).
3 Identify the pressure vessel with a data point.
Surface normal arrows display. They are pointing outwards from the
center of the pressure vessel.
4 Select the Arrow to change the surface normal direction and accept with
data point.
5 Identify the circle with a data point.
Surface normal arrows display. They are pointing downward from the
circle.
6 Select the Arrow to change the surface normal direction and accept with
data point.
7 Identify the pressure vessel with a data point.

Surface normal arrows display. They are pointing outwards from the
center of the pressure vessel because when you checked them previously
and Reset, their direction was not changed.
8 Reset to leave them as they are.
9 Identify the circle with a data point.
Surface normal arrows display. They are pointing upward from the circle,
whereas previously they pointed downward. They changed direction
because you clicked on the arrow, entered a data point to accept the
change.
10 Reset to leave them pointing in the displayed direction.
Typically, this tool is used in conjunction with other tools where the
surface normals affect the operation of the tool.
Extend Surface
With the Extend Surface tool, you can extend an edge of a surface, similar to
extending a line with the Extend tool. You can use this tool to extend different
types of surfaces, such as a cone, extruded surface, surface of revolution, or B‐
spline surface along 1 of its edges. Settings for this tool determine how the
surface is extended.
• Extend Mode: Sets how the surface is extended:
• Tangential — extension is tangent continuous at the joint of extension.
• By Angle — extension is at an angle as specified in the Angle field.

• Distance: If on, sets the distance of the extension.
• Angle: (Extend Mode set to By Angle only) Sets the angle at which the
extension is made. An angle of 0° creates a tangential extension.
• Make Copy: If on, a copy is made and the original surface is retained in the
design file.
 Exercise: Extend edges of a B‐spline surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model 06_Extend Surface 1.
2 Select Extend Surface (S + 7) with the following tool setting:
3 In the Top or Right view, identify the surface with a data point at the edge
near location 1.
The proposed extension displays.
4 Enter a data point to accept the extension.
5 In the Top or Right view, identify the surface with a data point at the front
edge.
6 Enter a data point to accept the extension.
You can extend the 2 remaining edges.

Fillet Surfaces Tools
7 With the Extend Surface tool still active, use the Front view to identify the
remaining edges.
Note: The exercises suggest views that help you identify the correct edge clearly. In
fact, you could work in any view.
Merge Surface to Edge
The Merge Surface to Edge is used to merge the selected edge of a B‐spline
surface to the edge of a second surface. Typically, you can use this tool to heal
small gaps between two surfaces, without creating a third intermediate surface.
You are not creating a new surface, you are extending an existing surface.
The Tool Settings have the following effect:
• Continuity Defines how the first surface is merged to the second surface.
• Position — The surface containing the second edge is ignored. Only the
selected edge is considered.
• Tangent — Lets you merge the first surface so that it is tangential to
the second surface.
• Curvature — Lets you merge the first surface such that it matches the
curvature the second surface.
• Factor (Continuity set to Tangent or Curvature only) Lets you control the
degree to which tangency/curvature setting affects the shape of the merged
surface.
The SmartSolids Fillet Edges and Chamfer Edges tools let you round or chamfer
edges on solids, along continuous surfaces. SmartSurface tools let you join
separate surfaces with a fillet or blend.

Find the Fillet Surfaces tools at the end of the Modify Surfaces task.
Fillet Surfaces tool
Use the Fillet Surfaces tool to join 2 surfaces with a curved surface. The 2 surfaces
that you are joining do not have to touch, but they must be within the range of
the fillet radius.
Tool settings let you choose which elements are trimmed during construction of
the fillet.
• Truncate: Defines which surface(s) are to be truncated (trimmed back):
• Both — both surfaces are trimmed.
• First — the first surface selected is trimmed.
• None — neither surface is trimmed
• Face Only: Allows the selection of one face at a time if multiple faces are
present in either surface. For example, if a fillet is created between a slab and
a surface and this check box is selected, the faces of the slab could be
selected. This check box is available only if Truncate is set to None.
• Radius: Sets the radius of the fillet.
 Exercise: Create a fillet between surfaces (both truncated)
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model 07_Fillets
You will construct fillets between various parts of the lamp in the model.
2 Select Fillet Surfaces (S + 9) with the following tool settings:
Truncate: Both
Radius: 15
3 In View 3, select the top of the base at location 1 with a data point.
4 Select the pole at location 2.
5 Enter a data point to view the proposed fillet.
The proposed fillet displays.

6 Enter a data point to accept the construction of the fillet.
With the fillet constructed, the pole, fillet and top surface of the base now
are all part of a single SmartSurface. Continue by placing a fillet on the
outside edge of the base.
7 Select the vertical edge of the base at location 1 with a data point.
8 Select the edge of the top surface of the base, at location 1.
The pole, fillet and top surface of the base all highlight.
10 Accept the construction of the fillet with another data point.
11 In View 3, turn off the level Markers.
12 Set View 3’s View Display Mode to Smooth and inspect the results of the
fillets.
If there is a choice as to the side on which the fillet is placed, the location is
determined by the direction of the surface normals.

 Exercise: Create another fillet
1 Continue in Surfaces_modify.dgn, in the model 07_Fillets, select Fillet
Surfaces (S + 9) with the following tool settings:
Truncate: None
Radius: 30
2 In View 1, select the circular section at location 3 with a data point.
5 Accept with a data point to complete the construction.
The pointer location did not control the side of the circular section on which the
fillet was placed. It was placed on the side of the circle from which the surface
normals point. For the next fillet, you will change the direction of the surface
normals to place the fillet on the lower side of the circular section.
 Exercise: Determining the direction of a fillet
1 Continue in Surfaces_modify.dgn, in the model 07_Fillets, select Change
Normal Direction (S + 6).
2 Select the circular section at location 5 with a data point.
Surface normals display. They are pointing upward. This would produce a
fillet on the upper face of the circle as it did for the circular section below.
3 Enter a data point to reverse the direction of the surface normals.
With the surface normals pointing in the correct direction, you can
continue with the construction of the fillet.
4 Select Fillet Surfaces (S + 9) with the following tool settings:

Truncate: None
Radius: 30
5 In View 1, select the circular section at location 5 with a data point.
This time the fillet is placed on the lower face of the circular section.
8 Accept with another data point to complete the fillet.
You can see that the fillet has been placed on the lower side of the circular
section. This is most evident in the Front view.
Hint: If you want to truncate only 1 of the surfaces that you are filleting note that,
with Truncate set to Single, the first surface selected is truncated.
Fillet Surfaces along Curves
This tool is used to construct a blending B‐spline surface between 2 surfaces along
their rail curves. The curve must be an element lying on the surface. The curves
can be elements such as lines, arcs, line strings, ellipses, complex shapes, complex
chains, or B‐spline curves. Surfaces that may be blended in this way include
extruded surfaces, surfaces of revolution, cones, or B‐spline surfaces. Tool settings
let you choose a Chamfer or Round blend.
Typically, you could use any of the following tools to create a curve on a surface:
• Extract Face or Edge Geometry in the 3D Utility toolbox.

• Project Trim in the Modify Surfaces toolbox.
• Extract Iso‐parametric Lines in the Create Curves toolbox.
If a surface is flat you could simply draw the curves on the surface. In this
example, the Project Trim tool was used to produce the green dashed curve on
the green surface, while the Extract Iso‐parametric Lines tool created the yellow
dashed curve on the hexagonal solid. As with all tools, follow the status bar
prompts as you proceed.
Tool settings are:
• Method ‐ Sets the type of fillet.
• Round — Smooth circular blend also know as a rolling ball blend.
• Chamfer — Chamfer blend.
• Fillet Surface Type ‐ Sets the type of trim for the generated surface.
• Trimmed — Trims the generated surface to the bounds of the curves.
• No Trim — Does not do any trimming.
• Long Trim — Trims to the longest of the two curves.
• Short Trim — Trims to the shortest of the two curves.
• Truncate Originals ‐ If on creates a single surface.
• Keep Original ‐ If on retains the originals if Truncate Originals is on.
 Exercise: Create a chamfer blend between curves
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model 08_Fillets.
2 Select Fillet Surfaces along Curves (S + 0) with the following tool setting:
Blend Type: Chamfer
Fillet Surface Type: Trimmed
3 Select the green B‐spline surface at location 1 with a data point.
4 Select the red dashed curve at location 2.
5 Select the yellow hexagonal solid at location 3.
6 Identify the face in front.
7 Select the yellow dashed rail curve at location 4.
8 Enter a data point to view the blend.

9 Accept the blend with a data point.
The blend is constructed. In the Isometric view, you can see that it has a
straight (chamfer) slope.
 Exercise: Create a round blend between rail curves
2 Select Fillet Surfaces along Curves (S + 0) with the following tool setting:
Blend Type: Round
3 Select the magenta B‐spline surface at location 1 with a data point
4 Select the magenta dashed rail curve at location 2.
5 Select the red hexagonal solid at location 3.
6 Select the front face.
7 Select the red dashed rail curve at location 4.
8 Enter a data point to view the blend.

9 Accept the blend with a data point.
The blend is constructed. In the Isometric view, you can see that it has a
curved (round) slope.
Blend Surfaces
You can use this tool to construct a blend between 2 elements (extruded surfaces,
revolved surfaces, cones, or B‐spline surfaces) with a specific order of continuity.
The resulting B‐spline surface consists of the trimmed original elements and a
transition that connects them.
Setting the Continuity specifies how the blend between the surfaces is formed.
The direction of the first and last tangents of the blend is the direction of the
tangents of the original elements at their trimmed edges. You can adjust the
relative magnitudes of these tangents to achieve the desired blend.
With this tool, you can change the settings to interactively view the proposed
blend prior to accepting it with a data point.
• Continuity: Sets the order of continuity of the blend surface:
Position — produces a straight surface between the blend points.
Tangent — has 2 control rows and columns in the u and v directions. This
setting is appropriate for most cases.
Curvature — has the u and v values set to 4.
• Factor 1: Sets the magnitude of the initial tangent.
• Factor 2: Sets the magnitude of the final tangent.

When selecting surfaces, the finished blend assumes the color of the first selected
surface.
 Exercise: Create a blend between 2 extruded surfaces
2 Select Blend Surfaces (S + Q) with the following tool settings:
Start Continuity: Curvature
End Continuity: Curvature
Start Continuity Reverse: Enabled
End Continuity Reverse: Enabled
Start Factor: 15
End Factor: 5
3 In the Isometric view, select the green surface at location 1.
This determines the edge where the blend will start.
4 Select the surface at location 2 to define the second edge to be blended.
If you do not see a surface click on the red arrows to change the start
point. The proposed surface displays.
6 In the tool settings, use the slide controls to change the values for Factor 1
and Factor 2 to 50.

Module Review
It makes no difference to the proposed surface. Because Continuity is set
to Position, the blend is restricted to the 2 selected positions on the
surfaces.
7 Return the Factor 1 and Factor 2 values to 0.
Continuity: Tangent.
9 Use the slide controls to change the values for Factor 1 and Factor 2.
Changing these values changes the shape of the blend.
As Factor 1 and Factor 2 settings are changed the blend changes accordingly
10 Change the Continuity setting to Curvature and repeat step 10.
11 When you are happy with the shape of the blend, enter a data point to
complete it.
Module Review
Questions
1 When using the Construct Trim tool, which portion of the element is
retained?
2 True or False: When using the Construct Trim tool, you can adjust the
settings to get the required effect after selecting the elements.

Module Review
3 What are Surface Normals?
4 What is an important consideration when using the Construct Stitch tool?
5 When using the Construct Stitch tool, what is the resulting element color if
you select the surfaces first, then the tool?
6 When working with B‐spline surfaces, their display is represented with
what?
Answers
1 When using the Construct Trim tool, the identified portion of the element
is retained.
2 True. Adjust the settings to get the required effect after selecting the
3 Indicators that are generated every time you create a surface. They are
invisible during the creation process and after the surface is created. The
only time that you see them is when you use certain surface modification
tools and the Change Normal Direction tool.
4 The surfaces must abut along an edge, or at least part of an edge.
5 The color of the resulting surface is that of the surface which was placed in
the file first.
6 Their display is represented with rule lines. The more rule lines that are
used to display the surface, the easier it is to visualize in wireframe mode.

Modify B‐spline Surfaces
Module Overview
Tools for modifying B‐spline surfaces are located in the Modify B‐spline Surfaces
task. These tools differ from the last set, as they apply to B‐Spline surfaces only.
• Knowledge about B‐spline Surfaces
Module Objectives
• Edit Surface Control Points
• Change the Surface Order
• Change the Surface Closure
• Rebuild Surfaces
• Combine Surfaces
• Split Surfaces
• Apply the Surface Handlebar
• Twist Surfaces

Questions
1 B‐Spline surfaces use the same methods as B‐Spline _________.
2 True or False: Surfaces can be created by extracting them from Solids.
3 With Surface Modeling it is important to start with good ____ profiles.
Answers
1 Curves
2 True
3 2D
Modify B‐Spline Surfaces
There are many ways to modify a B‐Spline surface. FOr example, one of the
handiest and easiest ways is to use the Element Select tool (1) and select the
surface. You can then use Ctrl+data point to select individual handles or a group
of handles to edit.
Specific tools have been design to control other modifications to B‐Spline
surfaces.

Modify B-Spline Surfaces
Edit Surface Control Points
When you create a B‐spline surface, various settings that determine its
construction and appearance are controlled by options in the B‐spline and 3D
dialog.
They define the default settings that apply to surfaces as you place them in your
models. Once a B‐spline surface has been placed, you can change its settings
using the Edit Surface Control Points Settings tool.
When working with B‐spline surfaces, their display is represented with rule lines.
The more rule lines that are used to display the surface, the easier it is to visualize
in wireframe mode. But they can cause unnecessary screen clutter, and updates
can be affected when the design is complex.
 Exercise: Add rule lines to a B‐spline surface
1 Open Surfaces_modify.dgn, and open the model 11_ Surface Settings 1.
2 Set the Isometric view’s View Display Mode to Smooth.

The model, which looked like 4 simple edge elements in wireframe display,
is really a B‐spline surface.
This B‐spline surface was created with U Rules and V Rules both set to a
value of 2. Thus, only 2 lines display in each direction to represent the
surface in wireframe display mode. To help you visualize the B‐spline
surface in wireframe display, you can increase the number of rule lines.
3 Set the Isometric view’s View Display Mode to Wireframe.
4 Select the Edit Surface Control Points tool (D + 1) with the following tool
settings:
Edit Rule Line: Enabled and both U and V set to 5
6 Accept with a data point to make the change.
The surface is more easily seen in wireframe display. There are 5 rule lines
in each direction, as specified. This is an improvement, but you can see
better if you increase the number of V rules.

7 Unlock the Number of Rule Lines by selecting the lock icon
Edit Rule Line: Enabled with U set to 5 and V set to 15
With the new value, the surface is easier to see in wireframe mode.
You can change other settings for B‐spline surfaces as well as the display
parameters. You can turn on the display of the control polygon and change the
Order of the surface.
 Exercise: Change control polygon and surface settings for a B‐spline surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model 12_Surface Settings
2.
2 Select Edit Surface Control Points, with the following tool settings:
Show Control Polygon: Enabled

With the hide surface option enabled, you can make the surface invisible.
Hide Surface: Enabled
6 Identify the surface and accept with a data point.
The surface disappears, leaving the control polygon.
7 Change the Surface tool setting back to visible and repeat the previous
step to turn the surface display on again.
Change Surface Order
You can change the order of the B‐spline surface with or without preserving its
current shape. The higher the order the smoother (flatter) the surface.

 Exercise: Change the order of the B‐spline surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, in the model 12_Surface Settings 2,
set the following Change Surface Order tool settings:
Order: Enabled for both the U and V directions and values set to 5
When you enable Order, you have the option of whether or not to
preserve the shape of the original B‐spline surface. First you will try the
tool without preserving the shape.
2 Identify the surface with a data point.
Note the change in the shape of the surface. Note also, that it still is
contained within the control polygon, which remains unchanged.
4 Undo the previous operation.
Preserve Shape: Enabled
6 Identify the surface and accept with a data point.
7 This time, the surface retains its original shape, but the control polygon
has changed and now has many more points.

Change Surface Closure
Used to change the closure settings in the U and/or V direction for a B‐spline
surface. You can change closure of a surface in the U or V direction.
Rebuild Surface
You can rebuild a surface with different parameters. The following are available:
• Reduce Data — Used to remove unnecessary control points from a surface
with tolerance.
• Rebuild with Tolerance — Used to remove cusp points on a surface by
sampling a set of points from the surface and recreating it.
• Rebuild with Num Poles — Similar to Rebuild with Tolerance, but with a fixed
number of poles as input.
• Swap UV — Swaps the U and V directions, so that U becomes V and vice versa.
• Reverse U — Reverses the U direction.
• Reverse V — Reverses the V direction.
• Make Uniform Knots — Where a surface has all the knots concentrated in a
certain region, such as to one side of the surface, it may be that the 0.5 knot is
not near the center of the surface. This option attempts to rebuild the surface
such that the 0.5 knot corresponds, as near as possible, to the center of the
surface.

Combine Surfaces
This technique is used to combine B‐spline surfaces that share a common edge.
The result remains a B‐spline surface and takes on the color of the first selected
surface. Simply select two or more surfaces with common edges and they will
combine into a single B‐spline surface.
Split Surface
Just as the Stitch Surface tool lets you join surfaces into a single entity, the Split
Surface tool lets you take 1 surface and split it into 2 surfaces. You can use it to
break up a primitive, like a slab or a cylinder surface. When you split a surface, it
automatically becomes a B‐spline surface regardless of what it was previously. In
effect, this tool is similar to the Delete Part of Element tool. Delete Part of
Element works with linear elements, but the Split Surface tool works with
surfaces.
The tool settings defines how the surface will be split.
• By Point — Selecting a point to split or split and drag to make a gap.
• By Numbers — Split into numbers of U and V line sections.
• At Crease Iso Curves — Makes a split at an iso curve.
• Into Bezier — Splits the surface into a Bezier surface
 Exercise: Splitting a surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model 13_Split Surface.
2 Select the Split Surface tool (A + 6), with the following tool settings:
Method: By Point

3 In the Isometric view, snap to the red surface at location 1 and accept with
a data point.
4 Snap to location 2 and accept with a data point.
As you move the pointer, you are dynamically viewing the deletion of part
of the surface, horizontally.
5 Reset to change the direction of the deletion.
Now, as you move the pointer, you are viewing the deletion of part of the
surface, vertically.
6 Move the pointer to location 2, and accept with a data point, to complete
the deletion.
Because the original surface that you modified was a B‐spline surface, there was
no significant change in the way that the modified surface displayed. When you
split a primitive, the modified surface becomes a B‐spline surface and the display
changes according to the B‐spline display settings.

 Exercise: Splitting the cylinder
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, in the model Split Surface, select
13_Split Surface (A + 6).
2 In the Isometric view, snap to the green cylinder at location 3 and accept
with a data point.
3 Select the cylinder to set the direction for the split.
As you move the pointer, you are dynamically viewing the deletion of part
of the cylinder, vertically.
4 Reset to change the direction of the deletion.
Now, as you move the pointer, you are viewing the deletion of part of the
cylinder horizontally.
5 Snap to the cylinder at location 4 and accept with a data point to complete
the deletion.
The cylinder has been split into 2 sections.
 Exercise: Split a complex B‐spline surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces_modify.dgn, open the model Split Extra.
2 Select Split Surface (A + 6).
3 Select one edge of the yellow surface and accept with a data point.

In the Top view, note that the surface is partially deleted in the x direction
as you move the pointer.
4 Reset to change the direction of the partial deletion to the y direction.
5 Enter a data point to complete the partial deletion.
Surface Handlebar
The Surface Handlebar tool is used to modify the shape of a surface, by
controlling the tangency in two directions at one point on the surface. You should
use this tool for small, fine adjustments needed for part of a surface. Perhaps to
ensure clearance or ensure that they touch.
 How to modify a surface using handles:
1. Select the Surface Handlebar tool.
2. Identify the surface.
3. Select the position for the base point of the handlebars. Handlebars appear
at the selected location on the surface.
4. Click and drag the handles to modify the surface.

Twist Surface
The Twist Surface tool is used to create a twisted B‐Spline surface or mesh about a
defined axis. By increasing the number of control points you will create a
smoother surface.
The tool settings are:
• Fixed Twist Angle ‐ If on, sets the angle that the surface is twisted about the
length of defined axis.
• Infinite ‐ If on the surface will be twisted beyond the length of the axis or
below the starting point of the defined axis.
 How to create a Twisted Surface:
1. To create a twisted surface you select the surface
2. Then define an axis of rotation
3. Define a reference point to indicate the start and end of the rotation.
Original surface on left, middle start and end of rotation and right side resulting twisted surface.

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 The Edit Surface Control Points commands lets you change settings found
in the menu: Element > _________
2 True or False: When using the Change Surface Order tool, you can adjust
the settings to see the required effect after selecting the elements.
3 What are Rule Lines?
4 What is the way to change the direction of a split in the Split Surface
command?
Answers
1 3D and B‐Spline
2 True. Adjust the settings to get the required effect after selecting the
3 Rule Lines help to visualize a surface. The more rule lines that are used to
display the surface, the easier it is to visualize in wireframe mode.
4 Right‐click.

Surface Utilities
Module Overview
Tools for modifying surfaces are located in the Modify Surfaces task.
• Knowledge about creating Surfaces
• Knowledge about editing and modifying Surfaces
Module Objectives
• Convert standard surfaces to SmartSurfaces and B‐spline surfaces.
• Extract points or faces from a Surface.
• Extract iso curves from a surface.
• Create a planar slice through a Surface or Solid.
• Compute the intersections between surfaces, Solids and elements.
• Unroll a developable surface.
• Create a surface from an image.
• Show surface curvature.
• Match surface settings.
Feb-09 407 Surface Utilities

Questions
1 What tool is usually the quickest and easiest way to edit a surface?
2 True or False: Changing Surface Order can change the shape of a surface.
3 True or False: Twist Surface allows you twist along the length of an axis or
an infinite length along that axis.
Answers
1 Element Selection. Edit handles to edit the surface.
2 True.
3 True. Infinite is a tool setting option.
Surface Utilities 408 Feb-09

Surface Utilities
Surface Utilities
Within the Surfaces Utilities toolbox are tools to extract curves from B‐spline
surfaces.
Included are tools that let you convert a solid to a surface, extract points, iso lines,
create a planar slice, computer intersections, unroll a developable surface, create
surface by image, show surface curvature and match surface settings.
Convert To Surface
The Convert to Surface tool converts a solid to a surface or standard surfaces to B‐
spline surfaces.

Surface Utilities
In this image you see a Solid Primitive Ellipsoid. By selecting the Convert To
Surface tool with the Convert to, set to B‐spline Surface, the solid is converted.
 Exercise: Convert a Solid to a Surface and modify surface
1 Open Surface_utilities.dgn, and open the model 01_convert to surface.
2 Use the Element Information tool to verify that the Ellipsoid is a
SmartSolid.
3 Select Convert To Surface (F + 1) with the following tool settings:
Convert To: Set to B‐spline Surface
4 Pick the Ellipsoid and accept with a data point.
5 Use the Element Information tool to verify that the Ellipsoid is now a B‐
spline surface.
Note: The conversion to B‐spline surface has split the previous SmartSolid into
two surfaces. To combine these two B‐spline surfaces into one B‐spline
surface use the Combine Surfaces tool.

Surface Utilities
Extract Points from Surface/Face
The Extract Points from Surface/Face tool is used to evaluate attributes of a B‐
spline surface or a SmartSolid face. The attributes that can be created are points,
tangents and normal directions. The attributes can be extracted over the
complete surface, at a specific point, by a UV parameter or by a distance along a
curve.
For example here are two surfaces that need to be offset by .1 units.
By rotating the surfaces to a side view you can see that the top surface is not a
constant offset of the bottom surface.

Surface Utilities
To evaluate the offset of the bottom surface you extract the Normals by Point
Array with a Normal Plot Scale set to the optimum offset value. In this case .1
units. Then zoom into the normals to see how far the offset has deviated from the
.1 unit offset.
Measure the distance and see that it is .05 units greater than the desired .1 offset.
Then by using the Element Selection tool you can move the top surface pole to
the .1 offset normal.
Other attributes that can be extracted are tangent lines and points.

Surface Utilities
Extract Iso‐Curves
The Extract Iso‐Curves tool is used to extract the iso‐curves from a B‐spline
surface or a Solid face. You can extract a single curve or multiple curves evenly
spaced.
Iso‐curves have a parametric value from 0 to 1 in the U and V direction of a
surface or solid face. When a single curve is specified, you can set the position
graphically or use the Iso Value setting to position it on the surface.
• Extract: Sets the objective of the tool:
Single Curve — Extract a curve that has a constant parametric u‐value (iso‐u
curve) or constant parametric v‐value (iso‐v curve). The u‐value or v‐value is
the specified Iso Value. The u‐direction is the direction in which the data
points that defined each row were entered. The v‐direction is the direction in
which the columns were defined.
Multiple Curves — Extract a set of curves that are spaced evenly on the
surface in both directions.
• Iso Value: (Enabled only if Extract is set to Single Curve) If on, sets the iso value
of the extracted curve.
• Numbers U/V: (Enabled only if Extract is set to Multiple Curves) Sets the
number of curves extracted from both parametric u‐ and v‐directions.
• Ignore Trim Region(s): (Enabled only if Extract is set to Multiple Curves) If off,
the curves are trimmed by the B‐spline trim curves, if any.
When using this tool, the generated surface rule lines take the active element
attribute settings.

Surface Utilities
Note: If you reset before accepting the iso‐curve it will switch to the opposite
U or V direction.You can also use the sliding bar to set an iso value.
In the following example a single iso‐curve is extracted from a surface and a solid
with an iso value of .5.
 Exercise: Extract multiple curves from a primitive solid
1 Open Surface_utilities.dgn, and open the model 02_extract iso‐curves.
2 Make a copy of the Ellipsoid.
3 Select Extract Iso Curves (F + 3) with the following tool settings:
Extract: Multiple Curves
U Numbers: 10
V Numbers: 10
4 Select the ellipsoid and accept with a data point.
5 Delete the SmartSolid that you used to extract the iso‐curves

Surface Utilities
6 Render the image to see the B‐spline curves extracted from the solid
model.
 Optional Exercise: Extracting single surface rule lines in either the u or v
direction
1 Continuing in Surfaces_utilities.dgn, open the model Iso Extra 1.
2 Select Extract Iso‐parametric Line (F + 3) with the following tool settings:
Extract: Single Curve
Iso Value: Disabled
3 In the Top view, select the surface with a data point.
A horizontal rule line appears on the surface.
4 As you move the screen pointer, the surface rule line moves over the
surface. As it moves, check all views and see how it changes shape to
match the surface.
5 Reset to change the direction of the surface rule line.
The direction of the rule line changes to vertical (in the Top view). Again,
as you move the screen pointer, the surface rule line moves over the
surface, changing shape to match the surface.

Surface Utilities
6 Enter a data point to place the surface rule line approximately in the
center of the surface.
If you enable the Iso Value setting, you can position the extracted surface rule line
exactly on the surface. Values can be from 0 through 1, where, for example:
• 0 places the rule line on 1 edge.
• 1 places the rule line at the opposite edge.
• 0.25 and 0.5 places the rule line quarter or mid‐way between the edges,
respectively.
If you set Extract to Multiple Curves, you can place a network of surface rule lines
on the surface.
 Exercise: Extract Multiple Curves from a surface
1 Continuing in Surfaces_utilities.dgn, open the model Iso Extra 2.
2 Select Extract Iso‐parametric Line (F + 3) with the following tool settings:
Extract: Multiple Curves
Numbers: 10 (for both U and V fields)
Ignore Trim Regions: Disabled
3 In any view, identify the surface with a data point.
4 Accept with another data point, to complete the construction.
5 Each of the iso lines created is a B‐spline curve that can be manipulated, or
used, separately from the originating surface.

Surface Utilities
Planar Slice
The Planar Slice tool is used to generate a planar section through design
geometry. The cutting plane can be an existing planar element or a plane defined
by three points or a plane perpendicular to a view and defined by two points. If
Assemble Segments is enabled then the individual lines of a planar section are
assembled into a line string.
In this example the ellipsoid has copies of an existing Block element, and with the
Slice by Element selected in the tool settings, the resulting planar slices are
created.
 Exercise: Planar Slice through a 3D model.
1 Continue in Surface_utilities.dgn, and open the model 03_planar slice.
2 Select Planar Slice tool (F + 4) with the following tool settings:
Slice by View: Enabled
Assemble Segments: Enabled

Surface Utilities
3 Create the first point of the slice, 2.9983 units in the Y direction from the
base of the domed structure.
4 Enter the last point of the planar slice, reset to preview and data point to
accept planar slice. Change view to right‐isometric.
5 This slice can then be used to create an interior floor of the domed
structure by dropping the planar slice using the Drop Element tool with
Complex: Enabled

Surface Utilities
6 Delete the outer wall planar slice and keep the inner slice as the interior
floor of the domed structure.
Compute Intersections
The Compute Intersections tool is used to calculate the intersection point
between elements. For example, the intersection of a line or curve with a surface,
mesh or solid model.

Surface Utilities
In this example the center lines of pipes go through a solid structure and you need
to find the intersections of these line elements with the structure.
Select the Compute Intersections tool (F + 5). You are then prompted to select the
first group and in this example the solid structure is selected. You are then
prompted to select the second group. The second group contains the center lines
and they are selected by dragging a box from right to left which will select all the
center lines. Accept with a data point to compute the intersection points.
Unroll Developable Surface
This tool is used to flatten a surface. A developable surface is typically a ruled
surface that can be flattened to a plane without distortion.

Surface Utilities
Here are surfaces that were created from projections onto an ellipsoid.The
surface to be flattened is displayed with an increased number of U and V lines.
Select the Unroll Developable Surface tool (F + 6) and click on the surface, a point
that you want to start the unrolling and another point to determine the axis for
the unrolling. The flattened surface has been dimensioned to see the changes
after flattening.
Surface By Image
The Surface by Image tool is used to create an approximate B‐spline surface from
a raster image. Probably, one the most fun 3D surfacing tools!

Surface Utilities
 Exercise: Create a B‐spline surface from an aerial photograph
1 Open Surface_utilities.dgn, and open the model 04_Surface by Image.
2 Set View to Top view.
3 Select Surface by Image tool (F + 7) with the following tool settings:
Image File: image_surfbyimage.tif
Proportional to Image: Disabled
Height: 10
U Sample Points: 20
V Sample Points: 20
4 Click in the lower left corner of the view, in response to the prompt “Enter
First Point”.
5 Click in the upper right corner of view in response to the prompt “Enter
Second Corner Point to define Window Area”.
The height is a scale factor which can be used to create a desired elevation for
visibility. This surface example also has the image used to create the surface,
mapped to the surface via MicroStation visualization tools. The image is mapped
to the color white in View Attributes.
You can also increase sampling points which will increase surface details but will
slow down the rendering time. I recommend not increasing the U V Sample Points

Surface Utilities
higher than 40 for this example. In the following image the U V Sample Points
have been set to 40.
Note: The color of the original image determines if the surface is convex or concave.
Black is the maximum concave point and white is the maximum height for
convex surfaces.
Show Surface Curvature
This tool is used to show curvature by placing a range of colors on a surface and as
the curvature increases a color reflects this change.
For example the following is a flat B‐spline surface and by selecting the Show
Surface Curvature tool a solid color is displayed on the surface indicating no
perceptible change in curvature.

Surface Utilities
By modifying the poles on the surface to create curvature the colors reflect this
increase in curvature.
 Exercise: Evaluate curvature on a complex surface
1 Open Surface_utilities.dgn, and open the model 05_Show Surface
Curvature.
2 Select Show Surface Curvature tool (F + 8).
3 Click on the complex surface in View 1.
4 The resulting curvature changes are displayed by changing colors.

Surface Utilities
5 Right click and a colored wireframe of curvature is displayed. Right click
one more time and you will return to wireframe.
Match Surface Settings
The Match Surface Settings tool (F + 9) is used to change the active B‐spline
settings. By selecting an existing surface the settings for that surface are matched
in the Active B‐spline settings. In the following example the Active B‐spline
settings are set to 10 U and 10 V lines. By selecting the existing surface the
settings for the surface are matched and change the Active B‐spline settings in the
tool settings.

Module Review
Questions
1 You can convert a B‐Spline surface to a Mesh or a ______?
2 True or False: The Iso curve has equal value for U or V throughout the
surface.
3 You can create a Planar Slice: By View, By Three Points or By _______
4 True or False: Surface by Image supports most major image formats.
Answers
1 Solid.
2 True.
3 Element.
4 True.

Meshes
Module Overview
Meshes are polygonal objects arranged in 3D to make a surface. This module
covers some of the basic procedures used to create surface models using
MicroStation Meshes.
• Knowledge of 3D Surfaces
Module Objectives
• Create Meshes
• Modify Meshes
Feb-09 427 Meshes

Mesh Surfaces
Mesh Surfaces
The Mesh tools allow you to create polygonal mesh surfaces. These surfaces are
approximations of a true surface and are made up of polygons (usually triangles
and quadrilaterals). As you zoom in on a Mesh surface you start to se the faces/
facets of the surface.
With a mesh the object is broken down into triangles (or other polygons) that can
be used to approximate the volume of surface of an object that would normally
take hours to get an exact volume of surface area.
If you are interested in the volume of something rectangular then there is no
advantage to converting this a mesh, since all you are doing is totaling the six
sides of the volume. The Mesh model simply breaks up complex geometry into
several simple chunks of geometry that can be calculated then totaled to give an
approximation.
Mesh modeling is very popular in other 3D applications most notably
entertainment, but has application in building, plant as well as civil and geospatial
disciplines.
The mesh tools can be accessed from the Surface Modeling task.
The Mesh tools
The first tool lets you create meshes. The second tool provides Boolean
operations and the last tool is the Modify Mesh tool.
Meshes 428 Feb-09

Creating a Mesh
Creating a Mesh
Meshes can be created in 5 ways:
• Mesh by Element or Shape
• Mesh by Contours
• Mesh by Points
• Place Grid Mesh
• Developable Mesh from Curves
Mesh from Element
The Mesh from Element tools allows you to convert any surface or solid to a mesh
element. Tolerance settings control the accuracy of the shapes/mesh compared to
the original surface or solid.
• Output: Lets you select the type of element to be constructed:
• Mesh Element — The constructed element is placed in the design as a
single mesh element.
• Shapes — The constructed element is placed in the design as polygons
in a graphic group.
• Chord Tolerance: If on, lets you define the maximum distance from the
constructed polygon to the original (curved) element it approximates.
• Angle Tolerance: If on, lets you define the maximum angle allowed between
adjacent facets on a smooth surface. Lower angle tolerance allows for a finer
mesh.
• Max Edge Length: If on, lets you define the maximum allowable edge length
for any facet in the constructed element. Shorter edge lengths results in a
finer mesh.
• Max Number Edges: If on, lets you define the maximum number of edges for
any facet in the constructed element.
• Keep Original: If on, the original element is retained.
Feb-09 429 Meshes

Creating a Mesh
 Exercise: Creating Meshes from Elements
User: untitled
2 Open Surfaces.dgn.
3 Open the 02_Mesh Study model.
There are 5 spheres with a radius of 0.5.
4 Select Construct Mesh (Z + 1 + 1) with the following tools settings:
Chord Tolerance: 0.25
5 Reduce the chord tolerance to 0.125 and select the next sphere.
As you decrease the chord tolerance you create a finer mesh
When the mesh is created it is created on the active level and not on the level on
which the data resides. A best practice is to create the data on one level and the
mesh on a separate level to retain control of the data.
Meshes 430 Feb-09

Creating a Mesh
Mesh By Contours
The Mesh from Contours option is useful for existing contours. The contours do
not need to be closed to create the mesh. Use the Element Selection tool to select
all the elements that you want to be included in the mesh. The Expand to
Rectangle tool setting creates a rectangle at the lowest contour elevation.
 Exercise: Creating a Mesh from Contours
1 Continuing in Surfaces.dgn, open the model 03_Mesh from Contours.
2 Use Element Selection to select all the contour elements or press Ctrl + A.
3 Select Mesh (Z + 1 + 2) with the following tools settings:
Expand to Rectangle: Enabled
4 Enter a data point in a view.
The reason that you create a Mesh Boundary and do not use the contour is that
the contour is usually a B‐spline and will create gaps if used for the bottom
surface. By extracting the boundary of the mesh the exact shape will be used to
create the bottom with an exact fit. The Boundary tool will create a series of line
elements in the same graphic group so it is best to have the graphic group lock on.
Mesh by Points works the same as using Contours. Typically you would get this
data from an external source instead of creating a collection of points. For
example, from Import XYZ data or CloudWorx.
Feb-09 431 Meshes

Modify Mesh
Place Grid Mesh
The PLace Grid Mesh is used to manually place a mesh element by defining points
of a grid. If both Close Row (U) and (V) toggles are enabled, the mesh closes itself
to form a volumetric mesh.
 How to place a grid mesh:
1. Select Place Grid Mesh tool.
2. Enter a series of data points to define the first row (in the u‐direction).
3. Reset to complete the first row.
4. Enter more data points to define other rows. After the same number of
data points is entered, as is in the first row, the row is completed and a new
row is started.
5. At the completion of the final row, Reset to complete the mesh element.
Developable Mesh by Curves
This tool is used to create a mesh approximation of the developable surface
between two curves. The generated mesh will consist of quadrilateral facets. You
then can use the Unfold Mesh tool to lay the mesh onto a plane.
Modify Mesh
Several tools are available to modify an existing mesh.
Mesh Booleans
Meshes can be combined to create volumes or larger mesh surfaces or they can
be subtracted from one another. The Mesh Boolean tools help with this.
The tool settings are as follows.
• Union ‐ Union 2 meshes.
Meshes 432 Feb-09

Modify Mesh
• Intersection ‐ Find common volume between 2 meshes.
• Difference ‐ Subtract on mesh from another.
• Project onto mesh ‐ project a profile onto a mesh.
The following exercise is an example of a site project with an existing terrain and a
finished terrain. The 2 can be combined to calculate the volume of material that
will be removed or added.
 Exercise: Using Mesh Boolean tools to create a completed site
1 Continuing in Surfaces.dgn, open the model 04_Existing Terrain Mesh.
2 Select the Visualization Task.
3 Select Light Manager (W + 1). Enable Solar and Solar Shadows.
4 Select the Render tool (Q + 1) with the following tool settings:
Target: View
Render Mode: Ray Trace
5 Enter a data point to render the view.
6 Turn on the level BuildingSiteMesh.
Feb-09 433 Meshes

Modify Mesh
The green mesh is the proposed site mesh and that it extends above the
existing terrain. You can subtract the green mesh from the yellow mesh to
create the finished site mesh.
7 In the Surfaces task, select Mesh Intersect (Z + 2 + 2).
8 Select the yellow mesh and then the green mesh.
9 Enter a data point to accept.
If you execute a mesh difference you will receive a volume that is the soil volume
that will be removed.
 Exercise: Using Mesh Boolean Subtract
1 Continuing in Surfaces.dgn, in the model 04_Existing Terrain Mesh.
2 Edit > Undo the previous command.
3 Select Mesh Subtract (Z + 2 + 3).
Meshes 434 Feb-09

Modify Mesh
4 Select the yellow mesh and then the green mesh.
5 Make the Drawing tasks active in the Task Navigation dialog.
6 Select Measure Volume (9 + 6) and enter a data point on the newly
created mesh.
The volume is 459602.8064 cubic meters.
Combining Feature Models and Meshes
Suppose that you are building a bridge and need to calculate the volume of
concrete needed for the bridge pier on bedrock. The rock surface is known and
you have a DTM model of it. You know what you want for the pier, but modeling
that in relation to the rock is not easy.
You can create the pier with a Feature Model tool and extend it through the DTM
or the mesh. Use boolean subtract to remove the bottom of the pier by selecting
the mesh. Measure the volume of the remaining feature model and you will have
a true volume.
There is no need to convert the Feature Model to a mesh. You could do that but
the results will not be as accurate. If the Mesh is too fine you may be looking for
too much accuracy with the mesh. In that case you either convert the Feature
Model to a mesh or reduce the accuracy of the mesh model with the Decimate
Feb-09 435 Meshes

Modify Mesh
Mesh tool. This will reduce the accuracy of the bedrock but not the accuracy of
the feature model.
Other Modify Mesh tools
Used to reduce, stitch, split, simplify, unfold, reverse, or extract the boundary of
an existing mesh element. Tool settings are as follows.
• Sub‐Division Mesh: Used to take an existing mesh element and create a new
mesh that is smoother than the original.
• Decimate Mesh: allows you to reduce the mesh accuracy with the tool.
• Stitch Mesh: will combine mesh elements into a single mesh.
• Split Mesh: will divide a mesh element into parts.
• Clean Up Mesh: will simplify a mesh (remove superfluous facets)
• Reverse Normals: will reverse the surface normals of a mesh element.
A simple workflow would be as follows.
1 Create contours.
2 Create Mesh.
3 Extract boundary.
4 Extrude to form sides.
5 Convert extrusion to mesh (Mesh from Element)
6 Stitch mesh and sides.
Meshes 436 Feb-09

Modify Mesh
7 Boolean to add bottom.
8 Compute volume.
 Exercise: Using the Decimate Mesh tools
1 Continuing in Surfaces.dgn, open the model 05_Building Site Design Mesh.
2 Select Element Information and click on the mesh.
3 Expand the Geometry tab to see the face and vertex count.
4 Select Clean Up Mesh (Z + 2 +9).
5 Select the green mesh and enter a data point to accept to see results.
6 Use Element Information to review the changes in face and vertex count.
7 Select Edit > Undo and experiment with the other Modify Mesh options.
 Exercise: More Decimate Mesh tools
1 Continuing in Surfaces.dgn, in the model 05_Building Site Design Mesh.
2 Select Decimate Mesh (Z + 2 + 6)and set the following tool settings:
Percent of Reduction: 30
Feb-09 437 Meshes

Mesh Utilities
Chord Tolerance: 0
Maintain Boundary: Disabled
3 Following the status bar prompt, select the green Building Site Mesh and
accept.
4 Select Mesh Subtract (Z + 2 + 3).
5 Click on Existing Terrain and Building Terrain.
6 Make the Drawing tasks active in the Task Navigation dialog.
7 Select Measure Volume (9 + 6) and measure the volume.
Note the difference in volume from the last calculation.
8 Make the Surface Modeling tasks active in the Task Navigation dialog.
You can work with 3D Studio, or *.3ds, files in MicroStation and when a Google
Earth images is captured by MicroStation the image is placed in the DGN file as a
mesh. To use the 3DS file format, select File > Open then List FIles of Type > 3DS.
THe 3DS file format is read‐only and can be saved to DGN. You cannot save a DGN
to a 3DS or edit a 3DS file.
Mesh Utilities
• Unfold Mesh ‐ Will unfold a mesh element into a flat pattern. This will not take
the place of sheet metal unfolding. The unfolding or flattening is by a random
face instead of a selected face.
• Extract Boundary ‐ Will extract a mesh element outer boundary. Useful to
extract and extrude down to create a solid base.
• Convert Mesh to Surface ‐ Used to convert a mesh element to a B‐spline
surface. The mesh element should be of the kind that does not wrap around.
Typically, meshes that are used to represent digital terrain models are good
candidates for this too
Meshes 438 Feb-09

Module Review
Module Review
Questions
1 Name 3 ways to create meshes.
2 True or False: When the mesh is created it is created on the level that the
data is on.
3 How can you calculate a volume?
4 How can you get a face and vertex count for a mesh?
Answers
1 By Element or Shape, by Contours, by Points.
2 False. When the mesh is created it is created on the active level and not on
the level that the data is on.
3 Use boolean subtract. Select Mesh Boolean and click the Mesh Subtract
icon in the tool settings.
4 Select Element Information and click on the mesh. Expand the Geometry
tab to see the face and vertex count.
Feb-09 439 Meshes

Feb-09 440 Meshes
Visualizing a 3D Design
Module Overview
When you work on a 3D model in wireframe display mode, you can see through
the model. This is useful when you want to snap to an element that, in reality,
would be hidden behind another.
You become accustomed to viewing designs in wireframe display. But when you
want to check a design, it is often helpful to use MicroStation’s rendering display
modes. These tools let you see models more realistically and include options for
creating perspective views, as well as views with hidden lines removed and
rendered images.
• Basics of MicroStation 3D view control
Module Objectives
• Use the updated visualization features of MicroStation V8i
• Change View Perspective
• Camera Settings
• Render a view
Feb-09 441 Visualizing a 3D Design

Questions
1 What is rendering?
2 Why would you apply materials to elements?
Answers
1 It produces an image of a 3D model that looks more realistic than a
wireframe image. Includes hidden line removal and surface shading.
2 To apply color, texture, transparency, and finish to surfaces.
Luxology Technology
The Luxology Technology Preview provides a hands‐on preview of Luxology's
rendering engine. In this preview, you can choose Luxology as the render method
and launch a separate process that renders the images. Because Luxology
rendering occurs outside MicroStation, you can continue to work with
MicroStation during the rendering process. The Luxology‐licensed rendering
engine will eventually replace the current rendering engine for all high‐end
photorealistic rendering.
Visualization Toolbox
The Visualization section has been revamped with all tools reorganized into six
toolboxes that are accessed from the Visualization toolbox.
Rendering
• The display/color modes settings for Radiosity now look like those for Particle
Tracing. The Intermediate/Final display options have been removed and a new
toggle has been added for Ray Trace Specular Effects.
• Brightness slider added for Smooth and Phong render modes.
Visualizing a 3D Design 442 Feb-09

• A new option in the Ray Tracing settings dialog lets you set brightness mode to
either Adapt to Brightness or Brightness Multiplier.
• Smooth shading (in hardware) now supports shadows. That is, you can set the
Display Style to display as Shadowed (Smooth shading with shadows).
• Hardware shadows are possible using the following Display Styles: Illustration
with Shadows, Monochrome with Shadows, and Transparent with Shadows.
• Smooth shading supports shadows
• The Render Setups dialog has been reorganized. It has been consolidated into
a single dialog with basic and advanced options.
• All rendering tools and dialogs let you select Render Setup.
• Distributed Rendering now is included and does not have to be downloaded as
a separate package. Its basic requirement is that all processors taking part in
the rendering have access to all the DGN, texture, RPC, and raster files to be
used in the rendering. It is also necessary that all processors taking part in the
rendering have access to the output path.
Lighting
• Changes to the way that lighting is processed means that lighting levels are
now consistent across all render modes from Smooth to Particle Trace.
• Solar lighting is now consistent across all render modes. Note that Sky Lighting
is not yet supported for Smooth.
• Ambient and Flashbulb intensities now defined in Lux (lumens per square
meter)
• Ambient and Flashbulb intensities now have a physical value, Lux.
• Light Manager, consolidates all lighting controls into single dialog
• Light Setups store all lighting settings in DGN or DGN Library
• The Light Setups dialog lets you create different lighting conditions with the
lights in the model. That is, you can create setups that have different light
states, such as on/off or changes in intensity (dimming), or with the same
lights having different settings, such as the difference between day and night
conditions. The position of the brightness slider for all render modes can be
stored in a light setup.
• The Get Latitude and Longitude from Google Earth icon in the Light Manager
lets you obtain Latitude and Longitude settings by Ctrl + clicking on the
required location in Google Earth.
• Physically based Sun and Sky color can now be determined from sun position
(and also can be used as the environment).

• A new improved Place Light tool incorporates all the settings required for the
various light sources and Sky Openings. It provides better visual feedback,
particularly for placing spotlights.
• You now can reposition and/or target directional light sources using their
handles. To do this, you use the Element Selection tool to select the required
light source and then drag the handles for the position and target to their new
locations.
• Rendering of area lights has been improved to increase performance.
• Distant Light sources now are simple fill lights and are no longer treated as
suns. They now
• can provide light in any direction, including upwards, under all
circumstances.
• no longer have sky lighting applied to them (only Solar has this option).
• are not confined to sky openings when present.
• A new lighting view attribute, Default Lighting, has been added. When off,
user‐defined scene lighting, any Global Lighting, (ambient, flash and solar) or
Source Lights (area, distant, point and spot lights) will be used.
Materials
Enhancements to the Materials tools include changes to the default method of
storing materials and multi‐layer material capability.
• By default, all palettes and their materials now are stored locally in the DGN.
Where required, you still can convert or export the materials and palettes to
external files.
• You can access material palettes from any DGN or DGN Library file. When you
select Palette > Open from the Material Editor, you can select a DGN file to
display the palettes contained within it.
• New mapping options, let you apply an image, gradient, procedure, or
Operation (Tint or Gamma) to the Color, Translucency, Specular, Reflect,
Finish, Opacity, and Bump channels. As well, each channel can be multi‐
layered. The Material Editor lets you access the mapping option via icons for
each channel.
• You can use the X, Y, (and Z for 3D procedures) lock setting in the Units
definition for a material map to lock the image into the aspect ratio of the
original image. When the lock is enabled, any changes to the X, Y, or Z settings

Rendering and Lighting
automatically is reflected in changes to the other settings to maintain the
aspect ratio of the original image or procedural texture.
• The new Glow setting determines the amount of light the material appears to
emit. For example, you can use this setting to simulate objects such as neon
lamps.
Animation
• Animation now supports AVI and WMV video format output with user‐
selectable codecs.
The Visualization task is only available in 3D models.
Visualization tasks are six separate tasks that can be accessed from the
Visualization toolbox or the Visualization tasks.

Render Task
These tasks provide the rendering tool, Render Settings dialog, Light Setups
dialog, single, multiple and panorama, render to image tools, and Query
Illumination.
Lights Task
Provides ability to manage, place and setup lighting configurations.
Cameras Task
Used to setup a camera, define camera for manipulations, match photographs
and set camera lens.
Materials Task
Used to define, apply, manipulate, query or preview materials, and to manage
environment maps.
Material Projections
These tools attach, edit, match, create projection groups, and remove material
projection.
RPC Tools
Ability to place and edit RPC cells.

Rendering and lighting settings
With the DirectX graphics and rendering engine, when you render a view
(including saving images to disk and plotting), software rendering still is used for
modes of Phong and above. For the rendering modes of Smooth and lower,
however, hardware rendering is used.
• Render by Fence ‐ Includes ray tracing, radiosity, and particle trace.
• Rendering settings and Lighting setups have been consolidated. The Render
Setups dialog has been consolidated into a single dialog with basic and

advanced options. All rendering tools and dialogs let you select the Render
Setup or Light Setup by selecting the magnifying glass in the Tool Settings.

The Render Tool
The Render Tool
Rendering as a design aid
Working in wireframe display mode, you may get confused as to the orientation
of the view. For example, you may be working in closely on a particular part of the
model. When you zoom out, you may not be able to determine the correct
orientation. In these cases, rendering the view can quickly solve the problem.
Rendering lets you see models as they would appear in real life. It is the process
by which MicroStation can show you a photograph of a design. The Render tool
provides a number of options for displaying designs on screen. These screen
displays are only temporary. Updating the view returns it to the default view
display mode.
To form the display, MicroStation first decomposes the wireframe model into a
polygon mesh in memory. It can then determine which polygons are behind
others in a view, in order to present the model realistically. With the more
complex rendering modes, you can add lighting and material definitions to help
make the image look even more lifelike.
The Rendering tool is available in each view control tool bar. Right click on any
tool in the tool bar to turn it on.
Basic rendering modes such as Hidden Line, Filled Hidden Line and Smooth have
been used with the View Display Mode tool. So you will now examine more
complex rendering modes.
Rendering modes
While these rendering modes do not take lighting or materials into account, they
can be useful during the design process to quickly check a design.
 Exercise: Rendering views
User: untitled
2 Open Render_exercise.dgn from the class data set.

The Render Tool
3 Open the model 01_Ring.
This model contains a ring. It has been saved with 6 identical views open.
You will use these to display the results of the various rendering options in
order to compare the results.
As well as the elements, spot light sources have been placed in this model.
This will become obvious when you look at the shaded rendering modes.
4 Make the Visualization task active in the Task navigation dialog.
Target: View
Render Setup: Phong_View1
Render Mode: Phong
Light Setup: Untitled
Antialias: None
6 Enter a data Point in View 1.
View 1 updates, showing the model in Phong render mode.
Hint: Phong rendering calculates the color of each pixel in a view, which
requires more computation than Smooth rendering. The result is a
more accurate shading in which the position of light sources can be
more easily seen by their reflection in surfaces. Phong rendering
optionally can generate shadows from a number of the light sources
available. In addition, the gems have a single transparency value, no
reflectivity and do not appear realistic.
7 Select the Render tool (Q) with the following tool settings:

The Render Tool
Target: View
Render Setup: Ray Trace_View2
Antialias: None
View 2 updates, showing the model in Ray Trace render mode.
Both Phong and Ray Trace provide more accurate shaded images, which
can include shadows.
Ray tracing produces much more realistic images than those you have seen
previously. With ray tracing, the image is generated by simulating the recursive
reflection of light rays in the selected view. Even with this primitive design, you
will see that ray tracing gives a more realistic result, with shadows produced from
the point light source in the lamp.
Note: When you use ray tracing, point light sources are capable of casting shadows if
Shadow is enabled in the light source definition, and Shadows are turned on for
the view in the Rendering View Attributes dialog.
9 Select the Render tool (Q) with the following tool settings:
Target: View
Render Setup: Radiosity_View3
Render Mode: Radiosity

The Render Tool
Antialias: None
View 3 updates, showing the model in Radiosity render mode.
Note: Radiosity solving is a technique that calculates the light that is reflected
between diffuse surfaces. This technique is not technically rendering
but a rendering preprocess lighting solution that can be
rendered.Radiosity solutions are view independent.
Target: View
Render Setup: Particle Trace_View4
Render Mode: Particle Trace
Antialias: None

The Render Tool
View 4 updates, showing the model in Particle Trace render mode.
Radiosity and Particle Trace rendering options provide much more realistic
images, particularly where the inter reflection of light between surfaces is
important. Neither option is a rendering method, as such. Both create a
lighting solution, which are then rendered with either Smooth or Ray
Trace to produce the final picture.
Radiosity and Particle Tracing modes calculate the effect of lighting in the
scene, including shadows and reflection of light from surfaces. For
example, a white light reflected off a red wall would have a red tinge to it
in real life, which Ray Tracing alone does not simulate. Without a Radiosity
or Particle Tracing solution present, the Smooth and Ray Trace rendering
methods only show direct reflection of light sources from surfaces
13 Select Utilities > Render > Luxology and a new window will open. At this
time the new Luxology rendering capability works separate from
MicroStation V8i. Set the following Luxology options:
Width: 395
Height: 421
View: Active
Background: Color
Setup: Luxology Exterior Draft Quality
Note: These Height and Width are only to create a rendering the same size as
the other views in this exercise.

Antialiased Rendering
14 Enter a point in View 5.
The Luxology render application in the initial V8i release is modeless and coexists
with the standard MicroStation view windows. The Luxology application is multi‐
threaded, therefore you can continue working in MicroStation while the
rendering process is in progress. This first release of Luxology is intended for
evaluation and workflow testing only.
When you are producing final images, the antialias setting for Shading Type
reduces the jagged lines that appear where an edge is not exactly horizontal or
vertical on the screen. Antialias is available for all render modes except
Wiremesh.
Antialiased images take longer to render than for the regular setting but the
resulting image can be much better. Antialiasing quality is determined by the
Antialiasing Quality setting in the Rendering Settings dialog. This, in turn, controls
the Antialiasing Grid Size. If you select Custom as the Antialiasing Quality setting,
then you can enter your own figure for the Antialiasing Grid Size.
For the standard rendering methods (up to Phong), antialiasing causes the view to
be rendered multiple times. The number of times that the view is rendered is the
square of the value for the Antialiasing Grid Size. If you change the Antialiasing

Grid Size to 4, the view will be rendered 16 times to create the antialiased image.
With Ray Tracing a different system is used, where each pixel is sampled a number
of times, depending on the Quality setting.
Jitter Samples allows you to take anti‐aliasing samples in a non‐uniform fashion.
Depth of Field allows varying of focus depending on distance from camera. Target
of camera always remains in focus.
 Exercise: Compare Normal and Antialiased
1 Continuing in the model 01_Ring in Render_exercise.dgn, select the
Render tool (Q + 1) with the following tool settings:
Target: View
Render Setup: Particle Trace_Antialias_View5
Antialias: Medium
The view takes longer to render with antialiasing.
3 Compare View 2 with View 5.
Note, in particular, the difference along the edges of the gems where the
jaggedness is very apparent in View 2, but has been smoothed out in View 5.

View Perspective
View Perspective
Rendering can help you determine the orientation of a view. You also have
another option; using perspective. Perspective adds depth to a view, whether in
wireframe mode or one of the shaded modes. You can use perspective to help you
determine a view’s orientation.
By default, MicroStation displays views in parallel projection. There is no
perspective displayed. When you are setting perspective for a view, you can use
the preset perspective settings or interactively set your desired perspective. The
perspective tools have changed in V8i and can be accessed in the View Tools, and
View Control tools.
 Exercise: Setting perspective dynamically for a view
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, open the model 02_Bridge.
2 Make View 2 the Active view
3 Select the Change View Perspective tool from either the View Control
toolbox or the View Tools and select Extra Wide Camera.

View Perspective
4 Continue with View 2 as the Active View and select Normal Camera.
5 Continue with View 2 as the Active View and select Telephoto Camera.
6 To turn off the perspective in a view select the Camera off tool.
Note: When working with large models, where screen updates are slower, it may be
more convenient to work with a Clip Volume.
Toggling perspective
When you set perspective in a view you are really creating a camera view, a view
that is more natural looking, as you would see it through a camera viewfinder.
Having set a specific or custom perspective in a view, you can toggle it using the

Render Settings
Camera settings. To disable perspective, you just disable the Camera View
Attribute. This lets you retain the perspective setting for future use, and you
simply turn on the camera for the view.
Render Settings
In the previous exercises you noticed that the Render Setup option in the Render
Tool Settings used specific names rather than the Untitled option available in the
drop down option list. Render Settings can be customized to specific parameters
defined in the Render Settings dialog. In prior versions of MicroStation these were
called General Settings under Settings > Rendering > General. All Render settings
are in one dialog, Render Settings.

Render Settings
To access the Render Settings dialog use the magnifying tool in the Render Tool
Settings or Settings > Rendering > Settings.
Included in the Render Settings dialog are various tabs for customizing your
settings. For example the saved Render Setup, Phong_View1, only renders in the
Phone mode.

Render Settings
Selecting the New Setup tool in the Render Setup dialog allows you to define a
new setup and right clicking on a name allows you to rename a saved setup.
Shadows are controlled in the Render Mode Tab under the Raytrace category.
• Per Light ‐ Samples are controlled by the shadows setting for each light source.
• Sharp ‐ Number of samples 1.
• Soft ‐ Coarse ‐ Number of samples 16.
• Soft ‐ Medium ‐ Number of samples 64.
• Soft ‐ Fine ‐ Number of samples 160.
• Soft ‐ Very Fine ‐ Number of samples 256.
For transparency to display, it must be on in both the Render Settings dialog and
the View Attributes dialog.
Each material also has a shadows setting, as do the light sources. You can specify
that materials and light sources not cast shadows.

Render Settings
Stroke Tolerance
This tool is now located in the Render Settings on the All Settings tab under
Render Mode. This setting has a direct effect on the time taken to render a view,
as well as the accuracy of curved surfaces. When the system first decomposes the
model into a mesh of polygons, the deviation of the polygon mesh from the
original surface is controlled by the Stroke Tolerance, which affects the quality of
rendered images as follows.
Larger Stroke Tolerance values reduce processing time but the rendered curved
surfaces can be farther away from the original surfaces. This is most noticeable
around the edges of surfaces.
Smaller Stroke Tolerance values increase processing time but the rendered
surfaces are closer to the original. These views take slightly longer to render, but
the image is much better with the curved surfaces looking very smooth around
the edges.
Generally, the default Stroke Tolerance setting of 0.500 is adequate for most
images.
Shadows
For Ray Traced images, shadows may be generated by a number of the available
light sources, as follows.
• Ray Tracing: Point Lights, Spot Lights, Distant Lights, Area Lights, Solar lighting
and Sky Shadows.
While Phong rendering can also produce shadows, where accurate shadows are
required, the Ray Trace option should be used. Phong rendering uses shadow
maps, which approximate shadows. The accuracy of these shadow maps are
controlled by the Shadow Filter Size and the Shadow Tolerance settings in the
Rendering Settings dialog. In either case, you can render with or without
shadows.

Render Settings
To display shadows in a rendered view for:
• Phong rendering: In the Rendering Settings dialog, enable Shadows for the
view being used to create the rendered image. Shadows for Phong rendering
can be enabled/disabled for each view individually.
• Ray Tracing: Shadows must be on, in the Render Settings dialog. Ray Tracing
settings apply to all views.
Clearing Phong shadow maps
When you have shadows enabled for Phong rendering, the shadow maps are
calculated the first time that you render the model. You can have these saved for
future sessions by enabling the Save Phong Shadow Maps in the Rendering
Settings dialog. This can reduce the processing time, but if you subsequently
change the geometry in any way, then you should clear the shadow maps so that
new ones are created. You do this by selecting Clear Shadow Map(s) in the Light
Manager dialog under Lights > Clear Shadow Map(s). Alternatively, you can type
LIGHT CLEAR.

Lights Task
Ray Tracing and shadows
With ray tracing, the shadows are calculated each time you render a view. If you
change the model in any way or turn off the display of elements, the changes are
taken into account and correct shadows produced.
Lights Task
Lighting is a key ingredient to producing rendered images of your design. If you
have no lighting, your rendering appears as a blank view. MicroStation gives you
the choice of 2 classes of lighting, Global and Source lighting. You can use either
or both to illuminate your model. Source lighting consists of special lighting cells,
which you place in your models, while Global lighting is defined entirely from a
dialog.
Lights are calculated with true physics so they diminish in intensity over distance.
Default Lighting
Default Lighting consists of a shadow casting light over the viewer’s shoulder, plus
some ambient and a flash. This lighting is ideal for modeling in 3D, as it always
provides very good illumination of a model relative to the observer. Because

Lights Task
Default Lighting is a view attribute, you must enabled it to be used to illuminate
your model.
To use Default Lighting, you must enable it for any view(s) where you want use it.
This is done by clicking the Adjust View Brightness tool on the view border and
turning on the Default Lighting toggle. When the Brightness tool is clicked, you
will see a brightness slider and a toggle for enabling Default Lighting; checking the
option turns on the Default Lighting for the view. The icon on the Adjust View
Brightness tool changes to reflect the current state.
When the Display Mode of a Display Style is Shaded, that is, anything other than
wireframe and hidden line, then the hardware renderer uses Default Lighting or
the user‐defined lights (Scene Lighting), depending on the Default Lighting view
attribute.
If a Light Setup other than From View is chosen, the Render tool overrides this
view attribute and uses scene lighting.
When using the Render tool, to see the effects of Default Lighting, turn on Default
Lighting for the view you are rendering; make sure that Light Setup: From View is
chosen. To render a view using scene lighting, you can chose any light setup other
than From View, or render a view with Default Lighting off. If you choose Light
Setup: From View and enter a data point, the current state of the view attribute
Default Lighting for that view determines which lighting is used.
Light Setups
This dialog allows you to create custom lighting setups using Ambient, Flashbulb,
Solar, Sky Light or Source Light combinations. Brightness modifications made to
either the Render tool or the Adjust View Brightness tool, in the View Tools,
directly changes the Display Brightness in the Light Setups dialog. The highlighted
Light Setup will turn blue, indicating a change was made. Click on the Save Setup
tool or File > Save to capture these new changes.

Lights Task
Light Manager
This dialog is used to turn on and off light type or make property changes to
Brightness, Ambient, Flashbulb, Solar, and Sky Light lighting.

Global Lighting
Global Lighting
Global lighting affects all elements in a file.
Ambient
Ambient lighting affects every element in the model. It adds lighting equally to all
elements. As you increase the value of Ambient lighting, the amount of contrast
diminishes. Ambient lighting is useful for illuminating surfaces that would not
otherwise receive light. No shadows are cast by Ambient light. Settings for this
light source let you adjust its Lux, Color, and Temperature.
Left image has only ambient light with no reflections and right image has light color modified.

Global Lighting
Flashbulb
Like a flashbulb on a camera, this light source illuminates all elements that are
facing the viewing position or camera. Useful for checking models during
construction, you also can use it to add light to a final image. No shadows are cast
by this light source. Settings in the Global Lighting dialog, let you adjust the Lux,
Color and temperature of the Flashbulb.
Flashbulb displays light from spot lights reflected from road.
Solar
Used to simulate lighting from the Sun, Solar lighting has settings that let you set
any of the following:
• Latitude, longitude, time and date of the rendering.
• Solar Direction Vectors of the sunlight.
• Azimuth Angle and Altitude Angle of the Sun.
You can input this data manually in the appropriate fields, or you can use dialogs
to select a city from a list or pick a location from a map of the world. These dialogs
are opened by clicking one of the following options in the Location section of the
Global Lighting dialog:
• Cities — opens the Location By City dialog from which you can select a city
from the list.
• Map — opens Google Earth. Enable View > Grid to display longitude and
latitude and View>Show Time>Automatically. With this method, you must still
enter the GMT Offset manually.
• Zones — opens the GMT Offset By Time Zone dialog from which you can
select a time zone.
Optionally, you can turn on Solar Shadows to view the effect of shadows
generated by the Solar lighting (sunlight) when rendering with the Phong or Ray

Global Lighting
Trace options. As with other Global light sources, you can specify the Lux, Color
and temperature of the simulated sunlight. Here are some examples for January
2009, city Philadelphia, USA.
Left image light parameters set for 9:00 AM, middle 12:00 noon and right image 5:00 PM.
 Exercise: Setting the Flashbulb and Ambient lighting
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, open the model 02_Bridge.
2 In View 2, turn on the Background View Attribute.
3 From the Visualization Tasks, select the Light Manager tool (W + 1), or
from the main menu bar, select Settings > Rendering > Light Manager.
4 In the Light Manager dialog, set the following:
Display Brightness: Adapt To Brightness = 1.00
Select Button: Side of Bridge (point for middle of brightness range)
Ambient: Disabled
Flashbulb: Enabled
Lux: 200
Solar: Disabled
5 Select the Render tool with the following tool settings:

Global Lighting
Target: View
Render Setup: Untitled
Render Mode: RayTrace
Antialias: None
The view is ray traced but it is quite dark.
7 In the Light Manager dialog, enable Ambient and set its value to Lux = 7.
The appearance is much brighter. Ambient lighting has added illumination
equally to all elements in the view.
 Exercise: Setting Solar lighting
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, in the model 02_Bridge, in the
Lighting Manager dialog, set the following:
Ambient: Enabled set to 7
Flashbulb: Disabled

Global Lighting
Solar: Enabled
Intensity: 3
Shadow: Enabled, Sharp
Resolution: 0
Cloudiness: 0
Air Quality: Rural, 2.50
Type: Time & Location
Date: 2/1/2009
Time: 12:00 AM
Select Philadelphia from the list of cities and, in the Time section, set the
following:
Time: 12:00 PM, Standard
Date: September 27
Year: 2007
2 Use the Render tool to ray trace View 4.
3 Click Cities and select Melbourne as the city.

Source Lighting
4 Ray trace View 3.
5 Note that the light intensity has changed along with the shadow length
and direction.
Source Lighting
Unlike Global Illumination, which is controlled solely from a dialog, Source lighting
consists of light sources in the form of special cells that you place in the design.
This is done with the Define Light tool, which you will look at shortly. First, a brief
description of source lighting.
Source lighting cells are stored in the cell library lighting.cel, which is accessed
automatically by the Place Light tool. You do not have to attach this cell library
before placing light sources. The Place Light tool has various settings for each light
source type, which you enter prior to placing the light source. The same tool lets
you modify them, if necessary, at a later date. The cells consist of construction
class elements and are placed by default on level Default.
Shadow generation from source lighting
Not all rendering modes support the generation of shadows, even if the Shadow
setting is enabled in the light source and for the view. For general rendering, only
Phong and Ray Trace modes support the generation of shadows. Where Radiosity

Source Lighting
solving or a Particle Tracing solution is used, Smooth rendering also can display
shadows.
Place Light tool
Source lighting provides a choice of 4 lighting types; Point, Spot, Area, Directional
and Sky Opening. These light sources provide lighting as follows.
Point
Similar to a light globe, point light sources radiate light in all directions, from a
point light source. Shadows can be generated by this light source in Ray Trace
rendering only; they are not supported by Phong rendering.
Spot
Directional light source that behaves similar to a flashlight. Spot Lights have a
conical beam. This can be defined to taper off to zero at the edge of the beam.
You can define the Cone Angle for the beam and a Delta Angle through which the

Source Lighting
beam reduces from full intensity to zero. Shadows can be generated by this light
source for Phong and RayTrace rendering.
Area
Created from existing polygons in the design, these light sources are useful for
simulating fluorescent lighting, for example.
Directional
Directional light source that produces parallel light rays throughout the design,
similar to sunlight. It does not matter where in the model that you place one of
these light sources, all surfaces that face the direction of a Distant light source are

Source Lighting
illuminated by it. Shadows can be generated by this light source for Phong and
RayTrace rendering.
Sky Opening
Used with Ray Tracing, Radiosity solving, and Particle Tracing, to generate more
efficient solutions for indoor scenes lit with Solar Lighting, Sky Light, or Distant
Light sources, through an opening in a wall or ceiling. Rather than consider the
entire “sky” for calculating the lighting effect, only the lighting that is visible
through the opening is considered.
Each source lighting cell that you place in a design can have different settings for
such things as Intensity and Color. You can specify whether or not they cast
shadows for the supported rendering modes.

Source Lighting
Place Light tool settings
You use the Define Light tool to create and modify light sources in your design.
You can open the Global Lighting dialog using the Global button in the tool
settings.
Tool settings for the Define Light tool are as follows.
Tool Setting Effect
Preset • Option menu that lets you select from a list of predefined lights.
• Presets available for Point, Spot and Area lights.
Name Text field that lets you define a name for the light source that you are creating.
Giving light sources unique names helps you identify them if you want to modify them
in some way, or delete them. Where no name is input, the light is given a default name
that identifies the type of light source. Where there are other light sources present of
the same type, with the same name, then the name is incremented. For example, Spot
Light, Spot Light (1), Spot Light (2), and so on, for Spot Light sources.
Color Opens the color dialog, which is used to specify a color for the light source.
Temperature Option menu that lets you assign a color temperature to the light source.
Intensity Sets the intensity of the light source (default is 1.0) for standard rendering (up to
Phong). For radiosity, particle tracing, and ray tracing, that use real world lighting, acts
as a multiplier to the Lumens setting.
Lumens Sets the light source brightness, for use with ray tracing, radiosity solving, and particle
tracing. Acts as a multiplier of the light source's Color and Intensity values to simulate
real world lighting values. This value, when multiplied by the Intensity of the light,
specifies the overall brightness, in Lumens.
Bulbs Lets you assign multiple bulbs, with the defined settings, to the light source.
Cell Size (Distant, Point, and Spot Lights only) Sets the size of the light cell, in master units.
Bulb Size (Point Lights and Spot Lights only) Sets the size of the light source.
For soft shadows calculations, the ray tracing process assumes a default size of 12
inches for all point and spot lights. This can cause unnatural lighting in situations where
light sources are placed within fixtures, where the fixtures are expected to cast
shadows. For these situations, you can change the default size with this setting.

Source Lighting
Tool Setting Effect
Shadow If on, the light source can cast shadows in a Phong, or Ray Traced, rendered image, as
well as with a Radiosity solution, or a Particle Traced image.
In Phong rendered images, only Distant, Area, and Spot lights can cast shadows.
In Ray Traced, Particle Traced, or Radiosity rendered images, all light source types can
cast shadows.
For Ray Tracing, sharpness of the shadows is controlled by the Shadows setting on the
Render Mode tab of the Render Settings dialog when mode is set to Ray Trace. If,
however, Shadows is set to Per Light, then the sharpness of the shadows is controlled
by the individual light source's Shadow option menu setting. This determines the
number of samples used to calculate the shadows.
Sharp — Number of samples — 1
Soft ‐ Coarse — Number of samples — 16
Soft ‐ Medium — Number of samples — 64
Soft ‐ Fine — Number of samples — 160
Soft ‐ Very Fine — Number of samples — 256
Custom — Appears when an existing light source has a number of samples that differs
from those listed above.
IES Data If on, and an IES file has been selected, then IES data is used in the calculation of the
light from the light source.
Rotation Lets you enter a value to rotate the photometric characteristics for the IES light source.
Cone Angle Spot Light only) Sets the angle of the beam cone of a spot light source. Used to “focus”
the beam.
Delta Angle (Spot Light only) Sets the angle, at the edge of the beam cone, through which a Spot
Light beam falls from full intensity to zero.
In the following example you will add light sources to a design and check the
effects by rendering the view. To place the light sources, you will use AccuDraw to
position the required points in 3D space.
 Exercise: Place an Area light source as a fluorescent ceiling light
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, open the model 03_Lighting Model.
View 2 is a camera view that has been set up for rendering. Views 1, 3 and
4 have been set up to simplify adding the light sources.
Currently, the Light Manager has Ambient and Flashbulb enabled for
illuminating the scene.
3 Enable the Solar light in the Light Manager dialog with the following
settings:.

Source Lighting
Intensity: 15
Shadow: Sharp
Date: 7/21/2009
Time: 09:30 AM
City: Philadelphia
4 Select Place Light (W + 2) with the following tool settings:
Name: Flourescent1
Intensity: 80
Lumens: 1000
Shadow: Soft‐Fine
5 In View 4, identify the block element inside the overhead fluorescent light,
and indicate the direction. Any direction is ok at this time, you will change
direction later.

Source Lighting
6 Repeat step 5 for the second overhead fluorescent light and name it
Flourescent2. The following is an image of the data in the Light Manager.
7 In the Light Manager dialog enable the Highlight icon. Enabling this icon
will permit you to select the lights from the Light Manger dialog and have
them display their edit handles.
8 Select Flourescent1 in the Light Manger dialog, and the Area Light is
available for editing, in all views. Select a light handle and drag it to a point
in the scene to determine the lights direction.
9 Repeat for flourescent2 and change the target to the furniture.
Note: Light Direction can be changed at any time by selecting the light source using
the Element selection tool and adjusting the light target handle or by enabling
the Highlight tool in the Light Manager and selecting the light source name.

Source Lighting
10 Use the Render tool to Ray Trace render View 2.
When you placed the light source, you gave it a name if no name was given then
the system would generate a default name, Area Light. Any additional point lights
would default to Area Light(1), Area Light (2), and so on.
Naming light cells can help you later if you want to edit them. Using the Define
Light tool, you don’t need to have light source cells displayed in a view, you can
simply select them from the list.
Point light sources radiate light in all directions, you do not have to consider
direction. With Spot Light lighting, a directional lighting source, you must define
the direction in which the light is shining.
 Exercise: Edit a light source
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, in the model 03_Lighting Model,
select the Light Manager tool with the following tool settings:
Table Lamp: Enabled (Turn On)
2 Render View 2 with:

Source Lighting
4 To edit the Table Lamp select the Light Manager, select Table Lamp and
change the following settings:
Preset: halogen 75W Bulb
Shadow: Soft ‐ Medium
5 To render the Table Lamp area rather than the entire scene, place a fence
around the Table Lamp area. Render View 2 with Target set to Fence.
Left image shows fence placement and right image is results of render with fence as Target.
Note: Using a fence lets you try numerous iterations of light settings without waiting
for entire scene to render. After you are satisfied with your settings then render
the entire scene.

Source Lighting
6 Delete the fence, change your Render Target back to View and Render
View 2.
7 Try various light settings. Enable all lights, change colors, Presets, Date,
and custom Lumen settings.
 Exercise: Rendering with Luxology
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, in the model 03_Lighting Model,
select Utilities > Render > Luxology with the following settings:
Setup: Luxology Interior Good Quality
2 Select the Luxology Render tool from the dialog the scene will render in
the Luxology View Window.

Materials
Materials
Few things add as much realism to rendered images as textures and materials.
With material definitions applied to elements in your 3D model, instead of
producing simple colored surfaces, realistic textured surfaces are displayed.
By default, MicroStation rendering assumes that each design file surface is made
of a material with a smooth shiny surface, such as plastic. Material definitions let
you specify that an element is water or wood or brickwork. When rendered,
instead of seeing the plastic element, you see the specified material. Each
material definition can include a pattern map and/or a bump map, as well as
other settings determining the finish and transparency/translucency of the
material. Pattern maps and bump maps are image files that are applied to
surfaces during the rendering process.

Materials
Material and Projection Tasks
Minor adjustments have been made to the Materials portion of the Visualization
tasks in MIcroStation V8i. Materials and Material Projections are in separate tasks
and are highlighted below.
Pattern maps
A pattern map is an image file that is applied to an element. You can think of this
in terms of wall‐papering a wall. When you render an element that has a pattern
map applied to it, instead of seeing the element (wall) you see the pattern map
(wall‐paper). MicroStation provides a large range of image files, in JPG and TIF
format, that can be used for pattern maps. These are stored in the
…\Workspace\system\materials\pattern folder. Additionally, you can use your
own image files as pattern maps.
Bump maps
Like pattern maps, a bump map is an image file that is applied to an element.
Where it differs from a pattern map is that a bump map applies roughness or
texture to a rendered surface. While it is not mandatory for bump map images to
be grey‐scale, quite often they are. MicroStation uses the contrast in the bump
map image to calculate texture, or bumps, in the rendered image. As part of the
material definition, you can vary the height of these bumps. This lets you use the
same bump map image file, for example, to create cast metal from very rough‐
cast through to nearly smooth.

Materials
Materials stored in DGN
By default, all palettes and their materials now are stored locally in the DGN.
Where required, you still can convert or export the materials and palettes to
external files.
Material palettes can be used from any DGN or DGN Library
You can access material palettes from any DGN or DGN Library file. When you
select Palette > Open from the Material Editor, you can select a DGN file to display
the palettes contained within it.
Material tables
When you assign materials from a palette file to an element in a design, the
assignment is stored in a material table. By default, material tables are given the
same name as the design file but have a .mat suffix. Also, by default, material
tables are saved in the same folder as the design file. You can save them with
another name and in another folder, if you wish.
Material Tables can be stored in the DGN file itself so no external file is needed.
Hint: Using Element Selection is a quick way to find and change material assignments
and attachments.
Material Map sizes locked to aspect of map image
You can use the X, Y, (and Z for 3D procedures) lock setting in the Units definition
for a material map to lock the image into the aspect ratio of the original image.
When the lock is enabled, any changes to the X, Y, or Z settings automatically is
reflected in changes to the other settings to maintain the aspect ratio of the
original image or procedural texture.
The Apply Material Tool
Using the Apply Material tool, you can:
• Assign material definitions to elements in the design file either by Color/Level
or as an Attribute.

Materials
• Check the material that is attached to an element.
• Remove material definitions from elements in the design file.
• Preview how a material will look on an element.
When you select the Apply Material tool, the Apply Material tool settings opens.
From this dialog, you can load palette files, apply materials or open the Define
Materials dialog.
From left to right, the icons across the top of the Apply Material tool’s dialog let
you select from:
• Assign by Level/Color — to attach a material to elements of a particular
color(s) on a particular level(s) in the model.
• Remove Assignment — to remove an existing level/color material assignment
from elements in the model.
• Attach — to “physically” attach a material definition to an element, or a face
of a solid, in the model. This setting take precedence over level/color
assignments.
• Remove Attachment — remove a material attachment from an element or the
face of a solid in the model.
• Query — to check for a material assignment to an element in the model. With
AccuSnap active, you simply hover the pointer over the element being
queried, and a tool tip displays the assignment or attachment information.
• Preview — lets you preview the appearance of a material on an element in the
model. This is a temporary assignment (in memory) to the selected element.
• Environment Maps — lets you assign environment maps to a model. These are
image files that will appear in reflections in materials, or through transparent
materials where normally the background color of the model would be seen.

Materials
 Exercise: Apply Materials to the wall and floor elements
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, open the model 04_Materials 1.
2 Select the Render tool with Render Mode set to Ray Trace.
You can use Real World Lighting so that you can interactively adjust the
Brightness and Contrast of the rendered views. The Walls and Floor do not
have materials applied.
3 Select Apply Material (A + 2).
The Apply Material dialog appears. Note that the material table file name
displayed on the Table button is the same as that of the DGN file.

Materials
4 From the Material option menu, select Walls.
5 If necessary, click the Assign by Level/Color icon then identify and accept
the wall element.
6 Use the Render tool to Ray Trace the view, and use the Brightness and
Contrast sliders to tweak the image as desired. The wall now is rendered
as a cream colored wall.
7 Repeat the previous steps, applying the Floor material to the floor shape
(red) element.
When you have applied material(s) to elements in the design, it is a good
idea to save the material assignment table. Currently, the material
assignments are in memory only. You will now save the material table to
disk.
8 In the Apply Material tool dialog, click the Save button (to the right of the
Table name field).
9 This material assignments table will be loaded automatically the next time
that you open this DGN file.
You may want different faces of a solid to have different materials assigned to
them. You can do this with the Attach option. This lets you specify that a face of a
solid has a particular material, while the remaining parts of the solid still may
have an assignment by Level/Color.

Materials
 Exercise: Attaching a different material to faces of a solid
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, open the model 05_Materials 2.
2 Click the Attach icon in the Apply Material tool icon bar.
3 Click the Open palette icon.
4 Select the Brick palette.
5 From the Materials list, select brick back alley.
6 In View 2, identify each solid and select the each face of the table bases.
Use Ray Trace and render View 2. Remember to use (Ctrl+) for multiple
faces.

Multi-Layered Materials
7 Open the palette Wood.
8 From the Materials list, select Flat Pine.
9 In View 2, identify the solid and select the table top and side faces.
10 Use the Render tool to Ray Trace View 2.
Multi‐Layered Materials
You can create materials that consist of multiple layers of pattern maps, bump
maps, procedures, gradients, and/or operations (tint or gamma setting).
New mapping options let you apply an image, gradient, procedure, or Operation
(Tint or Gamma) to the Color, Translucency, Specular, Reflect, Finish, Opacity, and
Bump channels. As well, each channel can be multi‐layered. The Material Editor
lets you access the mapping option via icons for each channel.
You can define the way that the pattern/bump maps are blended and you can
assign a value for opacity, to allow one map to be seen through another.

Adding layers of pattern maps, lets you create more complex materials. For
example, you can create a brick wall that includes 1 or more signs, or have a
material with partial opacity.
You can add layers to your material definitions, with various blend modes. The
layers can be toggled as required.
Warning: Multi‐layered materials are not backward compatible with MicroStation V8 XM
Edition v8.9.2 and earlier.
 Exercise: Creating and using Multi‐Layered Materials
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, in the model 05_Materials 2, from the
Visualization task open the Materials Editor (A + 1).
2 Open the Brick node on the left pane and highlight the material brick back
alley and click the Pattern Map icon.

3 From the top left click New Layer and select vent01.jpg.
4 Set the following:

Projection modes for Pattern/Bump Maps
5 In View 2 zoom in on the right side of front table and Render using Ray
Trace.
Projection modes are assigned to elements, rather than the material. This lets you
use the same material with various projection modes depending on the
geometry.
Control projection modes using the Materials task.
Projection modes for materials
Several projection modes are available:
• Directional Drape ‐ Mapping is applied relative to the direction specified by
the Orientation setting

• Cubic ‐ Mapping is applied in a cubic fashion relative to the geometry.
• Spherical ‐ Mapping is applied in a spherical fashion relative to the geometry.
• Cylindrical ‐Mapping is applied in a cylindrical fashion relative to the
geometry.
Warning: Material projection modes are not backward‐compatible with MicroStation V8 XM
Edition v8.9.2 and earlier.
Tools for controlling Material Projections
The Materials task adds 5 tools for handling material projections.
 Exercise: Using Material Projections
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, open the model 06_Projections.
2 Assign the material ‐ Brick Aged to the geometry.
3 Render to see the results. Take note of the sphere.
4 Select Attach Projection (S + 1) with the following tool setting:
Method: Spherical
5 Enter a data point on the sphere.

6 Render to see result.
7 Repeat with the cylinder and Slab.
8 Select the Edit Projection tool (S + 2) with the following settings:
Select: Scale Projection
Attach To: Element
Mapping: Cubic
9 Click on the Arrows to select a variety of scale directions.

The Define Camera Task
10 Us the Remove Projection tool (S + 5) and remove the projection from the
slab.
11 Make a copy of the slab and place it on the side of the original slab.
12 Attach a new projection (S + 1) to both of the slabs.
13 Edit the Projection scale of one of the slabs.
14 Select the Match Projection tool (S + 3) with the following settings:
Enable: Projection Scale
15 Select the slab that the projection scale was modified then select the
other slab to match this project on this slab.
You can use this task to create, edit and modify Cameras for Rendering.

Setup Camera
The Setup Camera tool (E + 1) is designed specifically to set up views for
rendering. When using this tool, a camera view is selected and you have the
option of displaying its viewing cone in all other views that display the same
volume of the design file. When this tool is selected you are prompted to select an
active view. In this example View 2 the Right Isometric view is selected. You now
have the option of selecting the camera position and target using any of the other
open views. You can work in one view and use AccuDraw to manipulate the
camera and target position. I
After an active view is selected you can then select the type of lens available from
the options list and enable Camera Height, Target Height or select these positions
using AccuDraw and AccuSnap on the view geometry.
Left image is starting view and right image is selecting camera and target position in top view.
Resulting image in view 2 the active view.

Define Camera
The Define Camera tool (E + 2)is used to control the movement and settings of the
camera. You can manipulate the camera view cone in the other views or you can
use the advanced tools from the Define Camera tool settings to manipulate the
view camera.
With the Define Camera tool, you can manipulate the view cone using the handles
that appear at the eyepoint, target, center and a fourth handle that lets you alter

the viewing angle. The target handle is located at the center of a rectangle that
represents the image plane.
Target Handle
View Angle Handle

Center Handle
Camera Handle
Using these handles, you can manipulate the view cone as follows.
• Camera handle — positions the camera or eyepoint relative to the target.
• Center handle — position the entire view cone without changing the relative
positions of the camera and target.
• Target handle — positions the target relative to the camera or eyepoint.
• Viewing Angle handle — changes the viewing angle of the camera. Reducing
the view angle is equivalent to using a telephoto zoom lens. Without moving
the camera or target locations, you can zoom in or out by changing the view
angle.
To change the position of a view cone handle
1. Enter a data point on the handle that you want to move.
2. Move the handle to the new location.
3. Enter a second data point to complete the change.
You can enter a data point on the handle and hold down the data button as you
move the handle. Releasing the data button completes the move.
You need 2 views open to quickly manipulate the view cone. For example, you can
use the Top view to manipulate the view cone horizontally and the Front or Right
views to manipulate it in the vertical direction.

 Exercise: Using the Define Camera tool
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, open the model 07_Camera.
2 Select Define Camera (E + 2) with the following tool settings:
Continuous View Updates: Enabled
Display View Cone: Enabled
Projection: Three Point
You are prompted to Select active view.
This becomes the Active View, as shown in the Define Camera tool
settings. The View Cone for the selected view appears in the remaining
views.
4 Enter a data point on one of the view cone handles in View 1, 3 or 4. Zoom
out if you have to.
5 Move the pointer and observe that the camera view (View 2) updates
continuously as you manipulate the view cone.
If you disable Continuous View Updates, the view updates after you have
moved the handle.
Try all the view cone handles to see how they relate to each other.
Using the view cone and a camera view in this fashion gives you visual feedback
on just what the camera view is displaying. Currently, the Projection is set to
Three Point, which displays the camera view much as you would see it through a
normal camera.
Note: You can also manipulate the view by moving the cursor in View 2 and selecting
one of the tool settings icons for specific actions. By clicking on, More, you can
display windows to enter specific numerical data for camera manipulation.
Camera action options
There are 9 icons across the top of the Define Camera tool settings which let you
control the camera view cone directly. These icons match options in the Camera
Action option menu.

Camera Option Effect
Pan Move the camera or target radially relative to each other, either horizontally or
vertically.
Pan Horizontal Move the camera or target radially (horizontally) relative to each other
Pan Vertical Move the camera or target radially (vertically) relative to each other.
Roll Roll or tilt the camera.
Dolly/Elevate Move the camera sideways or vertically.
Dolly Move the camera in, out, or sideways.
Lens Focal Length Change the lens focal length.
Lens View Angle Change the Lens View Angle
Pan/Dolly Walk through the view.
 Exercise: Using a camera action tool
1 Continuing in Render_exercise.dgn, in the model 07_Camera, in the
Define Camera tool settings, set the following:
Active View: 2
Projection: Three Point
Reference Point: Target
Continuous View Updates: Enabled
Display View Cone: Enabled
2 Click Pan.
3 Enter a data point at the center of the camera view (View 2).
4 Move the pointer:
Left/right to rotate the camera (eyepoint) left/right about the target point.
Up/down to rotate the camera up/down about the target point.
This is similar to moving around a stationary object (the target).
5 Reset to return the view to its original orientation.
6 In the tool settings, set Reference Point to Eye.
7 Move the pointer:
Left/right to rotate the target point left/right about the camera.
Up/down to rotate the target point up/down about the camera.

Saving Rendered Images
This is similar to standing in the one spot and turning your head left/right/
up/down to view the surroundings.
8 Reset to return the view to its original orientation.
Try the other camera action options in the Define Camera tool settings.
Controlled Movement
You have the option to move or rotate the camera view cone by a defined
distance/angle. To do this, you must disable Continuous View Updates and use
data points to specify movement. The amount of movement or rotation per data
point is specified in the Controlled Movements settings.
For view cone manipulation with data points, the position of the data point in the
view determines the direction of the movement or rotation. If you think of the
view as being divided into 9 sections, then the movement performed by a data
point in one of these sections is as shown in the diagram below.
When you move the camera/target with Continuous View Updates disabled, each
data point moves the camera view cone as specified by Distance. Similarly, if you
rotate the view cone, each data point causes a rotation as specified by Angle.
Now that you can set up and create rendered images of your models, you might
want to save one or more of them and impress your friends and clients by sending
them a file containing the image. You can quickly save MicroStation images using
the Save option in the Utilities > Image menu.

You have many choices when saving your images, such as file format, resolution
and type of shading. As well as being able to save your images, MicroStation
provides a viewing facility and a way to perform limited modifications.
There are many variables that you can adjust when saving images, however, you
will find that most remain consistent once you begin to integrate images into your
workflow.
These tools are found on the Utilities > Image menu. In addition to these basics
you can also convert images, capture the screen as an image and save an image
using multiple computers to speed up the processing time.
Saving a rendered image
To save an image, select Utilities > Image > Save, which opens the Save Image
dialog.
• View controls which view will be rendered.
• Format controls the type of file format in which the image file will be saved.
MicroStation supports a wide variety of file formats including JPG, TIF, TGA,
Postscript, PCX and others.
• Compression selects the type of file compression for those formats that allow
it. For example, if you select JPEG then you have the option of choosing High
Loss (high compression) through to Minimum Loss (high quality).

• Mode lets you select the bit depth of the image or grey scale.
• Shading lets you select which type of shading to use. For high quality images
that cast shadows, select RayTrace shading mode.
• Shading Types lets you select between Normal, Antialias and Stereo.
• Action is set to Ray Trace, Radiosity, or Particle Trace only. Sets the rendering
action to be performed.
• Resolution controls how large an image you produce, in terms of pixels.
Thought should be given to displaying the saved image. In order to display the
saved image, you must have enough RAM on your video card to hold the
image. This depends also on what bit depth (24 bit or 8 bit) you select in
Mode.
When one of the Resolution values (X or Y) is adjusted the other updates to
maintain the view aspect ratio. Using higher resolution allows you to have
more pixels to work with, hence a finer quality image.
• Gamma Correction controls the white content of an image. The values range
from 0.10 to 3.00. A value of 0.10 is very dark while 3.00 is very bright.
Image Size lets you control the output size of the image in pixels, or unit as well as
how many dots per inch are recorded.
Banded Rendering allows for an image to be broken up into strips or bands for
network rendering.
Distributed Rendering lets you process an image using 2 or more PCs networked
together.
After specifying the settings for your image, you can save the image with a unique
file name and place it on your hard drive. The default location in which
MicroStation stores image files is the out directory, such as
…\Workspace\projects\examples\General\out.
Viewing a saved image
MicroStation has a viewing utility that lets you view your saved rendered images
and perform a number of editing and manipulation operations.
To view a rendered image, from within MicroStation, select Utilities > Image >
Display.

Distributed Rendering
Distributed Rendering
You can use several machines to do one rendering or animation by using
Distributed Rendering. Distributed Rendering now is included and does not have
to be downloaded as a separate package. Its basic requirement is that all
processors taking part in the rendering have access to all the DGN, texture, RPC,
and raster files to be used in the rendering. It is also necessary that all processors
taking part in the rendering have access to the output path.
Simplified setup for Distributed Rendering
Setting up this new version of Distributed Rendering is simple and it does not
require any external database server as was required previously. To use
Distributed Rendering, you must first launch the Distributed Processing Controller
from the MicroStation start menu.
The first time that you start the controller, you are prompted to define your
Shared (probably server) Directory. This determines where Distributed Rendering
stores the information it needs to configure your controller and pass data back
and forth between multiple machines. All machines that will participate in the
rendering
 How to set up Distributed Rendering
1. From the Start menu, select Bentley > MicroStation V8i > Process Controller for
Distributed Rendering.
The Configuration Settings dialog opens.
2. To select a Shared directory, click the button to the right of the field.
3. Select a shared folder and click OK.
4. Click OK.

Module Review
5. When Distributed Rendering is available, the Bentley Distributed Processing
Scheduler icon appears in the System tray.
Distributed Rendering Related dialogs
The Scheduler is accessed by right‐clicking the Process Controller tray icon and
choosing Open Scheduler. The Job Monitor is accessed by right‐clicking the
Process Controller tray icon and choosing Open Job Monitor.
Scheduler
The Scheduler dialog is used to schedule times that your system is available for
contributing to processing images.
Job Monitor
The Job Monitor dialog displays the progress of your distributed rendering tasks.
Module Review
Questions
1 You can store different settings for an individual light with which tool?
2 True or False: You can specify that the materials for a DGN file be stored
within the file itself.
3 True or False: Distributed Rendering requires another installation on top of
MicroStation.
4 Name three global lighting types that can be used in rendered images.
5 What is the difference between Point light sources and Spot Light lighting?
6 True or False: Projection modes are assigned to elements, rather than the
material.

Module Review
Answers
1 Light Setup.
2 True. Rather than using an external.pal file.
3 False. Distributed Rendering is part of the default MicroStation
installation.
4 Ambient, Flashbulb and Solar.
5 Point light sources radiate light in all directions, you do not have to
consider direction. With Spot Light lighting, a directional lighting source,
you must define the direction in which the light is shining.
6 True. This lets you use the same material with various projection modes
depending on the geometry.

Using Dynamic Views
Module Overview
The term dynamic views refers to a method of composing drawings that is a new
approach to managing projects. Dynamic Views can help you to do the following.
• Automate drawing creation
• Keep MicroStation files up to date by creating responsive drawings and
connecting Saved Views to models
• Eliminate errors in design and documentation
• Communicate design intent through models and drawings
• Manage changes across MicroStation files
• Understanding of design and sheet models
• Understanding of saved views
• Understanding of references
• Basic knowledge about detailing symbols
• Knowledge of clip volumes
• Understanding of Project Explorer
• Knowledge about display styles
Feb-09 507 Using Dynamic Views

Module Objectives
Module Objectives
• Organize project data
• Complete design composition
• Create dynamic saved views for use in sheets
• Complete sheet composition
Questions
1 What is a saved view?
2 What is a sheet model?
3 What is the purpose of Project Explorer?
Answers
1 A named view definition saved in a DGN file for later recall or for attaching
to another model file as a reference.
2 A type of model that serves as an electronic drawing sheet. It typically
consists of design model references that are scaled and positioned to
create a printable drawing.
3 It is used to manage project data within MicroStation. Project data is
stored in link sets in a DGN file or in a DGN library. A link set contains
hierarchical information about links or grouped information in project
data.
Using Dynamic Views 508 Feb-09

Glossary
Glossary
Dynamic Views:
Dynamic views is a general name that encompasses several related technologies
which share the goal of making model analysis and documentation interactive
and intuitive. One of these technologies allows clipping of models and section
graphics generation on the fly. Section views, detail views, and elevation views are
types of dynamic views.
Through the use of detailing symbols with smart fields and links, you can create
live, intelligent sections of a design composition that update automatically as the
design evolves.
Annotation:
Complimentary information such as dimensions, text, notes, patterns, hatching,
and detailing symbols. Annotation excludes design graphics. The size of
annotations can be controlled by annotation scale.
Design:
A collection of elements in a design model that are drawn at full scale (1:1). A
design is not intended to be a finished drawing for publication. A design
encapsulates part of a project for active editing, and uses references for
backgrounds only.
3D Design Composition:
A collection of referenced designs at full scale (1:1). The references are assembled
using different level states and view attributes. Design composition is used to
create saved views that will be used in sheets. In the 2D workflow, there is
typically no design composition.
Drawing:
A collection of elements or references in a 2D design or sheet model, at full scale
(1:1), which is used to create multiple sheets. This step includes static or common
text that does not change. Annotation scale should be used here. This is an
intermediate step between design composition and sheet composition.

Dynamic Views Overview
2D Drawing Composition:
A collection of referenced drawings at full scale (1:1), without a border, which is
used to generate saved views.
Drawing Annotation:
Annotation that will be shown in multiple sheets, potentially at different scales,
which is placed in a drawing.
Sheet:
The final output of the design process that can be delivered electronically or on
paper.
Sheet Composition:
The process of collecting saved view references and placing items in a sheet
model that defines a finished document that is ready for publication. This step is
where references, including borders, are scaled to fit a sheet. Print output scale is
always considered.
Sheet Annotation:
These annotations are specific to one sheet.
Drawing Title:
The annotation for a drawing or detail when placed in a sheet composition.
When a team of users works on a project, they typically work on separate files to
allow multiple people to work at the same time. Members of the team work on
different aspects of the project, and references are used to communicate graphic
content across the team. One way to view a project is as a network of DGN nodes
with references as the connections between them.

The dynamic view workflow creates a split editing environment. It lets you have
evolving geometry that is reflected in each step of the process. Using this method,
you separate annotations from geometry, creating reusable geometry. There will
be flexibility regarding how much dynamic view functionality you use in a project.
It may not be appropriate for all projects, or for all phases of a project.
Dynamic Views core technology is constructed on this model:
1. Make sure you have the right Display Styles.
2. Create your Clip Volumes
3. Create your Saved Views
4. Reference your Saved Views into the right Model, in the right File.
Take a picture, it will last longer
Saved Views are central to the composition strategy, and are therefore more
prominent MicroStation V8i. You can think of it as taking a picture, then putting
that picture into a photo album.
The first processes are spatial design. When you are in a design model with a black
background, it is spatial design.

The following process is completed in a sheet model, which is a flat
representation.
3D Design models compiled into one model, Drawing created by Saved View References, Sheets created by Saved View References
General workflows
There are simple and complex Dynamic View workflows, for example, a small 3D
model straight to a sheet, bypassing the Drawing layer.
A simple 3D workflow is as follows:

Dynamic View Workflow Task
Critical to understanding dynamic views at first is to use the delivered Drawing
Composition workflow. This Workflow Task is specifically designed to take you
through the process from beginning to end. Tasks are arranged in the Tasks dialog
from top to bottom.
There are several activities included in this workflow.
• Organize the project data. At this stage, you use Project Explorer, which is a
catalog of your project resources or a hyperlinked Table of Contents.
Drawing is in every workflow. It is there to help you with any other drawing
task with which you might be faced. It remains unchanged from the previous
version.

• Design Composition. At this stage, you create a collection of references at full
scale (1:1) to use in several designs, design compositions, or sheet
compositions.
• Create Views (2D). At this stage, you compose all the section, detail or plan
views in the project. These views should have linked callouts and placeholder
fields so that, when the views are added to a sheet, they are automatically
updated as work commences.
• Sheet Composition. At this stage, you create sheets that represent finished
geometric work ready for publication. Typically, this is where print scale is
taken into consideration.

• Annotate. Add final annotations such as any informational geometry,
hatching, dimensions, callouts, and text to the sheet to produce a finished
product.
The following is an exercise where you will create a Saved View from a Design File,
then create a Sheet models and place the saved view in the sheet model.
 Exercise: Create and place a Saved View
1 Open the file Drawing Composition_exercise.dgn from the Everything 3D
data set.
2 Confirm view 1 is the top view.
3 In the Create Views task create a named saved view of the top view of the
house.
Name: Plan

4 Now that you have a saved view you need to drag and drop the saved view
into a sheet model. In the Sheet Composition task, select the New Sheet
Model tool with the following tool settings:
Type: Sheet, 2D
Name: Plan
Description: Plan Sheet
Annotation: 1:20
Line Style Scale: Annotation Scale
Update Fields Automatically: Enabled
Sheet Name: EX 1 Kitchen Plan
Sheet Number: 1
Display Sheet Boundary: Enabled
Size: ISO A1
Note: A best practise is to keep the background color of Designs and Design
Composition models as black. The black color will assist in
differentiating designs from drawings since the default color of a sheet
model is white.
5 Add border graphics to the sheet model. In the Sheet Composition task
open References and attach the Border Model located in the Drawing
Composition_exercise.dgn file. Set the following:
Model: Border
Detail Scale: Full Size 1=1

Scale (Master:Ref): 20:1
Now that you have a sheet Model and attached border, you place the
Saved View, named, Plan onto the Plan Sheet.

6 Drag and drop the saved view “Plan” from the Saved View dialog to view 1
and enter a data point in the view.
At this point in the simple dynamic view process any changes to the design model
is reflected in the saved view on the sheet model. The next step is to add
annotation to the sheet model.
 Exercise Create callout symbols in the sheet model
1 Continue with the Plan Sheet model in the Drawing
Compositiion_exercise.dgn file.
2 Select the Annotate task, Place Section Callout tool (T + 1) with the
Create Section Views: Section 1
Flip Arrows: Enabled
Annotation Scale Lock: Enabled

3 Identify any element in the referenced saved view then place a start and
end point for the section. Refer to the following image for approximate
location of the section callout.
Note: Right clicking on a section callout is another way to flip the direction of
the section arrow.
4 Now that you have a Section Callout you will create a sheet model for
Sections.

Note: It is not necessary to create a new sheet to place section callouts they
can also be placed in the Plan Sheet.
5 Select the Sheet Composition task and select the New Sheet Model tool
with the following tool settings:
Type: Sheet, 2D
Name: Sections
Description: Section Sheet
Annotation: 1:20
Line Style Scale: Annotation Scale
Update Fields Automatically: Enabled
Sheet Name: EX 2 Kitchen Section
Sheet Number: 2
Display Sheet Boundary: Enabled
Size: ISO A1

6 Open the Saved View dialog and drag and drop the Section 1 view to the
new Sections sheet model.
7 Now let’s test the dynamic saved view capabilities. Open two views, view 1
and view 2. In view 2 select the View Attributes dialog and open the View
Setup option with the following settings:
Models: Sections

View 1 in left image contains the Section Callout symbol and View 2 in right image shows the placed saved view reference.
8 You will now move the Section Callout in View 1 and dynamically see the
view change in the Sections Sheet. Select the callout with the Element
Selection tool. Try different positions for the callout.
 Exercise: Challenge Exercise, create a section callout with multiple corners.
Here is an example of a multi‐cornered section callout identified in the plan view,
in the enclosed box.
 Exercise: Challenge Exercise, create an Elevation callout in a new sheet
named Elevations.

Here is an example with multiple elevations created from the plan view and
placed in a sheet model named Elevations. Take notice of the Set Reference
Presentation in the Reference dialog.
View Setup
If you open more than one view each view can display a different model
contained, within the DGN file, using the View Setup option in the View
Attributes dialog. The following is an example of multiple views with each view
displaying a different model.

The following is the View Setup for the Active view, view 4.
Using multiple views is an ideal way to view the dynamic capabilities of Drawing
Composition. Changing the design or original Saved View will dynamically change
in their associated references.
A more comprehensive 3D workflow is as follows:
In a comprehensive 3D Dynamic View workflow relationships between all project
disciplines are achieved.
Design Composition
In the design phase individual designs are shared via reference attachments. The
individual designs with there associated references are referenced in a blank 3D
design file called the Design Composition. Selected views, (Saved Views and Clip
Volumes), are created in the Design Composition DGN file.
Drawing Composition:
The next phase of the workflow incorporates the Drawing Composition file where
saved view references from the Design Composition file are attached along with

static annotation. In this phase additional Saved Views, Clip Volumes and
Detailing Symbols are placed.
Sheet Composition:
Typically Saved Views from Drawing Composition or direct from Design
Composition are placed here via the Drag and Drop technique. Also specific sheet
annotation is placed here.
In the following exercise you will be guided through a more comprehensive
Dynamic View workflow. The Dynamic View workflow is as follows:
 Exercise 1: Create a Design Composition file with design references
1 Open the empty file Building Composition.dgn.
2 From the Drawing Composition Tasks select the Organize Task.
3 Click on the Open Project Explorer tool (Q) and expand Designs directory.
4 Drag and drop the following designs to View 2, Building Composition.dgn.
Use the following dialog settings:
Column Enclosure [BSI300AE9‐Shell.dgn]
Core [BSI300AE9‐Core.dgn]
Structural Composite [BSI300S‐9‐Structural.dgn
Attachment Method: Interactive
Nested Attachments: Live Nesting
Depth: 99

All other settings: No changes
Column Enclosure [BSI300AE9‐shell.dgn]
On you system this Design Composition should have a black background
Note: A simple way to determine if your drawing is a design composition is it’s
background color. The background color for a design or design composition
should be black or some other color than white. The default color for a sheet
model is white.
If you check your Reference dialog you will see that these designs have been
placed as references in you Building Composition.dgn file.
 Exercise 2: Create a standard Saved View from the Design Composition file
1 Continuing with the Building Composition.dgn file. Set view to Top view.
2 In the Design Composition Tasks select the Create Views task.
3 Select the Save View tool (R) with the following settings:

Name: Exercise‐2 Plan View
Description: Top view of Building Composition model
All other options: No change
4 Open the Saved Views dialog.
5 Expand the Saved Views directory in Project Explorer and right click on the
Standard Views directory and select the Refresh option. This will display
the new Saved View that you created.
Note: Get in the habit of doing this each time you create a new Saved View.

 Exercise 3: Create a new Sheet file and place a standard Saved View
1 Continuing in Composition.dgn, activate the Sheet Composition task.
2 Select the New DGN file tool (Q) and navigate the \Drawings directory.
Enter the following:
Seed: sheetseed.dgn
File name: Drawing Composition.dgn
3 Click on Save and the Drawing Composition.dgn file will open.
Note: The new sheet has a default name 1 to 100. The name comes from the sheet
seed file. Open the Model dialog and Edit Model Properties to change the
sheet model name to Plan View. Close than open your view to update your
model name in view window.
This 2D Sheet File does not reside within the 3D Design Composition.dgn file. In
the previous simple Dynamic View workflow the Sheet model was contained in
the original 3D Design model.

4 Return to Project Explorer and expand sheets to see if the new file is
displayed. If not then right click on the Sheets directory and select the
Refresh option.
5 Navigate to Project Explorer and in the Saved Views directory expand
Standard Views. Drag and drop the Exercise‐2 Plan View from the Building
Composition.dgn file onto the Exercise‐3 Drawing Composition.dgn file in
View 1.
Note: When you drag and drop a Saved View the Reference Attachment Settings
dialog will automatically set the Nested Attachments to Live Nesting with a
Depth of 99.
 Exercise 4: Place Section Callout on the standard Saved View on Plane View
model of Exercise‐3 Drawing Composition.dgn file.

1 Continuing with the Drawing Composition.dgn file, open the Annotate
Task and click on the Place Section Callout tool (T + 1).
2 In the Place Section Callout tool settings, enter the following settings:
Detailing Style: Detailing Symbol
Annotation Scale Lock: Enabled
Create Section View, Name: Section 1
3 Follow prompts and place a horizontal section through the Exercise‐2 Plan
View then click in View to have Section Callout display.

4 If you want to change direction of the section, (Green Arrow), right click
on arrow and then click on Flip Direction.
 Exercise 5: Place a view of the Section Callout in the existing DGN file.
1 Continuing with the Drawing Composition.dgn file Right click on the
Section 1 Callout, and select the Place View option. Follow the prompts
and place the view below the Plan View.
2 Click on Element Selection tool and select Section 1 Callout. Change the
extents of the section by moving the blue bolt handles. Right Click on the

green arrow and Flip Direction of the callout. The new placed view will
update to reflect the new extents.

3 To change the presentation of the new placed view, open the References
dialog, select the placed view and Set the Reference Presentation.
 Exercise 5: Place additional callouts and associated views.
1 Continuing with the Exercise‐3 Drawing Composition.dgn file, open the
Sheet Composition Task and create a new sheet model named Details.
2 Open View 1 and View 2 and select Window > Tile.
3 Make View 1 the Active View by clicking on the Window header.
4 Open the View Attributes dialog and set the following:

Models: Plan View
5 Make View 2 the Active View by clicking on the Window header.
6 Open the View Attributes dialog and set the following:
Models: Details
7 From the Annotation Task select the Place Detail Callout (T + 2) and enter
Detailing Style: Detailing Symbol
Name: Detail 1

8 Follow prompts and place Detail Symbol as indicated below.
9 Create other Detail Callouts in View 1, place them in View 2 then modify
their scale, position, extents and Reference Presentation.
Note: When the Saved Views are placed in models that reside within the same DGN
file, each view can display a different model. This enables you to test and see
the Dynamic capability with the Dynamic View Workflow.
2D or 3D sheets
Normally, you should use 2D sheet models. You can reference your 3D models
into a 2D sheet model. This ensures that all dimensioning is 2D.
Even when True dimensioning is used, it still only considers the planar dimensions
(x and y axes) and no allowance is made for geometry that slopes into or out of
the view (z axis).
Take, for example, a case when you dimension the projected distances, such as
the height of a roof above the eave line. In a 2D sheet you can do this on a 3D
reference without concern that the dimension may be taken along the slope of
the roof back into the view.

Module Review
If you intend to dimension in an Isometric view in a sheet, then a 3D Sheet model
would be required. In these cases, True dimensions will take into account the
depth of the view.
Module Review
Questions
1 Name the steps in the drawing composition workflow.
2 Define a design.
3 Define design composition.
4 Define sheet composition.
Answers
1 Organize the project data, design composition, view composition, sheet
composition.
2 A collection of elements in a design model that are drawn at full scale
(1:1). A design is not intended to be a finished drawing for publication. A
design encapsulates part of a project for active editing and uses references
for backgrounds only.
3 A collection of references at full scale (1:1) intended for use in several
designs, design compositions, or sheet compositions. A design
composition differs from a design in that it is composed predominately of
references.
4 A collection of references and elements in a sheet model that define a
finished drawing sheet, ready for publication.

Importing and Exporting
Drawings in 3D
Module Overview
While working in 3D is an efficient way to design, you may still need to produce
2D versions of your work. You can create designs with 3D geometry, and then let
MicroStation produce 2D views and sections from the 3D geometry.
Typically, designing is performed in Design models and drawing sheets are
created, or composed, in Sheet models.
You will see methods of importing and exporting 3D data, since there are times
when you need to exchange design file data between 2D and 3D models. You can
reference 2D models to 3D and vice‐versa. Alternatively, you can export a 2D
model to a 3D model, creating a new file with the 2D elements in a 3D model.
To put 3D elements into a 2D model you must first flatten them to 2D elements.
This can be done by exporting the 3D elements to a 2D model. To create a drawing
of a 3D model, with or without hidden lines displayed, you can export to a Visible
Edges DGN file.
• Basic knowledge of 3D modeling
• Knowledge of MicroStation references
Module Objectives
• Create 2D sheets from 3D design models
• Import and Export 2D and 3D data
Feb-09 537 Importing and Exporting Drawings in 3D

Questions
1 When using Design or Sheet models, what is typically the best use for
each?
2 What do the Hidden Line or Filled Hidden Line Display Modes produce?
Answers
1 Typically, designing is performed in Design models and drawing sheets are
created, or composed, in Sheet models.
2 They generates a surface model in which each visible surface is filled with
the element color.
Exporting 3D to 2D
To export a 3D design file to a 2D design file, select File > Export > 2D. During this
process you reduce all the z‐ values for elements to one z‐ value, effectively
flattening the design.
Flattening a 3D design in this fashion reduces all the vertical elements in a view to
zero. Only those elements with a horizontal component, in the view selected for
export, will appear in the exported 2D file.
Conversion options
The options in the Save 3D as 2D dialog control the conversion options.
• View: Sets the view that determines the orientation of the design plane upon
which 3D elements are projected. This determines whether you want to
project all of the information in one of the x‐, y‐, or z‐ axes on to one xy‐, xz‐ or
Importing and Exporting Drawings in 3D 538 Feb-09

Exporting 3D to 2D
yz‐ plane. That gives you flexibility as you can reduce all the z‐depth data in
the Top view for plan drawings or the y‐depth data in the Front view for front
elevation drawings.
• Preserve Z Range: If on, the 3D Z range data is stored in the generated 2D
elements. This data then can be used if the elements are converted back to a
3D design file.
• Ignore View Rotation: If on, the view rotation is ignored and the 3D file is
saved as in a Top view. This setting preserves the X‐Y geometry coordinates
and discards the Z information.
While this form of conversion from 3D to 2D has its uses, a more practical option
for producing drawing style 2D files is Export Visible Edges. With this option, you
can have the hidden lines removed, or displayed in a different line style and/or
placed on a different level.
Exporting Visible Edges
With this process you can create visible edge views that can be stored in the active
DGN file or exported to an external DGN file.

Exporting 3D to 2D
When you select File > Export > Visible Edges, the Export Visible Edges dialog
appears.
In this dialog are numerous options grouped on tabs, General, Symbology and
Advanced.
General
• View ‐ Sets the view that determines the orientation of the visible edges.
• Boundary ‐ Sets the boundary of the exported visible edges design file. If
Tiling is enabled, then the boundary setting is disabled and the entire DGN file
is exported.
Design File ‐ Entire design file is exported.
View — view contents are exported.
Fence — existing fence contents are exported (not available if there is no
fence).
• Method ‐ Sets type of Visible Edge extraction to do.
MicroStation ‐ This setting should be used where the model is a mixture of
solids and standard geometry.
Parasolids — This method is recommended when working with solids models.
It is more accurate, can be slower for larger files, and does not support
computing intersections between elements.
• Calculate Intersections ‐ If on, intersections between elements are calculated
automatically in the visible edges design file, which can significantly increase
the processing time.
• Include Hidden Edges ‐ If on, hidden edges are drawn. The Symbology tab has
controls to set the Level, Color, Line Style, and Line Weight of the hidden
edges.
• Facet All Surfaces ‐ If on, all surfaces are converted to facetted surfaces in the
visible edges output.

Exporting 3D to 2D
• Remove Smooth Edges ‐ If on, blended (smooth) edges of 2 tangent surfaces
are not displayed.
• Rule Lines ‐ If on, rule lines are drawn on curved surfaces to better display the
shapes of the surfaces.
• Expand Custom Line Styles ‐ If on, Line Style attributes are processed and
appear in the generated visible edges. If off, Line Style Attributes are ignored.
When Custom Line Styles are processed, they appear in the resulting visible
edges file as stick geometry. That is, they are represented by standard
elements and no longer have custom line style attributes.
• Expand Hatch ‐ If on, any hatching present in the source view/file/fence is
processed and appears in the generated visible edges. If off, hatching present
in the source view is ignored. When hatching is processed, it appears in the
resulting visible edges file as “stick geometry”. That is, it represented by
standard elements and no longer has the hatching attributes.
• Process Text and Dimensions ‐ If off, text and dimensions display without any
test for visibility; they show independently of the depth in view.
Symbology
Controls symbology of output data.
Advanced
• Accuracy ‐ Controls the precision to which hidden line removal processing
performs internal calculations. In general, most calculations are exact
(accurate). In some cases, however, it is faster to produce approximate results.
• Low, Medium, High — If the options Low, Medium or High are selected, the
accuracy is computed accordingly, based on the size of the view to be
processed. Selecting High Accuracy will produce higher quality output at the
expense of increased processing time.
• To Tolerance — When the To Tolerance setting is chose, the accuracy of the
processing is controlled by the Tolerance setting. Tolerance controls the
maximum error (the precision) for the hidden line removal calculations
explicitly; the accuracy is therefore not dependent on the size of the view.
Lower tolerance values will also produce higher quality output at the expense
of increased processing time.

Exporting 3D to 2D
 Exercise: Create a visible edges file
Project: Plant
2 Open BSI700‐S0501‐UnloadingPlatform.dgn.
3 Select File > Export > Visible Edges and, on the General tab, set the
following:
View: 1
Boundary: View
Method: MicroStation
Export To: 2D File
Automatically open output file: Enabled
Include Hidden Edges: Enabled
4 On the Symbology tab, set the following for the Hidden Edge Overrides:
Color: Enabled and set to 4
Style: Enabled and set to medium dash (2)
Weight: Enabled and set to 0
5 In the Export Visible Edges dialog, click the Preview button.
The Export Visible Edges Preview window opens to show a preview of the
visible edges file, with symbology as defined.
6 Click Export.

Exporting 2D to 3D
The Save Visible Edges Design File As dialog opens. By default it has given
the proposed file the same name as the active design but with a .hln
extension (for hidden line).
7 Click Save.
The file is processed. On completion, the active file is closed and the
visible edges file is opened because you enabled Automatically open
output file.
When you create a visible edges file, it creates a new DGN file. You can add visible
edges views to an existing DGN file using the Export Visible Edges process using
the Active File option.
Exporting 2D to 3D
In 2D you work on a design plane that is like a sheet of paper. This plane is defined
by x‐ and y‐ coordinates. In 3D the z‐ coordinate is added. When converting from
2D to 3D, the geometry in the model does not really change. It will be flat, unless
elements contain Z range data from previous conversions from a 3D model. Once
converted to a 3D DGN file, however, you can use those elements to produce 3D
solids using the 3D construction tools, such as Extrude and Construct Revolution.
Let’s review the settings associated with exporting a 2D model to 3D.
Conversion Options — control the source and the orientation:
• View Orientation — sets the view in the 3D DGN file into which the 2D model
elements are placed. This can be any one of the standard views, such as Top,

Export to and from Google Earth
Front or Left. In other words, you must decide whether your 2D model file is
to be used as a Top/Bottom, Front/Back or a Right/Left view.
• Z Depth — Each converted element is placed at a depth in the Top view that
can be the same or vary from element to element.
To specify a fixed depth, select Fixed from the Z Depth option menu and enter the
depth, in working units, in the Value field. The default depth is 0:0 – or zero
working units in z‐.
The following Z Depth options are useful only where elements previously were
converted to 2D with Preserve Z Range on.
• Contour Z Low or Contour Z High — fixes the depth for all elements at the
design file’s lower or upper Z contour (elevation) limit. This means all
elements are brought to the elevation of either the upper or lower z‐ contour
(elevation).
• Element Z Low or Element Z High — places each converted element at the
depth that equals its lower or upper Z range limit. These limits equal the
bottom and top of the design cube so essentially you are putting all the
elements at the top or bottom of the design cube.
• 2D Z Range/Z Low or 2D Z Range/Z High — places each converted element at
the depth that equals its maintained 2D Z range lower or upper limit.
The Google Earth environment provides you with an interface to planet Earth.
What Google Earth is
You can view and navigate 2D and 3D models of projects in the context of the
Google Earth environment. Through this connection, MicroStation users can
publish DGN and DWG models which can be viewed and navigated in the context
of the geographic imagery with associated content.
MicroStation files placed in the Google Earth environment can contain links to
more detailed data that can be reviewed locally, turning the Google Earth
environment into a graphical delivery system for project information. This
information can be provided in a variety of formats, including Excel spreadsheets,

Word and PDF documents, additional DGN and DWG files, and URLs. All types of
project information can be shared through the Google Earth interface.
How it works
You export geometric data so that it can be viewed in the context of satellite data,
aerial photography, maps and other geographical data. You then get an aerial
view of geometry and geography. However, the Google Earth environment is not
intended to be a detailed CAD viewer.
While the Google Earth environment is designed and optimized for spatially large
designs, it is not intended for visualizing geometric detail. Including excessive
detail will quickly exceed the current capacity. It is important to select and export
only the geometry that is valuable.
MicroStation provides data to the Google Earth application as KML documents, an
XML based data structure for creating and sharing geographic data. MicroStation
geometry exported to KML retains the reference and level structure that is
defined for a model. This lets you selectively control the display of individual
levels or references. Saved views are also saved to KML so that they can be used
to navigate to views of interest.
The general procedure is as follows.
1. Go into the Google Earth environment and create a KMZ file for the location
of interest.
2. Go to MicroStation and place a monument point cell at the location
specified in Google Earth environment. This action will reference the KMZ file
created in step 1.
3. Define True North in MicroStation, or use other geo‐coordination
techniques.
4. Publish to the Google Earth environment from MicroStation.
For users that use structure‐centric coordinate systems, selecting a standard GCS
from the Library is not possible. Instead, given some information about
geographic positioning of your model, MicroStation can calculate an Azimuthal
Equal Area GCS that will allow you to realize all the benefits of Geo‐Coordination.
You tell MicroStation about the geographic positioning of your design using
Geographic Placemarks. A Placemark is a cell that contains text fields labeled
Name:, Longitude:, Latitude:, and Altitude:. The longitude, latitude, and altitude
fields specify the geographic position relative to the WGS 84 datum, which is the

datum reported by GPS devices and also used by Google Earth. The corresponding
position in the design file is specified by placement point of the cell. The scale and
rotation of the cell does not affect its meaning as a Geographic Placemark.
Google Earth tools
The Google Earth tools are found from Tools > Geographic
Tools from left to right are a follows:
• Export KML file
• Capture Google Earth View
• Define Google Earth Placemark Monument
• Synchronize Google Earth View
• Follow Google Earth View
• Google Earth Settings
• Play Camera Animation in Google Earth
Defining geographic location
In order to accurately define the geographic location of a model when exporting,
you must provide the model’s location and its orientation. There are 3 methods
you can use to do this.
• Use the MicroStation GeoExtension applications and their associated
projection capabilities to handle geographic projections.
• Use a single placemark monument to define the location of a known point in
the model and then use the DEFINE NORTH key‐in to indicate the orientation.
In order to use this method, the geometry must be drawn accurately and the
working units must be set correctly so that the size of the geometry is known.
• Place 2 or more placemark monuments to provide the complete projection
transform (location, orientation, and scale).
This method is useful when accurate scale and orientation information is not
known and an approximate projection is sufficient.

Defining a placemark monument
These are used to associate a geographical location from a Google Earth
environment placemark file to a monument point in a model. First you must
create a placemark file in the Google Earth application and save it as a KML file.
To create a KML file in Google Earth:
1. Launch the Google Earth application.
2. Create a placemark at the desired location, using Add > Placemark.
3. Use the corner of a building or a parking lot your placemark. That way you
can snap to the element when you place a monument cell in MicroStation.
4. Right click on the placemark and select Save As from the pop‐up menu.
5. Save the file as Type .kml or .kmz.
6. Click Save.
Placemark monuments are cells named KmlPlacemark with enter‐data fields that
show the name, longitude, latitude and altitude of the monument. The placemark
cell is located in the cell library KmlPlacemark.cel in the \System\cell folder. It is
placed automatically when you use the Define Google Earth Placemark
Monument tool.
The origin of the cell represents the location of the placemark in the model. The
design file location can be modified by moving the cells. The longitude, latitude,
and altitude values can be modified by editing the appropriate text elements.
Placemark cell geometry is placed on the level KML Placemark. You can turn this
level off to avoid displaying or exporting the monument geometry. Scale is set by
the active design file scale.

 Exercise: Define a placemark monument
Project: General
2 Open Import‐Export.dgn.
3 Open the model Google Earth.
4 Select Tools > Google Earth.
There are 2 existing placemarks in this drawing but you will add another.
See if you can find the other placemark cells.
5 Select Define Google Earth Placemark Monument.
6 Snap to the location shown to identify the point at which you want to
locate the monument and enter a data point to accept.
Snap h
7 In the Select Monument Placemark File dialog, navigate to the class data
set folder. Select Google Earth ‐ Bentley Exton.kml.
8 Click Open.
9 Type the following in the Key‐in browser:
DEFINE NORTH BYPOINTS
10 Press Enter.

11 Enter a data point at the placemark location and a second in the +y
direction, or to the top of the screen/view.
This defines true North.
Note: If you are working with MicroStation GeoGraphics Extension, you do not need
to define a monument point in a model.
Removing placemark monuments
To remove all placemark monument cells in a model, you can use the key‐in
GOOGLEEARTH PLACEMARK DELETE.
Adding Hyperlinks
You can add a variety of hyperlinks to web pages and other data sources using
MicroStation Engineering Links tools.
• Show Engineering Links

• Attach Engineering Link
• Edit Engineering Link
• Follow Engineering Link
• Connect to Browser
• Delete Engineering Link
Supported HTML protocols are http://<web address>, mailto:<email address>,
file:///<path>, and ftp://<web address>.
You can also place a XML link. If you are creating a simple XML link, you can
specify parameters which further define how the link should operate.
• Role ‐ Specifies what role the object of the link will specify, for example, that
of a reference or cell library.
• Show ‐ Determines whether any existing page should be replaced or if a new
browser should be opened.
Hint: Remember Engineering Links are stored as tags.
If you have Internet access and the Google Earth application is installed, you can
complete the following exercise.
 Exercise: Adding links
1 Continuing in Import‐Export.dgn, in the model Google Earth, select Tools >
Engineering Links.
2 Click Attach Link with the following tool settings:
Link Type: HTML
URL: http://www.bentley.com
Leave others settings to Default.

3 Click on a building’s roof element.
4 Enter a data point, away from any elements, to accept.
5 Add additional links to elements.
Exporting files
Once you have created a placemark file and defined a placemark monument in a
model, you can export the design geometry. When exporting, you have the choice
of file types.
The KMZ file type is a compressed version of KML. Both file types are recognized
and extracted automatically. Typically, KML documents are large, so the
compressed (KMZ) form is preferable.
You can export to:
• SketchUp SKP format to place MicroStation generated geometry into
SketchUp or the Google Warehouse.
• Collada files (*.DAE) include support for textures, and can be used in other
applications that support them. You can export geometry to Collada (version
1.4) files, by selecting File > Export > Collada.

Configuration
You can control the default directory for the output KML files by setting the
configuration variable MS_KMLOUT. If this variable is not set, the output directory
defaults to the current DGN file location.
Settings
When geometry is exported, the view attributes and level settings are taken from
the active view. It is important to set up the view exactly as you want it to display
in the Google Earth application. Output should be minimized to include only
necessary data by turning off unnecessary levels and disabling text and dimension
view attributes if they are to be excluded.
The Google Earth Export Settings dialog has settings that control how the
geometry is exported. Open it by clicking the Google Earth Settings tool.
General
• Google Earth Version ‐ Lets you set the version of Google Earth required, 3 or
4. Google Earth version 4 introduced support for textures. Select this version if
you want to export geometry with textures intact.
• Stroke Tolerance (Meters) ‐ Controls the accuracy of the mesh approximating
curves or curved surfaces. A smaller value produces a more accurate
representation but file size is larger and display is slower.
• Transparency Override ‐ Controls the level of transparency for all the
geometry. Including a level of transparency allows the geometry to be seen
without obscuring the aerial photography below it.

• Convert Custom Line Styles ‐ Converts custom line styles to KML by dropping
them to their individual components. This produces correct display of the line
style but can increase file size and degrade performance.
• Convert Raster References To Ground Overlays ‐ Converts raster references in
the X‐Y plane to ground overlays. The raster reference overlays are placed in a
separate Raster References folder. Their display can be controlled as a group
by selecting the folder, or individually by selecting the individual references.
• Include Raster References in KMZ File ‐ Includes raster references if you are
creating a compressed KMZ output file.
• Open File after Export ‐ Opens the KMZ in Google Earth upon completion.
3D
• Render Mode ‐ Sets the mode of shading. If a view is rendered and this is set
to From View, then the display mode is taken from the active view.
• Altitude Mode (3D only) ‐ Controls the interpretation of altitude values in
Google Earth, which has 2 ways of rendering the Earth´s surface.
If the Google Earth Terrain setting is disabled then variations in altitude, such
as mountains and valleys, are ignored. In this case, the Earth is depicted as a
perfect sphere (ellipsoid). In Google Earth: Left Frame > Layers > Primary
Database > Terrain.
If the Terrain setting is enabled then the variations in altitude in are depicted
in the Google Earth display.
• Altitude Mode (3D only) ‐ This setting applies only to 3D models. For 2D
models, the Flatten To Ground option is always used.
Relative To Ground — Altitude value is interpreted as a distance from the
ground plane. In this mode, geometry with a positive value is always
displayed. As the altitude is interpreted as a distance from the ground, this
can produce distortion in the display of geometry when the Terrain setting is
enabled and there are significant changes in altitude.
Absolute — All altitude values are interpreted relative to sea level.
Flatten To Ground — All altitude values are interpreted as being at ground
level. This setting is useful for any data that is truly 2D. For 3D geometry this
has the effect of flattening the geometry and is usually not desirable.
• Altitude Bias (Meters) ‐ Google Earth is based on the physical representation
of the Earth with coordinates specified by longitude, latitude, and altitude.
Geometry with negative altitude values typically are not displayed (obscured
by the Earth´s surface). The Altitude Bias setting specifies a value that is added

to each coordinate in a KML file. A positive value will move geometry up from
ground level, while a negative value will move geometry toward the ground.
• Convert Wireframe Geometry in Rendered Views ‐ Exports wireframe
geometry, such as text, lines, curves, and dimensions along with shaded
objects in a rendered view.
Captured Geometry
These settings let you set the level of detail that is captured as well as the
following:
• Capture As ‐ Option menu that sets how the Google Earth terrain is captured.
Mesh ‐ Terrain is captured as a mesh.
B‐spline Surface ‐ Terrain is captured as a B‐spline surface.
• Capture Detail ‐ Option menu that lets you set the level of detail for captured
Google Earth images.
Low
Medium
High
Very High
• Use Google Earth View to Determine Rotation ‐ The Google Earth view
perspective is maintained on capture. Where there is no information about
the location of a model, it is assumed that your model’s origin coincides with
the center of the Google Earth view and that the y‐axis is to be aligned with
North.
Export process
When you export models, first use the Google Earth Settings dialog to define how
they are exported and displayed. When you export, the Google Earth application
opens automatically if is not already open. It navigates to the location of your
placemark and model.
 Exercise: Export geometry
1 Continuing in Import‐Export.dgn, in the model Google Earth, click Export
Google Earth (KML) File.
2 In the Create Google Earth (KML) File dialog, leave the file type at KMZ.
3 Click Save.

The export is completed and the Google Earth application opens and navigates to
the location. The geometry is displayed against the imagery.
Capture Google Earth Image
Use this tool in 3D DGN files to capture the terrain and imagery of the current
Google Earth view. The captured image will be at screen resolution and in
monochrome (a Google Earth restriction).
Model location
If there is no information about the location of the model, MicroStation assumes
that your model´s origin coincides with the center of your Google Earth view and
that your model´s y‐axis is to be aligned with north. If location information is
present in the model, then MicroStation uses the transform derived from it.
Hint: To maintain your Google Earth view perspective, enable the Use Google Earth
View to Determine Rotation option in the Google Earth Tools Settings dialog.
 How to capture a Google Earth image:
1. Set up a Google Earth view displaying the required area.
2. In MicroStation, select the Capture Google Earth Image tool.
3, Enter a data point to capture the current Google Earth view.
Note: The use of the Google Earth images is restricted by the Google Earth license
agreement. Please consult that document (select Help > License) to insure that
your use of these images does not violate the restrictions.
Tips for capturing a view
Helpful settings and options within the Google Earth application are as follows:
• For best results, the view should have the camera pointing straight down.
• Google Earth application’s camera tilt control
• In order to capture terrain, the Terrain layer must be enabled in the Layer
panel.
• On the View tab of the Tools > Options, Google Earth Options dialog, set
Detail Area to Large 1024 x 1024 and Graphics Mode to DirectX.
• Resize the Google Earth application window to the size of the graphics image
desired.

Synchronizing Views
You can move to the same view location and orientation in either MicroStation or
the Google Earth application.
Synchronize Google Earth View tool
Use this tool to navigate the Google Earth application to the location and
orientation of the active view in MicroStation.
As the Google Earth application supports a camera model with a fixed lens length
and restricts the camera to pointing downward only, the views will not always
match exactly, but should provide a relatively good approximation for most views.
To synchronize, set up the view as desired and select the Synchronize Google
Earth View tool. If the Google Earth Application is not open, it opens
automatically.
Follow Google Earth View tool
Use this tool to navigate the active view in MicroStation to the location and
orientation of the current view in the Google Earth application. This tool will work
only if the model’s view location is geographically close to the current location in
the Google Earth application.
To match the active view to the Google Earth application’s view, set the view up as
desired and select the Follow Google Earth View tool.
Control in Google Earth
In the Google Earth application you can control the display of MicroStation data.
 How to control the display of MicroStation data:
In the Google Earth environment, examine the left frame. On the left, under
the section Places > My Places > Temporary Places > Import‐Export, you will
have access to Levels, Raster References, Reference Files, Links, and Saved
Views. Use these controls to alter your Google Earth display.

3D Warehouse
MicroStation's 3D Warehouse interface lets you open and place SketchUp models
in your designs. Through this interface you can directly access the growing
collection of 3D models available from the Google 3D Warehouse, or you can
upload your models to 3D Warehouse in SketchUp format.
Access to these features is from the Utilities > 3D Warehouse sub‐menu, which
gives you the following functions in MicroStation.
• Open — a SketchUp model, in read‐only mode, from 3D Warehouse.
• Place As Cell — a SketchUp model from 3D Warehouse.
• Place As Model — a SketchUp model from 3D Warehouse.
• Share Model — to upload your models as SketchUp files to 3D Warehouse
Working Offline
The Google Earth cache is stored in the folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\<user>\Local Settings\Application
Data\Google\Google Desktop Search\
Play Camera Animation in Google Earth
This tool allows a user to play a MicroStation camera animation in Google Earth. It
does not allow one to play or export any other kind of animation to Google Earth.
To use this tool, do the following.
 How to play a MicroStation camera animation in Google Earth:
1. Open up a 3D DGN file with a Camera Animation loaded. Refer to
Animation.dgn for more information.
2. Open Google Earth.
3. Activate the “Google Earth Play” tool. The camera animation will play in
Google Earth. You can pause the animation by right clicking in your
MicroStation view and restart it by left‐clicking.

Creating PDF Output with 3D Content
Notes about this tool:
In order to create your own camera animation, simply follow the normal
procedures outlined in MicroStation’s help file. The only extra step needed to
play your animation in Google Earth is to geo‐locate your file in some way. You
do not need to export any geometry from MicroStation to Google Earth for
this feature to work.
Certain views such as those that have the camera too close to the ground or
not pointed down enough are problematic in Google Earth. If you find that
your animation is jumpy, this is most likely the issue.
This tool combined with the Google Earth Pro Movie Maker module can be
used to create effective presentation aids.
 Optional Exercise
1 Open the model Extra Google Earth.
2 Reference the end of the bridge to the following coordinates:
Latitude: 25°22'19.32"N
Longitude: 51°31'57.18"E
In Acrobat 7.0, Adobe Systems added the ability to include 3D geometry within
their PDF format. The 3D portions of a PDF file are referred to as 3D annotations.
With Acrobat 7.0 Reader, it is possible to view, navigate and interact with the 3D
Annotations.
Typically, PDF documents printed from MicroStation contain 3D annotations that
encapsulate everything required to visualize a design. This includes model
geometry, materials, lighting, and texture maps. 3D annotations also can contain
animations, both of the model geometry and of fly through animations of the
viewing camera.
In addition, you can integrate 3D annotations into existing documents, and
instructions for adding links and book marks to let the user interactively control
the viewing of the 3D content.

Integrating 3D PDF Annotations into PDF documents
MicroStation’s 3D printing produces either separate PDF documents with a 3D
annotation in each, or (with batch printing) a multi‐page PDF document with
separate 3D annotations on each page. While these can be useful in their own
right, the real power of 3D annotations within PDF is in their ability to include
them within an existing PDF document such as a marketing brochure, a design
portfolio, or a technical manual. Essentially, there are 2 methods for doing this –
both of which require Adobe Acrobat Professional 7.0 or better.
With the Universal 3D (U3D) method, you do the following.
1 Export U3D files from MicroStation.
2 Insert the U3D files into the PDF document with the 3D Tool in Acrobat
Professional (select Tools > Advanced Editing > 3D Tool).
When MicroStation generates a U3D file, it also generates a JavaScript file
with the same name but the “.js” extension. This file contains additional
information and JavaScript code that enhance the behavior of the 3D
Annotation within Acrobat. It includes code to control animations and
additional tools to control geometry display.
The primary disadvantage of using the U3D method for creating 3D
annotations is that Acrobat Professional does not extract the initial and
saved view information from the U3D file. These views, however, do exist
within the U3D file, so it is possible that this limitation will be addressed in
a future version of Acrobat Professional. At this time, it is probably
preferable to use PDF to contain the 3D geometry (and views) as described
in Method 2 (below). If the U3D method is used, it is necessary to use the
Acrobat navigational tools to recreate the initial view and any saved views
that are required.
With the Inserting PDF Pages with 3D Annotations method, you do the following.
1 Create PDF pages, with 3D content, from MicroStation.
2 Insert the MicroStation PDF pages into the document with Acrobat
Professional (select Documents > Insert Pages).
This is the preferred method as it preserves, within the PDF document, all
of the content that MicroStation generates, including the initial view and
the saved views. Once the page is inserted in the document, the Acrobat
Professional editing tools can be used to add additional text, images, etc.,
onto the page containing the 3D annotation. These tools are somewhat
limited, so this method also is somewhat awkward, but in most cases it
works well.

For instances where there is a good deal of complex existing content on the page
to contain the 3D annotation, or more than one 3D annotation exists on a single
page, it may be preferable to use Method 1 (U3D) and recreate the view
information.
Adding links and bookmarks
Bookmarks and Links are valuable navigation aids within 2D documents. They are
also extremely useful in documents with 3D annotations as they can provide
familiar controls to a user who may be encountering 3D data for the first time.
Acrobat Professional provides tools for connecting bookmarks and links to 3D
views, and to user defined JavaScripts.
The process of connecting a Link or Bookmark to a 3D view is straightforward and
described in the Acrobat Professional help file.
Using JavaScript to control 3D annotations
JavaScript is the programming language provided by Adobe for advanced scripting
within PDF files. By selecting the Run a JavaScript entry for the action, for either a
link or bookmark, a JavaScript is run whenever the link or bookmark is selected. A
complete description of JavaScript and the 3D interface in particular is available
from Adobe. Details on how to do some rudimentary scripting to control the 3D
annotations generated by MicroStation are included below:
In general, in order to control a 3D annotation it is necessary to get the 3D
annotation object. The 3D annotations for a given page number are available
through the global function getAnnots3D (see the Adobe JavaScript Scripting
Reference for additional details). When MicroStation generates the JavaScript for
a 3D annotation, it adds several functions to the context3D member to allow
convenient control of the annotation.
Creating a 3D PDF
New features have been added to MicroStation V8 XM Edition's U3D functionality.
New features include:
• Support for clip volumes, clip masks, and reference clip boundaries
• Support for raster references

• Mesh Tolerance
• Support for Engineering Links
• Publish reference and level structure to model tree
• Global lighting settings
In order to take advantage of these new features Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat
7.07 is required.
In this exercise you will be using the Print dialog. This same capability of
publishing PDF files with 3D content is available in MicroStation PDF Composer.
On‐Line Help Topics: MicroStation > Working With Complete Designs > Printing >
Printing Basics > 3D Content in PDF Files and What's New? > 3D Content in PDF
Files
In this exercise you will be using MicroStation's Print dialog to create a PDF that
includes 3D data. New U3D features that will be covered are Engineering Links,
raster references, and reference and level structure in the model tree.
 Exercise: MicroStation Printing and 3D PDF
1 Continuing in Import‐Export.dgn, in the Google Earth model, select
Utilities > Saved Views.
2 Apply the Thomas P. Bentley Building Parking Lot view to View 1.
3 Select Tools > Engineering Links.
4 Select Edit Engineering Links.

5 Place the pointer over 1 of the columns on the front entrance to the
building, click it and accept to show the link in the Edit dialog.
This shape has an Engineering Link to the http://www.bentley.com web
page. This link along with others in the file will be included in the U3D
model in the exported PDF file.
6 Select File > Print to open the Print dialog.
7 Select File > Select Windows Printer, and select pdf.pltcfg.
8 Select the ANSI B Paper Size.
9 Select Tools > Maximize and maximize the plot to the B size form.
10 In the Print dialog, select Plot to 3D.

11 In the Print dialog, select Settings > 3D Plotting to open the 3D Plotting
Options.
12 Set the Lighting Mode to Day, and then click OK.
13 Select File > Print.
14 Select the directory C:\ as the output directory, and leave the file name as
Import‐Export‐Google Earth‐000.pdf.
15 Click Save.
In the next exercise, you will view the PDF document you just published that
included the Google Earth 3D model. Adobe Acrobat 7.07 or later is required to
view the new 3D PDF features.
 Exercise: View a 3D model in Adobe Acrobat
1 Open C:\Import‐Export.pdf in Adobe Acrobat.
Note: The saved views, raster data that was in the 3D model as well as the
Engineering Links were included with the U3D model in the PDF.

2 Click Views option menu on the 3D tool bar and select the Thomas P.
Bentley Building Parking Lot view.
3 Place the pointer over the front entrance to the building.
It highlights, indicating that there is a link on the element.
4 Right click on the front entrance and select Follow Link from the pop‐up
menu.
5 Select the Model Tree tab on the left side.

This shows you the levels and references associated with the 3D model.
Click on the Level Building Roof in the top Model Tree frame to turn it off.
Click it again to turn it back on.
The middle frame in the Model Tree is the view control. Here you see the
saved views for the model.

Module Review
6 Click on different views and then click the Default View button to return to
the default view for the model.
7 Navigate the view using the rotate, pan and zoom commands.
8 Save the view by clicking Create View in the view control area
A view called NewView6 is placed in the list.
9 Click on it and rename it MyView.
10 Navigate to another view and then select MyView.
11 Right click on MyView in the ModelTree and select Delete View.
12 Exit Acrobat.
Module Review
Questions
1 When creating sheets for printing, you have options regarding assembly.
What are they?
2 In the event that you need to change the scale of a drawing, how can you
quickly change the size of all text?
3 Which configuration variable can you set to ensure associated dimensions
remain associated?
4 When you export a 3D design file to a 2D design file, what happens to
elements during the process?

Module Review
Answers
1 Reference the geometry at full‐scale, scaling the border reference up to fit
the geometry. Print at the required scale.
Reference the border at full‐scale, scaling the geometry down to fit the
border. Print at full‐scale.
2 By changing the Annotation Scale setting for the model.
3 Create MS_HLINEMAINTAINASSOC with a value of 1.
4 It reduces all the z‐ values for elements to one z‐ value, effectively
flattening the design.

Course Summary
Course Summary
Now you will be able to:
• Use 3D view controls to see what you need when you need to
• Use 2D tools in 3D models
• Apply AccuDraw in 3D
• Use 3D primitive solids for basic forms and design
• Modify and do basic analysis of solids
• Create and modify B‐spline surfaces
• Create parametric feature models
• Use advanced feature modeling techniques to increase 3D efficiency
• Apply conceptual modeling tools for push/pull modeling
• Use mesh modeling for site design and soil modeling
• Apply drawing composition tools to create 2D production drawings
• Use the rendering and animation tools to make your 3D model photo‐realistic
Feb-09 569 Course Summary

Course Review
Course Review
Now that you have completed this course, let’s measure what you have learned.
Questions
1 In 2D models, you work on a design plane. What is the working area in 3D?
2 What is the Active Depth?
3 How can you to move focus to the AccuDraw window?
7 What happens if you increase the size of the solids modeling area?
8 Where can you change the SmartSolid display mode?
9 What do the U and V directions represent, respectively?
10 What methods can you use to select faces, or any element, that's hidden?
12 Name 3 ways to create meshes.
13 If a section element is in an opposing direction, how you can reverse its
direction?
14 What are Surface Normals?
16 What is a Local variable?
17 True or False: You can specify that the materials for a DGN file be stored
within the file itself.
18 Name three global lighting types that can be used in rendered images.
19 When creating sheets for printing, you have options regarding assembly.
What are they?
Course Summary 570 Feb-09

Course Review
Answers
1 In 3D models, the 2D design plane becomes a 3D cube, known as the
design cube. All geometry is drawn in this design cube. Locations in the
cube are defined by x‐, ‐y and z‐ coordinates.
2 The Active Depth is a plane, parallel to the view or screen, which is always
located within the Display Depth of a view. The Active Depth of a view
determines where data points fall by default. If you enter a data point in a
3D view, without snapping to an existing element, it falls on the Active
Depth plane.
3 poles required.
7 It will reduce the available precision.
8 The Display Mode setting in the B‐spline and 3D dialog.
9 Rows and columns.
10 Highlight the nearest face or element, and the reset until you select
hidden face. Rotate the view or use another view.
11 Sometimes called a control net, the control polygon determines shape.
12 By Element or Shape, by Contours, by Points.
13 With the Change Element Direction tool or by using the Surface by Section
tool and a Ctrl data point on the element.
14 Indicators that are generated every time you create a surface.
can modify them interactively, similar to 2D elements.
16 It is a variable that is created by MicroStation automatically, for all feature
parameters of a solid, and available for that solid (only).
17 Reference the geometry at full‐scale, scaling the border reference up to fit
the geometry. Print at the required scale.
18 Reference the border at full‐scale, scaling the geometry down to fit the
border. Print at full‐scale.
19 True. Rather than using an external.pal file.


Micro Station V8i Everything 3D

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micro Station V8i Everything 3D

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

MicroStation V8i Everything 3D ii Feb-09

Feb-09 iii Table of Contents

Table of Contents iv Feb-09

Feb-09 v MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Advanced Solid Modeling _____________________________ 145

Solid Utilities _______________________________________ 193

Table of Contents vi Feb-09

Conceptual Modeling ________________________________ 215

Solid Modeling Challenge Exercises _____________________ 229

Introduction to Feature Modeling ______________________ 245

Feb-09 vii MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Advanced Feature Modeling __________________________ 277

Table of Contents viii Feb-09

Introduction to Surfaces ______________________________ 327

Surface Creation ____________________________________ 335

Feb-09 ix MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Surface Modification and Blending _____________________ 367

Modify B‐spline Surfaces _____________________________ 393

Surface Utilities _____________________________________ 407

Table of Contents x Feb-09

Visualizing a 3D Design _______________________________ 441

Feb-09 xi MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Table of Contents xii Feb-09

Using Dynamic Views ________________________________ 507

Feb-09 xiii MicroStation V8i Everything 3D

Course Summary ____________________________________ 569

Table of Contents xiv Feb-09

Feb-09 1 Course Overview

Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Course Overview 2 Feb-09

Feb-09 3 Course Overview

Feb-09 4 Course Overview

Feb-09 5 3D View Control

Copyright © 2009 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

3D View Control 6 Feb-09

Feb-09 7 3D View Control

3D View Control 8 Feb-09

Feb-09 9 3D View Control

3D View Control 10 Feb-09

Feb-09 11 3D View Control

3D View Control 12 Feb-09

Feb-09 13 3D View Control

3D View Control 14 Feb-09

Feb-09 15 3D View Control

3D View Control 16 Feb-09

Feb-09 17 3D View Control

3D View Control 18 Feb-09

Feb-09 19 3D View Control

3D View Control 20 Feb-09

Feb-09 21 3D View Control

3D View Control 22 Feb-09

Feb-09 23 3D View Control

3D View Control 24 Feb-09

Feb-09 25 3D View Control

3D View Control 26 Feb-09

Feb-09 27 3D View Control

3D View Control 28 Feb-09

Feb-09 29 3D View Control

3D View Control 30 Feb-09

Feb-09 31 3D View Control

3D View Control 32 Feb-09

Feb-09 33 3D View Control

3D View Control 34 Feb-09